JP7775927B2 - gaming machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to an amusement machine.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known types of gaming machines. These gaming machines are known to be configured so that an internal lottery is held when certain lottery conditions are met, and a bonus is awarded to the player depending on the results of the internal lottery.

Specifically, with regard to slot machines, when medals have been bet as gaming media and the start lever is operated, an internal lottery is conducted and the reels begin to spin. If the stop switch is operated while the reels are spinning, the reels stop spinning. If the reels stop as a result of the internal lottery, a bonus according to the result is awarded (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707

Here, the gaming machines exemplified above need to be designed to enhance the enjoyment of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The present invention was made in consideration of the circumstances exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can enhance the enjoyment of gaming.

The present invention provides
A plurality of rotating bodies on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
A display unit that allows some of the patterns on each of the rotating bodies to be visible;
a start operation means for starting rotation of each of the rotating bodies when operated;
a stop operation means for stopping the rotation of each of the rotating bodies when operated;
a drive control means for starting rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and for stopping rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
a lottery means for holding a lottery to determine whether or not to award a special benefit to a player based on the operation of the start operation means;
an awarding means for awarding a game value as a benefit corresponding to a predetermined result when the result of the lottery by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising:
a first gaming state and a second gaming state in which the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be a predetermined re-game result is different;
a means for transitioning from the first gaming state to the second gaming state when a predetermined transition condition is established based on a lottery result by the lottery means;
a mode notifying means capable of notifying a mode of operation of the stop operation means ;
Equipped with
A specific state in which the mode notification can be executed is set,
a first termination means capable of terminating the specific state based on the remaining number of the specific state;
a second termination means for terminating the specific state regardless of the number of remaining specific states when a predetermined forced termination condition that may be established depending on the progress of the game is established ;
Equipped with
It is configured so that a game in a predetermined state in which the mode notification is not executed is more advantageous to a player when the game in the predetermined state is executed in the second game state than when the game in the predetermined state in which the mode notification is not executed is executed in the first game state,
A means for grasping the establishment of a specific condition that will result in the establishment of the predetermined forced termination condition in a situation before the predetermined forced termination condition is established;
means for executing a predetermined game in the second game state, which is the predetermined state, after the specific state is ended when the specific condition is established in the specific state and the specific state is ended by the second ending means;
a means for preventing the predetermined game from being executed after the specific state ends when the specific condition is not established in the specific state and the specific state is ended by the first ending means;
means for executing a notification corresponding to the predetermined game being executable before the specific state is terminated by the second termination means;
Equipped with
When the specific state is terminated by the second termination means and the specified game is executed after the specific state, the specified presentation in the specified game is performed in association with the specified presentation in the game in the specific state before the termination .

This invention makes it possible to increase the enjoyment of games.

1 is a front view of a slot machine according to an embodiment. 1 is a perspective view of the slot machine with the front door closed. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of the slot machine with the front door open. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the arrangement of symbols on each reel. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the symbols visible through the display window and the pay lines. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the symbols visible through the display window and the pay lines. FIG. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between winning modes and the benefits to be awarded. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between winning modes and the benefits to be awarded. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between winning modes and the benefits to be awarded. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the main control device. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device. 10 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing by the main control device. 10 is a flowchart showing normal processing by the main control device. 10 is a flowchart showing lottery processing. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a lottery table for a normal gaming state. 10 is a flowchart showing a reel control process. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the operation sequence of the stop switches and the winning patterns that are achieved. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining reel stop control. 10 is a flowchart showing RT state processing. A figure showing an example of a lottery table for the first RT state. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the operation sequence of the stop switches and the winning patterns that are achieved. A figure showing an example of a lottery table for the second RT state. A figure showing an example of a lottery table for the third RT state. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing an overview of each state. 10 is a flowchart showing bonus state processing. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the operation sequence of the stop switches and the winning patterns that are achieved. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a lottery table for a BB state. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the transition relationship between states. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing an overview of a display mode. 10 is a flowchart showing lottery result handling processing. 10 is a flowchart showing the first specific role processing. 10 is a flowchart showing the second specific role processing. 10 is a flowchart showing an additional notification process. 10 is a flowchart showing the third specific role processing. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for a specialized zone. 10 is a diagram for explaining the main results of a lottery relating to an instruction function and the setting difference in winning probability. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a mode lottery table for transitioning between display modes. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a premonition game number table. A figure showing an example of an additional game number lottery table. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an additional lottery table. This is a diagram to explain the relationship between the actual number of remaining games in the advantageous zone and the displayed number of remaining games. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a later-addition lottery table. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of an additional notification timing table. 10 is a flowchart showing a mode transition notification process. An explanatory diagram showing an overview of the push order notification display performed on the auxiliary display unit. This is a flowchart showing the push order role processing. 10 is a flowchart showing a winning result response process. 10 is a flowchart showing a number-of-games management process. 10 is a flowchart showing an end determination process. FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining an overview of an instruction monitor and a section indicator. 10 is a flowchart showing a first section display process. 10 is a flowchart showing a second section display process. 10 is a flowchart showing remaining game number management processing. A diagram to explain the relationship between the start game and end game of the advantageous zone and the display on the zone indicator. 10 is a flowchart showing a performance setting process performed by a sub-side display control device. 10 is a flowchart showing a bet effect setting process. 10 is a flowchart showing a start-up effect setting process. A flowchart showing the process for notifying the order of pressing buttons. A flowchart showing the setting process for the additional effects. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for setting effects at the time of each stop operation. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for setting effects when all the devices are stopped. This is a flowchart showing the bonus effect setting process. This is a flowchart showing the process for notifying transition trigger roles. 10 is a flowchart showing a continuous performance setting process. A diagram showing the relationship between notification timing and additional effects. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating an example of display effects by the auxiliary display unit. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating an example of display effects by the auxiliary display unit. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating an example of display effects by the auxiliary display unit. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating an example of display effects by the auxiliary display unit. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating an example of display effects by the auxiliary display unit. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a continuous effect. A figure showing an example of a lottery table for the 4th RT state. 10 is a flowchart showing a fixed RT game number setting process. 10 is a flowchart showing a fixed RT process. 10 is a flowchart showing a fixed RT state notification process. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating an example of display effects by the auxiliary display unit. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating an example of display effects by the auxiliary display unit. 10 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the AT mode and the RT state. 10 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the AT mode and the RT state. 10 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the AT mode and the RT state. 10 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the AT mode and the RT state in the first modification. 10 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the AT mode and the RT state. 10 is a flowchart showing a fixed RT state notification process. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating an example of display effects by the auxiliary display unit. In variant example 2, (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display effect by the auxiliary display unit, and (b) is a timing chart showing the timing of the end of the RT state according to the timing of transition to the fixed RT state. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for notifying a subsequent vehicle in a third modified example. 10 is a flowchart showing a fixed RT process. This is a flowchart showing the push order role processing. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of a freeze timing table. 10 is a flowchart showing a freeze process. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an outline of a freeze effect. In the fourth modified example, (a) is a flowchart showing the fixed RT game number setting process, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a fixed RT game number table. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for starting counting the number of continuations of the AT mode in the fifth modification. FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram showing the transition relationship between states in Modification 6. A figure showing an example of a lottery table for the third RT state. 10 is a flowchart showing the second specific role processing. 10 is a flowchart showing a winning result response process. 10 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the AT mode and the RT state. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing an example of a lottery table for a normal gaming state in Modification Example 7. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the transition relationship between states. 10 is a flowchart showing a fixed RT process. FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram showing the transition relationship between states in Modification 8. 10 is a flowchart showing a fixed RT process. 10 is a flowchart showing the process of adding the number of games in the AT mode in the second embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing a fixed RT process. A figure showing an example of a fixed RT state game number table. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the winning modes, the benefits awarded, and a part of the lottery table. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a fixed RT game number setting process. This is a flowchart showing part of the push order role processing. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the winning modes, the benefits awarded, and the order in which the stop switches are operated and the winning modes that are achieved in Modification 1. An explanatory diagram showing a part of the lottery table for each RT state in Modification Example 2. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing the winning modes, the benefits awarded, and a part of the lottery table in the third embodiment. FIG. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the operation sequence of the stop switches and the winning patterns that are achieved. 10 is a flowchart showing a fixed number of games setting process. This is a flowchart showing part of the push order role processing. 10 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the AT mode and the RT state. A figure showing an example of an additional lottery table in variant example 1. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating an example of display effects by the auxiliary display unit. In variant example 2, (a) is a flowchart showing part of the second specific role processing, (b) is a flowchart showing part of the game number management processing, and (c) is a timing chart showing the relationship between the AT mode and the RT state. A flowchart showing part of the push order notification process in the fourth embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing a part of the process for setting effects when all the devices are stopped. This is a timing chart showing the relationship between specific effects, AT mode, and RT state. This is a timing chart showing the relationship between specific effects, AT mode, and RT state in a modified example.

First Embodiment
An embodiment of the present invention, which is applied to a reel-type gaming machine, specifically a slot machine, will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. Figure 1 is a front view of the slot machine 10, Figure 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 closed, Figure 3 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 open, Figure 4 is a rear view of the front door 12, and Figure 5 is a front view of the cabinet 11.

As shown in Figures 1 to 5, the slot machine 10 has a housing 11 that forms its outer shell. The housing 11 is generally formed in a box shape with an open front, and is attached to the so-called island equipment by nailing it when installed in an amusement hall.

A front door 12 is attached to the front side of the housing 11 in an openable and closable manner. A pair of upper and lower support shafts 13a, 13b are provided on the housing 11's left side when viewed from the front, and bearings 14a, 14b are provided on the front door 12 at positions corresponding to the support shafts 13a, 13b. When the support shafts 13a, 13b are inserted into the bearings 14a, 14b, the front door 12 is rotatably supported relative to the housing 11 about an opening/closing axis extending vertically between the support shafts 13a, 13b. Rotating the front door 12 allows the front open side of the housing 11 to be opened or closed. The front door 12 is locked and cannot be opened by a locking device 20 provided on its backside. A key cylinder 21 integrated with the locking device 20 is provided at the upper right end of the front door 12, and the locked state can be released by operating a specific key on the key cylinder 21.

A game panel 25 that notifies the player of the game status is provided near the upper center of the front door 12. The game panel 25 has three vertically long display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R arranged side by side, and the interior of the slot machine 10 can be seen through each of the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R. Note that the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R may be combined into one common display window.

As shown in FIG. 3, the interior of the housing 11 is divided into two sections, upper and lower, by a partition plate 30, and a reel unit 31 constituting the variable display means is attached to the upper part of the partition plate 30. The reel unit 31 includes a left reel 32L, a center reel 32M, and a right reel 32R, each formed in a cylindrical (annular) shape. Each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is rotatably supported so that its central axis coincides with the axis of rotation of the corresponding reel. The axes of rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R are arranged on the same axis extending approximately horizontally, and each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponds one-to-one with each display window 26L, 26M, and 26R. Therefore, a portion of the surface of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is visible through the corresponding display window 26L, 26M, and 26R. Furthermore, when reels 32L, 32M, and 32R rotate forward, the surfaces of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are displayed through the respective display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R as if they are moving from top to bottom.

Here, we will briefly explain the configuration of the reel unit 31.

Each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is connected to a stepping motor, which drives each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R to rotate individually, i.e., independently. The stepping motor is configured to rotate once by applying a drive signal (hereinafter referred to as an excitation pulse) of, for example, 504 pulses. This excitation pulse controls the rotational position of the stepping motor, i.e., the rotational position of the reel. Furthermore, the reel unit 31 is equipped with a reel index sensor on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R to detect when the reel has rotated once. Each time the reel index sensor detects that the reel has rotated once, it outputs a detection signal to the main control device 101, described below. Therefore, the main control device 101 can check and correct the angular position of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R for each rotation based on the detection signal from the reel index sensor and the number of excitation pulses output before that detection signal was input.

Multiple symbols serving as identification information are drawn on the outer periphery of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R in the direction of its long side (circumference direction). More specifically, 21 symbols are drawn at equal intervals. Therefore, to switch from one symbol to the next at a specified position, 24 excitation pulses (= 504 pulses ÷ 21 symbols) must be output. Furthermore, the main control unit 101 can determine which symbols are visible through the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R, and can stop a specified symbol at a position visible through the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R, based on the number of excitation pulses output after the reel index sensor detection signal is input.

Next, we will explain the symbols depicted on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R.

Figure 6 shows the arrangement of symbols on the left reel 32L, center reel 32M, and right reel 32R. As shown in the figure, 21 symbols are arranged in a row on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Furthermore, numbers ranging from 0 to 20 are assigned to each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, but these numbers are used by the main control device 101 to identify the symbols visible through the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R, and are not actually assigned to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. However, these numbers will be used in the following explanation.

There are 11 types of symbols: "Red Bell" symbol (e.g., number 7 on left reel 32L), "White Bell" symbol (e.g., number 20 on left reel 32L), "First Replay" symbol (e.g., number 19 on left reel 32L), "Second Replay" symbol (e.g., number 6 on left reel 32L), "Red 7" symbol (e.g., number 10 on left reel 32L), "Watermelon" symbol (e.g., number 8 on left reel 32L), "Cherry" symbol (e.g., number 4 on left reel 32L), "Black BAR" symbol (e.g., number 18 on left reel 32L), "White BAR" symbol (e.g., number 17 on left reel 32L), "LUCKY" symbol (e.g., number 5 on left reel 32L), and "Youth" symbol (e.g., number 0 on left reel 32L). As shown in Figure 6, the number and arrangement order of the various symbols on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R are completely different.

Each display window 26L, 26M, 26R is shaped so that only three of the 21 symbols on the corresponding reel are visible in their entirety. Therefore, when each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped, 3 x 3 = 9 symbols are visible through the display window 26L, 26M, 26R.

In this slot machine 10, the game results of each game are announced using a total of three symbol combinations, one symbol on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, of the visible symbols. As described above, 3 x 3 = 9 symbols are visible, and as shown in Figure 7, the combinations of these three symbols include, for example, the combination of symbols that stop on the upper line L1 connecting the upper symbols on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, the combination of symbols that stop on the middle line L2 connecting the middle symbols on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and the combination of symbols that stop on the lower line L3 connecting the lower symbols on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. There are also combinations of symbols that stop on a downward-sloping line L4 connecting the top symbol on the left reel 32L, the middle symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the bottom symbol on the right reel 32R, as well as combinations of symbols that stop on an upward-sloping line L5 connecting the bottom symbol on the left reel 32L, the middle symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the top symbol on the right reel 32R. There are also combinations of symbols that stop on a curved line L6 connecting the top symbol on the left reel 32L, the middle symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the middle symbol on the right reel 32R. The above lines L1 to L5 are straight lines when the symbols are lined up, while the curved line L6 is a line that bends when the symbols are lined up. There are other combinations of symbols that stop on curved lines besides the curved line L6, but we will not discuss them here.

Of these lines L1 to L6, some are activated and some are not, depending on the number of medals bet. When symbols stop in a predetermined combination on an activated line, i.e., an activated line, a win is achieved and a bonus is awarded in which a predetermined number of medals, which serve as gaming media, are paid out, or a bonus is awarded in which the game state is changed. On the other hand, when symbols stop in a predetermined combination on an inactivated line, a win is not achieved and the bonus is not awarded.

In this slot machine 10, there are three cases where only the downward-sloping right line L4 is an active line, as shown in FIG. 8(a); where the two combined lines, the bottom line L3 and the downward-sloping right line L4, are active lines, as shown in FIG. 8(b); and where only the curved line L6 is an active line, as shown in FIG. 8(c). More specifically, when a game is started with three medals bet, only the downward-sloping right line L4 is an active line. When a game is started with two medals bet, the bottom line L3 and the downward-sloping right line L4 are active lines. Furthermore, when a game is started with one medal bet, only the curved line L6 is an active line. The three combined lines, the top line L1, the middle line L2, and the upward-sloping right line L5, are not active lines. Hereinafter, a game started with three medals bet is referred to as a three-bet game, a game started with two medals bet is referred to as a two-bet game, and a game started with one medal bet is referred to as a one-bet game.

Figures 9 to 11 show the correspondence between winning symbol combinations and the benefits awarded when a winning symbol combination is achieved.

The small prize wins that result in medal payouts are the 1st small prize win through the 41st small prize win.

When the "red bell" or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red bell" or "white bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on an active line, the first small win is achieved. When the first small win is achieved, nine medals are paid out in a three-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in a two-bet game.

For the 2nd small win to the 26th small win, the winning symbol combinations are different, but in a 3-bet game, the winning symbols are the "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white BAR" symbol, "red 7" symbol, "cherry" symbol, "white bell" symbol or "LUCKY" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "white BAR" symbol, "young man" symbol, "white bell" symbol, "red 7" symbol or "second replay" symbol on the right reel 32R, all stopping on the top line L1, i.e., the "bell" symbols on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R stop on the top line L1. For example, if the "red bell" or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L stops on the top row, the "cherry" symbol on the middle reel 32M stops on the middle row, and the "white BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R stops on the bottom row, the eighth small win will be achieved. As shown in Figure 6, the "red bell" symbol is located on the middle reel 32M in a position (number 12) adjacent to the "cherry" symbol (number 11) on the upstream side, and the "red bell" symbol is located on the right reel 32R in a position (number 20) one symbol away from the "white BAR" symbol (number 18) on the upstream side. Therefore, when the 8th small win occurs on the downward-sloping right line L4, the "red bell" or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the center reel 32M, and the "red bell" symbol on the right reel 32R will stop on the upper line L1. When the 2nd to 26th small wins occur, 3 medals will be paid out in a 3-bet game, and 14 medals will be paid out in a 2-bet game.

The 27th minor win is determined by the symbol on the left reel 32L, which is the designated reel among the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Specifically, the 27th minor win occurs when the "cherry" symbol on the left reel 32L stops in the upper or lower row. In this case, the symbols on the center reel 32M and right reel 32R do not affect the win determination. In other words, regardless of the symbols on the center reel 32M and right reel 32R, the 27th minor win occurs when the "cherry" symbol on the left reel 32L stops in the upper row or stops, i.e., when the "cherry" symbol or the "second replay" symbol stops on an active line. When the 27th minor win occurs, three medals are paid out in a three-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in a two-bet game.

The 28th minor win occurs when the "cherry" symbol on the left reel 32L stops on the top or bottom row, and the "cherry" symbols stop aligned on the downward-sloping right line L4. More specifically, the 28th minor win occurs when the "cherry" symbol or "second replay" symbol stops on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol, "white bell" symbol or "cherry" symbol stops on the middle reel 32M, and the "cherry" symbol, "first replay" symbol or "second replay" symbol stops on the right reel 32R. When the 28th minor win occurs, three medals are paid out in a three-bet game, and 14 medals are paid out in a two-bet game.

Additionally, to provide additional information about the relationship between the 27th and 28th small wins, when the "Cherry" or "Second Replay" symbols stop on the left reel 32L, the 27th small win is achieved regardless of the symbols stopped on the middle reel 32M and right reel 32R. However, depending on the symbols stopped on the middle reel 32M and right reel 32R, the 28th small win may be achieved instead of the 27th small win. In other words, although the winning patterns for the 27th small win include the winning patterns for the 28th small win, the 27th and 28th small wins are clearly distinguished when determining whether they are wins.

The 29th small win occurs when the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R all stop on an active line. In other words, if the active line is the downward-sloping line L4, the 29th small win occurs when the "watermelon" symbols all stop in a downward-sloping pattern. When the 29th small win occurs, 5 medals are paid out in a 3-bet game, and 14 medals are paid out in a 2-bet game.

The 30th small win occurs when the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R all stop on the top line L1. More specifically, the 30th small win occurs when the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red bell" symbol on the right reel 32R all stop on an active line. When the 30th small win occurs, 5 medals are paid out in a 3-bet game, and 14 medals are paid out in a 2-bet game.

When the "Black BAR", "Young Man", "Watermelon" and "First Replay" symbols on the left reel 32L, the "Red Bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Red Bell" or "White Bell" symbols on the right reel 32R stop on an active line, the 31st minor win is achieved. When the 31st minor win is achieved, 9 medals are paid out in a 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in a 2-bet game.

For the 32nd to 35th small wins, if they occur in a 3-bet game, 3 medals will be paid out, and in a 2-bet game, 14 medals will be paid out.

The 36th minor winning combination occurs when, for example, a player operates the stop switches 42-44 aiming for the "watermelon" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R, and the "watermelon" symbols on the left reel 32L and center reel 32M, or the left reel 32L and right reel 32R, stop on an active line, while the "watermelon" symbols on the remaining reels do not stop on an active line, resulting in a so-called "watermelon tenpai miss" winning combination. When the 36th minor winning combination is achieved, three medals are paid out in a three-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in a two-bet game.

When the "Red Bell" or "White Bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Black BAR," "Watermelon," or "Cherry" symbol on the center reel 32M, and the "Red Bell," "White Bell," or "Young Man" symbols on the right reel 32R stop on an active line, the 37th minor win is achieved. As shown in Figure 6, the left reel 32L has the "Second Replay" symbol located adjacent to the "Red Bell" symbol (number 7) downstream (number 6), and the "First Replay" symbol located adjacent to the main "White Bell" symbols (numbers 3, 12, 15, and 20) downstream (numbers 2, 11, 14, and 19). On the right reel 32R, the "First Replay" or "Second Replay" symbols are located adjacent to the "Red Bell" symbols (numbers 2, 5, 12, and 20) and upstream (numbers 3, 6, 16, and 0), respectively. The "First Replay" symbol is located adjacent to the "White Bell" symbol (number 10) and upstream (number 11). Therefore, when the 37th minor win occurs on the downward-sloping right line L4, the "Bell" and "Replay" symbols are generally in tenpai on the left reel 32L and right reel 32R, while the "Bell" and "Replay" symbols on the center reel 32M are not stopped, resulting in a so-called double tenpai miss. When the 37th minor win occurs, three medals are paid out in a three-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in a two-bet game.

When the "White BAR," "Young Man," "Watermelon," and "First Replay" symbols on the left reel 32L, the "Red Bell" symbol on the center reel 32M, and the "First Replay," "Watermelon," and "Black BAR" symbols on the right reel 32R stop on an active line, the 38th minor win is achieved. In a 3-bet game, if the player operates the left stop switch when the number 4 "Cherry" symbol on the left reel 32L reaches the top or bottom row, the 38th minor win will occur when the "Red Bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Red Bell" symbol on the center reel 32M, and the "Red Bell" or "White Bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the center line L2. If the 38th minor win is achieved, 3 medals will be paid out in a 3-bet game, and 15 medals will be paid out in a 2-bet game.

When the "Red Bell" or "White Bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Red Bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Black BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on an active line, the 39th small win is achieved. The 39th small win is a winning mode that can only be achieved in a 3-bet game. When the 39th small win is achieved, 9 medals will be paid out.

If the "Red Bell" or "White Bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Red Bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Red 7" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on an active line, the 40th small win will be achieved. The 40th small win is a winning mode that can only be achieved in a 3-bet game. When the 40th small win is achieved, 9 medals will be paid out.

When the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "black BAR" or "cherry" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on an active line, the 41st small win is achieved. When the 41st small win is achieved, 3 medals are paid out in a 3-bet game, and 14 medals are paid out in a 2-bet game.

Winnings that grant the replay privilege, which allows you to play the next game without inserting a medal, include the 1st replay winnings through the 12th replay winnings. Furthermore, if the 2nd replay winnings are achieved, the game state transitions to the 1st RT state; if the 3rd replay winnings are achieved, the game state transitions to the 2nd RT state; and if the 4th or 5th replay winnings are achieved, the game state transitions to the 3rd RT state. Finally, if the 11th or 12th replay winnings are achieved, the game state transitions to the 4th RT state.

State transition wins that only result in a transition of game state include the 1st BB win, the 2nd BB win, and the CB win.

If the "Red 7" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R stops on an active line, a first BB win is achieved, and if the "White BAR" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R stops on an active line, a second BB win is achieved. When these BB wins are achieved, the game state transitions to BB mode. Furthermore, when the "Red Bell" or "White Bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Red Bell" symbol on the center reel 32M, and the "Watermelon", "First Replay", and "Black BAR" symbols on the right reel 32R stop on an active line, a CB win is achieved. When a CB win is achieved, the game state transitions to CB mode.

In addition, although not a winning combination, there are certain winning combinations that will cause the game state to transition to the first RT state. Specifically, when the "red bell" or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white BAR", "LUCKY", "red 7", "white bell" or "cherry" symbol on the center reel 32M, and the "watermelon" or "first replay" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on an active line, the game state will transition to the first RT state. Additionally, if the "Red Bell" or "White Bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Red Bell" symbol on the center reel 32M, and the "White BAR", "Youth", "White Bell", "Red 7", or "Second Replay" symbols on the right reel 32R stop on an active line, the game state will transition to the first RT state. Hereinafter, the combinations of the above symbols will be referred to as transition results.

A start lever 41 is provided on the lower left side of the game panel 25, which is operated to start the rotation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. The start lever 41 constitutes a start operation means or a starting operation means that is operated to start the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, i.e., to start the variable display of symbols. When the start lever 41 is operated with a predetermined number of medals inserted, each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R begins to rotate.

To the right of the start lever 41 are button-shaped stop switches 42-44 that can be operated to individually stop each of the spinning reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Each stop switch 42-44 is located directly below the display window 26L, 26M, and 26R that corresponds to the reel 32L, 32M, and 32R to be stopped.

Stop detection sensors 42a-44a (Figure 12) are connected to the stop switches 42-44, respectively, and the stop detection sensors 42a-44a are connected to the main control device 101, which will be described later. The main control device 101 then determines that a stop switch 42-44 has been operated based on the detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a-44a. Specifically, when a stop switch 42-44 has not been operated, the stop detection sensors 42a-44a output a LOW detection signal. When a stop switch 42-44 is operated, this detection signal switches from LOW to HIGH. The main control device 101 detects this signal switch and determines that a stop switch 42-44 has been operated. When the main control device 101 determines that a stop switch 42-44 has been operated, it controls the reel corresponding to the operated switch to stop spinning.

In other words, when the left stop switch 42 is operated, the left reel 32L stops spinning, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated, the middle reel 32M stops spinning, and when the right stop switch 44 is operated, the right reel 32R stops spinning. The stop switches 42-44 constitute stop operation means that are operated to stop the variable display of symbols based on the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

A medal insertion slot 45 for inserting medals is provided below and to the right of the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R. The medal insertion slot 45 constitutes an input means for inputting gaming media. Furthermore, considering that the medal insertion slot 45 involves the player directly inserting medals, it can also be said to constitute a direct input means for directly inputting gaming media.

Medals inserted through the medal insertion slot 45 are guided to either the storage passage 47 or the discharge passage 48 by a selector 46, which serves as a passage switching means and is located on the back of the front door 12. More specifically, the selector 46 is equipped with a medal passage switching solenoid 46a. When the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is de-energized, the medals are guided to the discharge passage 48, and when the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is energized, the medals are guided to the storage passage 47. Medals guided to the storage passage 47 are guided to a hopper device 51 stored inside the housing 11. Meanwhile, medals guided to the discharge passage 48 are guided to a medal tray 50 through a medal discharge port 49 located at the bottom front of the front door 12, and are returned to the player.

The hopper device 51 is composed of a storage tank 52 that stores medals and a payout device 53 that pays out medals to players. The payout device 53 rotates a medal payout rotating plate (not shown) to discharge medals into an opening 48a in the discharge passage 48, and then pays out the medals to a medal tray 50 via the discharge passage 48. A reserve tank 54 is provided to the right of the hopper device 51 to prevent more than a predetermined amount of medals from accumulating in the storage tank 52. A guide plate 52a is provided inside the storage tank 52 of the hopper device 51 to discharge medals from the storage tank 52 to the reserve tank 54. Therefore, if medals accumulate above the height at which the guide plate 52a is installed, those medals will be stored in the reserve tank 54.

A button-shaped return switch 55 is provided below the medal insertion slot 45. If the return switch 55 is operated when a medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 45 becomes stuck in the selector 46, the selector 46 is mechanically linked and operated, and the medal stuck in the selector 46 is returned from the medal ejection slot 49.

A first credit insertion switch 56 is provided on the left below display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R for inserting three credited virtual medals as gaming media at a time. A second credit insertion switch 57 is provided to the right of the first credit insertion switch 56, and a third credit insertion switch 58 is provided to the left of the first credit insertion switch 56. The second credit insertion switch 57 is for inserting one virtual medal, and the third credit insertion switch 58 is for inserting two virtual medals at a time. Together with the medal insertion slot 45, the credit insertion switches 56-58 constitute input means for inputting gaming media. Furthermore, while the medal insertion slot 45 involves the player directly inserting medals, the credit insertion switches 56-58 merely involve the insertion of virtual medals based on stored memory. Considering this, they can also be said to constitute indirect input means for indirectly inputting gaming media.

Between the first credit insertion switch 56 and the second credit insertion switch 57 is provided an effect switch 66 that is operated when an effect occurs. In other words, to the left of the effect switch 66 are the first credit insertion switch 56 and the third credit insertion switch 58, and to the right of the effect switch 66 is the second credit insertion switch 57.

A settlement switch 59 is provided to the left of the start lever 41. In other words, this slot machine 10 has a credit function that stores and stores, as virtual medals, any surplus medals inserted up to a predetermined maximum value (50 medals) and medals paid out when a prize is won. If the settlement switch 59 is operated while virtual medals are stored and stored, the virtual medals are paid out as real medals from the medal outlet 49. In this case, when focusing on the function of paying out credited virtual medals as real medals, the settlement switch 59 can also be said to constitute a settlement operation means for actually paying out the stored and stored gaming media.

Below the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R of the game panel 25 are a credit display unit 60 that displays the number of virtual medals that have been credited, a remaining payout number display unit 61 that displays the number of medals remaining to be paid out until the BB state ends, and a payout number display unit 62 that displays the number of medals paid out when a win occurs. These display units 60-62 are made up of 7-segment displays, but can of course be replaced with LCD displays or the like.

Below the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R on the gaming panel 25, to the right of the payout number display unit 62, is an instruction monitor 68 that includes a push order indicator that notifies the player of the operation order of the stop switches 42-44, and a zone indicator that notifies the player of the operation order, thereby changing the winning rate of minor winning combinations and indicating advantageous zones that allow the player to play in an advantageous situation. The instruction monitor 68 will be explained in detail later.

The upper part of the front door 12 is provided with an upper lamp 63 that lights up and flashes as the game progresses, a pair of left and right speakers 64 that play various sound effects as the game progresses and notify the player of the game status, and an auxiliary display unit 65 that provides various information to the player. The auxiliary display unit 65 is used to perform various display effects as the game progresses, and since the play using each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R can be considered to be performed by the main display unit, it is referred to as the auxiliary display unit 65 in this embodiment. A display control device 81 for driving the upper lamp 63, speaker 64, and auxiliary display unit 65 is provided on the back of the auxiliary display unit 65.

A power supply box 70 is provided inside the housing 11 to the left of the hopper device 51. The power supply box 70 houses a power supply unit 91 and is equipped with a power switch 71, a reset switch 72, a setting key insertion hole 73, and the like. The power switch 71 is an activation switch that supplies power to the main control device 101 and other components. The reset switch 72 is a switch for resetting an error state of the slot machine 10. The setting key insertion hole 73 is used by hall managers and others to adjust the medal payout. In other words, hall managers and others can set the winning probability (setting value) of the slot machine 10 by inserting a setting key into the setting key insertion hole 73 and turning it ON. The reset switch 72 is also operated to change the winning probability of the slot machine 10, in addition to resetting an error state.

Above the reel unit 31, a main control device 101 that controls and manages the game is attached to the cabinet 11.

Next, the electrical configuration of the slot machine 10 will be explained based on the block diagrams in Figures 12 and 13.

The main control unit 101 is equipped with a microcomputer centered around the CPU 102, which is the calculation means. In addition to the power supply unit 91, the CPU 102 is connected via an internal bus to a clock circuit 103 that outputs a rectangular wave of a predetermined frequency, an input/output port 104, and other components. The main control unit 101 functions as the main board built into the slot machine 10.

On the input side of the main control device 101, there are the reel unit 31 (more specifically, a reel index sensor that individually detects when each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R has made one rotation), the start detection sensor 41a that detects the operation of the start lever 41, the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a that individually detect the operation of each stop switch 42 to 44, the medal insertion detection sensor 45a that detects medals inserted through the medal insertion slot 45, the payout detection sensor 51a that detects medals paid out from the hopper device 51, and the first credit insertion detection sensor that individually detects the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56. 56a, a second credit insertion detection sensor 57a that individually detects the operation of the second credit insertion switch 57, a third credit insertion detection sensor 58a that individually detects the operation of the third credit insertion switch 58, a settlement detection sensor 59a that detects the operation of the settlement switch 59, a reset detection sensor 72a that detects the operation of the reset switch 72, and a setting key detection sensor 73a that detects when a setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole 73 and turned ON, and signals from these various sensors are output to the CPU 102 via the input/output port 104.

In addition, a power supply unit 91 is connected to the input side of the main control unit 101 via the input/output port 104. The power supply unit 91 is equipped with a power supply unit 91a that supplies driving power to the main control unit 101 and other electronic devices in the slot machine 10, a power outage monitoring circuit 91b, and the like.

The power outage monitoring circuit 91b monitors the power supply interruption state and generates a power outage signal not only during a power outage but also when the power is cut off by the power switch 71. For this reason, the power outage monitoring circuit 91b monitors the stabilized drive voltage, in this example 12 volts DC, output from the power supply unit 91a, and is configured to determine that the power supply has been cut off when this drive voltage drops to less than 10 volts, for example, and output a power outage signal. The power outage signal is supplied to both the CPU 102 and the input/output port 104, and the CPU 102 recognizes this power outage signal and executes the power outage processing described below. The power outage signal is also supplied to the display control device 81.

The power supply unit 91a is configured to output a stabilized voltage of 5 volts, which is used as a drive voltage in control systems such as the main control unit 101, even if the output voltage drops below 10 volts. The time for which this stabilized voltage is output is sufficient to allow the main control unit 101 to perform power outage processing.

Connected to the output side of the main control device 101 via input/output port 104 are the reel unit 31 (more specifically, the stepping motor for rotating each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R), the medal path switching solenoid 46a provided on the selector 46, the hopper device 51, the credit display unit 60, the remaining payout number display unit 61, the payout number display unit 62, the instruction monitor 68, the display control device 81, and an external centralized terminal board 121 that can send information to a hall management device (not shown), etc.

The above-mentioned CPU 102 contains ROM 105, which stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 102, and RAM 106, which provides a working area for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in ROM 105. As well as these, the CPU 102 also contains various processing circuits (not shown) required for the slot machine 10, such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit, as well as various counters, such as a credit counter that counts the number of credits. ROM 105 and RAM 106 form a main memory as a storage means, and the programs for executing various processes are stored in the above-mentioned ROM 105 as part of the control program.

RAM 106 is configured to receive a backup voltage from power supply 91 and retain (back up) data even after power to slot machine 10 is cut off. RAM 106 is provided with a backup area as well as memory for temporarily storing various data, a win flag storage area 106a for storing the results of the lottery, a stop information storage area 106b for storing stop information used when controlling the stop of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R, and a status information storage area 106c for storing game statuses such as the BB state.

The backup area is an area for storing the value of the stack pointer at the time of power interruption (including power interruption by operating the power switch 71; the same applies below) in the event that power is interrupted due to a power outage or other reason. When the power outage is resolved (including power on by operating the power switch 71; the same applies below), the state of the slot machine 10 can be restored to the state it was in before power was interrupted based on the information in the backup area. Writing to the backup area is performed by the power outage processing (see Figure 14) when power is interrupted, and the values written to the backup area are restored during main processing when power is turned on.

The CPU 102's NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) is configured to receive a power outage signal from the power outage monitoring circuit 91b when power is cut off due to a power outage or other reason. When power is cut off, NMI interrupt processing, which serves as a power outage flag generation process, is immediately executed.

As shown in FIG. 13, the display control device 81 is equipped with a microcomputer centered around a CPU 181, which is a calculation processing means. The CPU 181 contains a ROM 182 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 181, and a RAM 183 that provides a working area for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 182.

The display control device 81 is provided with input/output ports (not shown), with the main control device 101 connected to the input side and the upper lamp 63, speaker 64, and auxiliary display unit 65 connected to the output side. The display control device 81 drives and controls the upper lamp 63, speaker 64, and auxiliary display unit 65 based on various commands input from the main control device 101. In other words, the display control device 81 is a sub-board that performs auxiliary control in relation to the main control device 101, which is the main board that manages the overall game. In other words, by providing a sub-board for indirect game-related sounds, lamps, and displays, the burden on the main board is reduced.

The display control device 81 is connected to an input side of the effect switch 66 (more specifically, an effect switch detection sensor that detects the operation of the effect switch 66). The various display units 60-62, 68 may also be configured to be driven and controlled by the display control device 81.

Next, we will explain the various control processes executed by the CPU 102 of the main control device 101. The processes performed by the CPU 102 can be broadly divided into main processing, which is activated when the power is turned on, timer interrupt processing, which is activated periodically (every 1.49 msec in this embodiment), and NMI interrupt processing, which is activated when a power outage signal is input to the NMI terminal. Below, we will explain the processes related to the progress of the game, i.e., timer interrupt processing, and the normal processing performed in the main processing.

Figure 14 is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process that is periodically executed by the main control unit 101. The CPU 102 of the main control unit 101 generates a timer interrupt, for example, every 1.49 msec.

First, in the register save process shown in step S101, the values of all registers in the CPU 102 used in normal processing, which will be described later, are saved to the backup area of RAM 106. In step S102, it is checked whether the power outage flag is set, and if the power outage flag is set, the process proceeds to step S103, where power outage processing is executed.

Here, we will provide an overview of how to handle power outages.

When the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or other reason, a power outage signal is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 91b of the power supply unit 91, and this power outage signal is input to the main control unit 101 via the NMI terminal. When the power outage signal is input, the main control unit 101 immediately executes NMI interrupt processing and sets a power outage flag in the power outage flag storage area provided in RAM 106.

The power outage process first determines whether command transmission has finished. If transmission has not finished, the process ends, returns to timer interrupt processing, and ends command transmission. If command transmission has finished, the value of the stack pointer in CPU 102 is saved in the backup area of RAM 106. The output status of the output port in I/O port 104 is then cleared, and all actuators (not shown) are turned off. Next, a RAM judgment value is calculated to determine whether the data in RAM 106 is normal when the power outage is resolved, and saved in the backup area, thereby prohibiting further RAM access. After performing the above process, an infinite loop is entered to prepare for a complete power outage that would prevent further processing. Note that, in case the power outage flag is erroneously set due to noise, for example, a check is made to see if a power outage signal is being output before entering the infinite loop. If the power outage signal is not being output, this indicates that the power outage has been recovered, and writing to RAM 106 is permitted, the power outage flag is reset, and the process returns to timer interrupt processing. If the power outage signal continues to be output, the process enters the infinite loop. Incidentally, even in an infinite loop, it checks whether the power outage signal is being output, and if the power outage signal is no longer being output, it transitions to the main processing.

Returning to the explanation of the timer interrupt process, if the power outage flag is not set in step S102, various processes from step S104 onwards are performed.

That is, in step S104, a watchdog timer clear process is performed to initialize the value of the watchdog timer, which monitors for malfunctions. In step S105, an interrupt end declaration process is performed, which allows the CPU 102 itself to set the next timer interrupt. In step S106, a stepping motor control process is performed to drive the stepping motors that drive each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R in order to spin each reel. In step S107, a sensor monitoring process is performed to read the status of various sensors connected to the input/output port 104, such as the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a, the inserted medal detection sensor 45a, and the payout detection sensor 51a (see Figure 12), and to monitor whether the read results are normal. In step S108, a timer calculation process is performed to subtract values from each counter and timer. In step S109, a counter process is performed to count the number of medals bet and the number of medals paid out, and output the results to the external centralized terminal board 121.

In step S110, a command output process is performed to send various commands, such as lottery result commands (described later), to the display control device 81. In step S111, a segment data setting process is performed to set the segment data to be displayed in the credit display unit 60, remaining payout number display unit 61, and payout number display unit 62. In step S112, a segment data display process is performed to supply the segment data set in the segment data setting process to each display unit 60-62, 68 and display the corresponding numbers, symbols, etc. In step S113, a port output process is performed to output data corresponding to the I/O device from the input/output port 104. In step S114, the values of each register saved to the backup area in the previous step S101 are restored to the corresponding register in the CPU 102. Thereafter, in step S115, an interrupt enable process is performed to enable the next timer interrupt, ending this series of timer interrupt processes.

Next, we will explain the normal processing that performs the main control related to gameplay based on the flowchart in Figure 15.

First, in step S201, an interrupt permission process is performed to allow the next timer interrupt. In step S202, pre-start processing is performed to enable play. In the pre-start processing, the system waits until the display control device 81 and other devices have completed initialization. Once initialization of the display control device 81 and other devices has completed, the system performs the game management process shown in steps S203 to S215.

As part of the game management process, in step S203, various game information and other data stored in RAM 106 (such as random number values used in the previous game) are cleared. Then, in step S204, a start wait process is performed.

The start waiting process determines whether any replay wins were achieved in the previous game. If any replay wins were achieved, an automatic insertion process is performed to automatically insert virtual medals in the same number as the previous bet, and the start waiting process ends. Specifically, for example, if a replay win is achieved in a three-bet game, a process to automatically insert three virtual medals is performed, and if a replay win is achieved in a one-bet game, a process to automatically insert one virtual medal is performed.

In the automatic insertion process, virtual medals are inserted without reducing the number of virtual medals displayed in the credit display unit 60. In other words, if any replay win was achieved in the previous game, the player can play the current game without reducing the number of medals they own or inserting any medals. If no replay win was achieved, a sensor abnormality confirmation process is performed to check whether any abnormalities have occurred in the sensor reading results obtained in the sensor monitoring process step S107 of the timer interrupt process. If an abnormality has occurred, an abnormality occurrence process is performed to put the slot machine 10 into an error state and notify the occurrence of the error. This error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated. If the sensor reading results are normal, it is determined whether the settlement switch 59 has been operated. If the settlement switch 59 has been operated, a medal return process is performed to pay out the same number of medals as the credited virtual medals.

After the medal return process is completed or if the settlement switch 59 has not been operated, a determination is made as to whether medals have been inserted or credit insertion switches 56-58 have been operated between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process. If either has been done, a medal insertion process is carried out to change the number of bets, etc., and the start waiting process ends. Furthermore, if neither medals have been inserted nor credit insertion switches 56-58 have been operated between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process, the start waiting process ends immediately.

After the start waiting process is completed, step S205 determines whether the number of medals bet has reached the specified number. In this slot machine 10, the specified number in the CB state is set to "2," and the specified numbers in gaming states other than the CB state (specifically, the normal gaming state, the first RT state, the second RT state, the third RT state, the fourth RT state, and the BB state) are set to "1" and "3." That is, in the CB state, a positive determination is made in step S205 on the condition that the number of medals bet is "2," and in states other than the CB state, a positive determination is made in step S205 on the condition that the number of medals bet is "1" or "3." In other words, in gaming states other than the CB state, if no medals have been bet, or if the number of medals bet is "2," a negative determination is made in step S205. If the number of medals has not reached the specified number, the process returns to the start waiting process of step S204, and the processes from the sensor abnormality confirmation process onward are performed.

If the number of bets has reached the specified number, mode transition notification processing is executed in step S206. This mode transition notification processing will be explained in detail later.

After processing step S206, a bet command including information on the processing result of step S206 and information on the number of bets for which a positive judgment was made in step S205 is set as an output target to the display control device 81, which serves as a sub-control device. The command set here is output to the display control device 81 in step S110 of the timer interrupt processing. The processing of the display control device 81 that receives the bet command will be explained in detail later.

After executing the processing of step S207, it is determined in step S208 whether the start lever 41 has been operated. If the start lever 41 has not been operated, the process returns to the start waiting process of step S204, and the processing from the sensor abnormality confirmation process onwards is carried out.

On the other hand, if the start lever 41 is operated, this means that a start command has been issued to start play, as the system is configured to allow play to begin when the start lever 41 is operated when a specified number of medals have been bet. In this case, in step S209, an active line setting process is performed to set the combination of lines corresponding to the number of bets as the active line. That is, in a 3-bet game, only the downward-sloping line L4 is set as the active line, and in a 2-bet game, the downward line L3 and the downward-sloping line L4 are set as the active lines. Furthermore, in a 1-bet game, the bent line L6 is set as the active line. In step S210, the medal path switching solenoid 46a is switched to a non-energized state, thereby prohibiting bet acceptance. Thereafter, the following processes are executed in order: lottery processing in step S211, reel control processing in step S212, medal payout processing in step S213, RT state processing in step S214, and bonus state processing in step S215, and then the system returns to step S203.

Next, the lottery process in step S211 will be explained based on the flowchart in Figure 16.

In step S301, a random number is obtained to be used when determining whether a winning combination has been achieved. In this slot machine 10, when the start lever 41 is operated, the hardware circuitry latches the value of the free-run counter at that time. The free-run counter generates a random number between 0 and 65535, and after the CPU 102 confirms the operation of the start lever 41, it stores the value latched by the hardware circuitry in RAM 106. This configuration makes it possible to quickly obtain a random number when the start lever 41 is operated, thereby avoiding problems such as synchronization. The hardware circuitry of this slot machine 10 is configured to latch the value of the free-run counter each time the start lever 41 is operated.

After obtaining the random number, in step S302, a lottery table is selected to determine whether the winning combination has been achieved. This slot machine 10 has seven gaming states, broadly categorized as the normal gaming state, the first RT state, the second RT state, the third RT state, the fourth RT state, the BB state, and the CB state, and a lottery table is set for each gaming state.

In other words, in step S302, the current gaming state of the slot machine 10 is determined based on the number of bets and the setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c, and a lottery table corresponding to the number of bets and gaming state is selected. For example, if the number of bets is "3" and the setting flag is not set in the state information storage area 106c, the current gaming state is determined to be the normal gaming state, and a lottery table for the normal gaming state is selected. Furthermore, this slot machine 10 has six pre-prepared winning probabilities, from "Setting 1" to "Setting 6." By inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion hole and turning it ON, and performing a predetermined operation, it is possible to set which winning probability the internal processing will be based on. In step S302, when the setting state is "Setting 1," a lottery table with the lowest expected medal payout value is selected, and when the setting state is "Setting 6," a lottery table with the highest expected medal payout value is selected.

Here, we will provide additional explanation about the process for setting the winning probability.

The winning probability setting process is executed by the main processing launched by the main control unit 101 when the power is turned on. More specifically, the winning probability setting process is launched after the initialization process when the power is turned on while the setting key detection sensor 73a detects that the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole and turned ON. In the winning probability setting process, the setting value is updated by one each time the start lever 41 is operated, as a predetermined operation. For example, each time the start lever 41 is operated, the setting value is updated as follows: "Setting 1" → "Setting 2" → "Setting 3" → "Setting 4" → "Setting 5" → "Setting 6" → "Setting 1." Each setting value is displayed, for example, on the credit display unit 60, and the display is updated each time the setting value is updated. Then, when the setting key detection sensor 73a is turned OFF, the setting value at that time is set as the current setting value, and the winning probability setting process ends. The display on the credit display unit 60 also ends upon completion of the winning probability setting process. The setting values set in the winning probability setting process are stored in RAM 106 until the next winning probability setting process is started. In step S302, a lottery table is selected based on these stored setting values.

The lottery table will be briefly explained. Figure 17 shows the lottery table for normal game mode, which is selected in the normal game mode of "Setting 3." The lottery table has index values IV set, and each index value IV is uniquely associated with a winning combination and is also set with a point value PV.

After selecting a lottery table, in step S303, the index value IV is set to 1, and in the following step S304, a judgment value DV is set to be used when determining whether a role has been won or lost. In this judgment value setting process, the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV is added to the current judgment value DV to set a new judgment value DV. Note that in the initial judgment value setting process, the random number value obtained in step S301 is set as the current judgment value DV, and the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV (1) is added to this random number value to set a new judgment value DV.

Then, in step S305, a win/loss determination is made for the combination corresponding to the index value IV. The combination win/loss determination is made by determining whether the determination value DV exceeds 65535. If it exceeds 65535, in step S306, a determination is made as to whether the first BB, second BB, or CB has been won. Specifically, a determination is made as to whether a positive determination was made in step S305 for an index value IV (IV = 34 to 54) that includes any of the first BB, second BB, or CB. If a positive determination is made in step S306, a process is performed in which the corresponding bonus win flag (first BB win flag, second BB win flag, CB win flag) is set in the win flag storage area 106a in step S307. If a negative determination is made in step S306, or after the process of step S307 has been performed, in step S308, a process is performed in which the win flag for each minor combination corresponding to the index value IV determined to be positive in step S305 is set in the win flag storage area 106a. For example, if the judgment value DV exceeds 65,535 when IV = 34, the 1st BB win flag is set in step S307, and the 28th small win flag, the 33rd small win flag, and the 35th small win flag are set in step S308. Also, if the judgment value DV exceeds 65,535 when IV = 17, win flags indicating that the 30th and 41st small wins have been won are set in the win flag storage area 106a in step S308.

Incidentally, if the set winning flag is not a winning flag indicating that the first BB has been won (first BB winning flag) or a winning flag indicating that the second BB has been won (second BB winning flag), the winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a will be reset after the game in which the corresponding winning flag was set has ended (see S203 in the normal processing). On the other hand, if the winning flag is a first BB winning flag or a second BB winning flag, these winning flags will be reset when the corresponding winning is achieved as one of the conditions. In other words, the first BB winning flag and the second BB winning flag may be valid across multiple games.

In addition, in steps S306 to S308 when the 1st BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag is carried over, if a winning combination other than 1st BB, 2nd BB, or CB is achieved, the corresponding winning flag is set; if a winning combination other than 1st BB, 2nd BB, or CB is not achieved, the corresponding winning flag is not set.

That is, for example, if the 1st BB winning flag is carried over and the judgment value DV exceeds 65535 when the index value IV = 34, the 1st BB winning flag is not set, and the 28th small win flag, the 33rd small win flag, and the 35th small win flag are set. Also, if the 1st BB winning flag is carried over and the judgment value DV exceeds 65535 when the index value IV = 35, the 2nd BB winning flag is not set, and the 28th small win flag, the 33rd small win flag, and the 35th small win flag are set.

It is also possible to prepare a separate lottery table for when the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag is carried over, and perform the lottery process using this separately prepared lottery table when the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag is carried over. In this case, it is recommended to set the index values IV and point values PV in this separately prepared lottery table so that the first BB, second BB, and CB are not won.

If the judgment value DV does not exceed 65,535 in step S305, this means that the hand corresponding to the index value IV has not been won. In such a case, in step S309, the index value IV is incremented by 1, and in the following step S310, it is determined whether there is a hand corresponding to the index value IV, i.e., whether there is a target for judgment as to whether it is a hit or a miss. Specifically, it is determined whether the index value IV incremented by 1 exceeds the maximum value of the index value IV set in the lottery table. If there is a target for judgment as to whether it is a hit or a miss, the process returns to step S304, and the judgment of the hit or miss of the hand continues. At this time, in step S304, the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV is added to the judgment value DV used to judge whether the previous hand was a hit or a miss (i.e., the current judgment value DV) to obtain a new judgment value DV, and in step S305, the hit or miss of the hand is judged based on this judgment value DV. 17, the probability of winning a normal replay (probability of winning when IV = 1) is approximately 1 in 7.3, the probability of winning a strong cherry (probability of winning when IV = 15) is approximately 1 in 300, and the probability of winning a weak cherry (probability of winning when IV = 16) is approximately 1 in 183. The probability of winning a strong watermelon (probability of winning when IV = 17) is approximately 1 in 300, the probability of winning a weak watermelon (probability of winning when IV = 18) is approximately 1 in 218, the probability of winning Chance A (probability of winning when IV = 19) is approximately 1 in 252, and the probability of winning Chance B (probability of winning when IV = 20) is approximately 1 in 252. The probability of winning the middle bell (probability of winning when IV = 21) is approximately 1 in 32,800, and the probability of winning the no-question bell (probability of winning when IV = 22) is approximately 1 in 65,500. The probability of winning the forward push bell 1, forward push bell 2, pinch push bell 1, and pinch push bell 2 (probability of winning when IV = 23 to 26) is approximately 1 in 43.7, and the probability of winning the middle push bell 1, middle push bell 2, right push bell 1, and right push bell 2 (probability of winning when IV = 27 to 30) is approximately 1 in 21.8. The probability of winning a strong cherry duplicate 1 (probability of winning when IV = 34) is approximately 1 in 21,800, the probability of winning a strong cherry duplicate 2 (probability of winning when IV = 35) is approximately 1 in 21,800, the probability of winning a weak cherry duplicate 1 (probability of winning when IV = 36) is approximately 1 in 32,800, and the probability of winning a weak cherry duplicate 2 (probability of winning when IV = 37) is approximately 1 in 32,800. The probability of winning a strong watermelon duplicate 1 (probability of winning when IV = 38) is approximately 1 in 32,800, and the probability of winning a strong watermelon duplicate 2 (probability of winning when IV = 39) is approximately 1 in 32,800. The probability of winning a weak watermelon duplicate 1 (probability of winning when IV = 40) is approximately 1 in 65,500, and the probability of winning a weak watermelon duplicate 2 (probability of winning when IV = 41) is approximately 1 in 65,500. The probability of winning Chance A Duplicate 1, Chance A Duplicate 2, Chance B Duplicate 1, and Chance B Duplicate 2 (probability of winning when IV = 42-45) is approximately 1 in 32,800. The probability of winning Middle Bell Duplicate 1 and Middle Bell Duplicate 2 (probability of winning when IV = 46, 47) is approximately 1 in 21,800. The probability of winning Special Reply A Duplicate 1 (probability of winning when IV = 48) is approximately 1 in 1,010, and the probability of winning Special Reply AB Duplicate 1 (probability of winning when IV = 49) is approximately 1 in 1,310. The probability of winning Special Reply A Duplicate 2 (probability of winning when IV = 50) is approximately 1 in 1,010, and the probability of winning Special Reply AB Duplicate 2 (probability of winning when IV = 51) is approximately 1 in 1,310. The probability of winning 1st BB or 2nd BB alone (probability of winning when IV = 52 or 53) is approximately 1 in 32,800. The probability of winning CB (probability of winning when IV = 54) is approximately 1 in 19.9. Additionally, the probability of losing and not winning any of the roles is approximately 1 in 1.96.

In the lottery table for normal game mode, 0 is set for point values PV for IV = 2 to 14, 31 to 33, and 55 to 58. Therefore, in normal game mode, these index values IV do not result in a win.

After the winning flag is set in step S308, or if it is determined in step S310 that there are no targets to be judged, this means that the judgment of the winning combination has been completed. In such cases, the process proceeds to step S311, where a freeze lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to execute a freeze effect that disables operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 for a predetermined period of time.

In the following step S312, lottery result response processing is performed. In lottery result response processing, processing such as whether to transition the game state depending on the results of the lottery in steps S301 to S311 and processing to notify the push order role is performed. This lottery result response processing will be explained in detail later.

After executing the processing of step S312, a lottery result command is set in step S313. Here, the lottery result command is a command sent to the display control device 81 to inform the result of the hand win/loss judgment. However, in normal processing, various commands such as the lottery result command are simply set in the ring buffer, and no command is sent to the display control device 81. Commands are sent to the display control device 81 during the command output processing (step S110) of the timer interrupt processing described above.

Then, in step S314, a stop information setting process is executed to set symbols that can be stopped on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R based on the lottery results of this game. In the stop information setting process, stop symbol information corresponding to the possible winning combinations is set based on the win flags set in steps S306 to S308. For example, if a strong cherry is won (won when IV = 15) and the strong cherry win flag is set, stop symbol information is set so that symbols corresponding to the 28th small combination, 32nd small combination, and 35th small combination wins can be stopped on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R. Furthermore, if a strong cherry overlap 1 is won (won when IV = 34) and the strong cherry win flag and the first BB win flag are set, stop symbol information is set so that symbols corresponding to the 28th small combination, 33rd small combination, 35th small combination, and first BB win can be stopped on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R.

In the following step S315, if multiple stoppable symbol information was set in step S314, a priority setting process is executed to set their priorities. For example, if multiple roles out of small win, replay, and bonus have been won, the following priorities are set. If a small win and a bonus have been won, the priority is set so that the small win takes priority, and if a small win cannot be won, a bonus win will be won. If a replay and a bonus have been won, the priority is set so that the replay win takes priority.

For example, if Strong Cherry Duplicate 1 is won and stop symbol information corresponding to the 28th, 33rd, and 35th minor symbols and the 1st BB win is set, priority is set so that the 28th, 33rd, and 35th minor symbols win take priority over the 1st BB win. Also, if Special Replay A Duplicate 1 is won and stop symbol information corresponding to the 9th replay and the 1st BB win is set, priority is set so that the 9th replay win takes priority over the 1st BB win. And, for example, if the 1st BB win is carried over and a regular replay is won and stop symbol information corresponding to the 1st BB win and the 1st replay win is set, priority is set so that the 1st replay win takes priority over the 1st BB win.

Here, if a replay is won, the winning symbol combinations are set so that one of the winning replays is guaranteed to win. In other words, if a replay is won, a replay win is guaranteed, and no misses will occur. Therefore, if the stop symbol information for replays and bonuses is set, one of the set replays will always win, and a bonus win will never be achieved.

Furthermore, if multiple small wins or multiple replays result in a winning combination, which symbol corresponding to the small win or replay will stop on the active line depends on the timing of the stop operation. For example, if a strong watermelon is won and the stop symbol information corresponding to the 30th and 41st small wins is set, as described above, the target symbol on the left reel 32L for the 30th and 41st small wins is the same, the "watermelon" symbol. Therefore, the timing of the stop operation for the left reel 32L does not determine which small win will be achieved. On the other hand, the target symbols on the center reel 32M and right reel 32R for the 30th small win are both the "red bell" symbol, and for the 41st small win, the center reel 32M is the "cherry" symbol and the "black BAR" symbol, and the right reel 32R is the "watermelon" symbol. For example, in a 3-bet game, if the middle stop switch 43 is operated to stop the middle reel 32M when the fourth "watermelon" symbol through the seventh "red bell" symbol reach the middle row, both the seventh "red bell" symbol, which is the target symbol for the 30th minor win, and the "black BAR" symbol, which is the target symbol for the 41st minor win, can be stopped in the middle row on the active line. In this case, in this embodiment, the stop symbol information is set to prioritize stopping of symbols with fewer slips. As a result, in the above case, stop drive control is performed to stop the "red bell" symbol in the middle row, preventing the 41st minor win and allowing the 30th minor win.

On the other hand, if the middle stop switch 43 is operated to stop the 8th "black BAR" symbol through the 12th "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M when they reach the middle row, it will be possible to stop both the 8th "black BAR" symbol and the 11th "cherry" symbol, which are the target symbols for the 41st minor win, and the 12th "red bell" symbol, which is the target symbol for the 30th minor win, in the middle row. In this case, the stop symbol information is set to prioritize symbols with fewer slips, so the 8th "black BAR" symbol or the 11th "cherry" symbol will stop in the middle row, preventing the 30th minor win and allowing the 41st minor win.

The same is true for the right reel 32R; depending on the timing of the stop operation of the right stop switch 44, the stop symbol information is set so that the symbol with the least number of slips between the "red bell" symbol, which is the target symbol for the 30th minor win, and the "watermelon" symbol, which is the target symbol for the 41st minor win, will stop on the lower row, which is the active line. Note that if the right stop switch 44 is stopped when the 6th "first replay" symbol and the 7th "black BAR" symbol reach the active position on the right reel 32R, neither the "watermelon" symbol nor the "red bell" symbol will be able to stop, and in this case, no minor win will be achieved, resulting in a so-called missed win.

After executing the processing of step S315, the first section display processing is executed in step S316, and then the lottery processing ends. The first section display processing is processing related to display control of the instruction monitor 68, and this processing will be explained in detail later.

Next, the reel control process in step S212 will be explained based on the flowchart in Figure 18.

In the reel control process, first, in step S401, a spin effect process is performed. The spin effect process is a process for performing an effect using reel control during an invalid period, based on the results of the freeze lottery process performed in step S311 above. In the following step S402, a spin start process is performed to start the rotation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

The spin start process checks whether a predetermined wait time (e.g., 4.1 seconds) has elapsed since the reels began spinning during the previous game. If not, the process waits until the wait time has elapsed. If the wait time has elapsed, the process resets the wait time for the next game and performs motor control initialization processing, which sets spin start information in the motor control storage area in RAM 106. By performing this processing, the stepping motor acceleration process is initiated in the stepping motor control process (step S106) of the timer interrupt process, and each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R begins spinning. Therefore, even if a player bets the required number of medals and operates the start lever 41, each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R may not immediately begin spinning. The process then waits until each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R begins spinning at a predetermined constant speed, and the spin start process ends. Additionally, when the rotation speed of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R reaches a constant speed, the CPU 102 lights up the lamps (not shown) of each stop switch 42-44 to notify the player that it is now possible to issue a stop command.

Following the spin start process, in step S403, it is determined whether any of the stop switches 42-44 has been operated. If none of the stop switches 42-44 have been operated, the process waits until one of the stop switches 42-44 is operated. If it is determined that one of the stop switches 42-44 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S404, where it is determined whether the stop switch corresponding to the spinning reel has been operated, i.e., whether a stop command has been issued. If a stop command has not been issued, the process returns to step S403, where it waits until one of the stop switches 42-44 is operated. If a stop command has been issued, a stop command command is set in step S405. Here, the stop command command is a command sent to the display control device 81 to indicate which stop switch was operated to issue the stop command. If a stop command command has been set, the stop control process shown in steps S406 to S412 is performed to stop the spinning reel.

In step S406, the symbol number of the reaching symbol that has reached the base position (the lower row in this embodiment) at the time the stop switch is operated is confirmed. Specifically, the symbol number of the reaching symbol that has reached the base position is confirmed based on the number of excitation pulses output from the time the reel index sensor detection signal is input. In the following step S407, the number of reel slips to be stopped this time is calculated based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. In this slot machine 10, five stop patterns are available for stopping each reel 32L, 32M, 32R when the stop switches 42-44 are operated: a stop pattern in which the reaching symbol that has reached the base position is stopped as is; a stop pattern in which the corresponding reel is stopped after sliding one symbol; a stop pattern in which the corresponding reel is stopped after sliding two symbols; a stop pattern in which the corresponding reel is stopped after sliding three symbols; and a stop pattern in which the corresponding reel is stopped after sliding four symbols. Therefore, in step S407, a value between 0 and 4 is calculated as the slip count based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. Then, in step S408, the calculated slip count is added to the symbol number of the reached symbol to determine the symbol number of the stop symbol that will actually stop at the base position. In step S409, it is determined whether the symbol number of the reached symbol on the reel to be stopped this time and the symbol number of the stop symbol are equal. If they are equal, a reel stop process is performed in step S410 to stop the reel rotation. Then, in step S411, it is determined whether all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped. If all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have not stopped, a second stop information setting process is performed in step S412, and the process returns to step S403.

Here, the second stop information setting process is a process for changing the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b of RAM 106 after the reels have stopped. In the second stop information setting process, the stop information is changed based on the set win flag and the stop outcome of the stopped reels. In this slot machine 10, for example, if a win occurs when IV = 23 to 30, that is, if a win occurs on sequential push bell 1, sequential push bell 2, pinch push bell 1, pinch push bell 2, center push bell 1, center push bell 2, right push bell 1, and right push bell 2 (hereinafter collectively referred to as "push order bells") (see Figure 17), the second stop information setting process is performed to change the winning pattern established by the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 that generated the stop command.

Figure 19 is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between winning combinations, the order in which stop switches 42-44 are operated, and the winning patterns that are achieved. For example, if center push bell 1 is won, stop information is set so that the second, seventh, or ninth small win will be achieved if the left stop switch 42 is operated first; stop information is set so that the first small win will be achieved if the middle stop switch 43 is operated first; and stop information is set so that the second, seventh, or ninth small win will be achieved if the right stop switch 44 is operated first. However, even when stop information is set in this way, the corresponding win may not be achieved depending on the operation timing of stop switches 42-44.

A brief description of the symbol arrangement on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R follows. In this slot machine 10, in a game state other than the CB state (a three-bet game), reels 32L, 32M, and 32R can slide up to four symbols from the timing of operation of stop switches 42-44 before stopping, with only the downward-sloping right line L4 set as the active line. Therefore, when symbols of the same type are arranged on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R with a spacing of four symbols or less between them, a winning symbol can be stopped on the active line regardless of the timing of operation of stop switch 43. On the other hand, for symbols arranged so that they form a section five symbols or more apart, the player must operate stop switches 42-44 while aiming at the symbol in order to stop it on the active line.

We will explain an example where center push bell 1 is won and the left stop switch 42, center stop switch 43, and right stop switch 44 are operated in that order. In such a case, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are controlled to stop in order to achieve the second, seventh, or ninth small win.

The second minor win symbols on the left reel 32L are the "red bell" symbol and the "white bell" symbol. The "red bell" and "white bell" symbols also function as the seventh and ninth minor win symbols. The second minor win symbols on the left reel 32L are arranged so that the distance between adjacent second minor win symbols (between adjacent seventh minor win symbols and between adjacent ninth minor win symbols) is four symbols or less. Therefore, when the left stop switch 42 is operated first, the "red bell" symbol or the "white bell" symbol will stop on the top row regardless of the timing of the operation. For example, if the left stop switch 42 is operated when the number four "cherry" symbol on the left reel 32L has reached the middle row, the number seven "red bell" symbol will stop on the top row, as shown in Figure 20(a). As a result, there is still room for the second, seventh, or ninth small win to occur on the downward-sloping right line L4.

The second small win symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "white BAR" symbol. On the middle reel 32M, the "white BAR" symbol is located only at position 18. The seventh small win symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "red 7" symbol. On the middle reel 32M, the "red 7" symbol is located only at position 14. The ninth small win symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "cherry" symbol. On the middle reel 32M, the "cherry" symbol is located only at position 11. Therefore, depending on the operation timing of the middle stop switch 43, the second small win symbol, the seventh small win symbol, or the ninth small win symbol may stop on an active line, or none of the second small win symbol, the seventh small win symbol, or the ninth small win symbol may stop on an active line.

Specifically, if the middle stop switch 43 is operated when any of the "First Replay" symbols (numbered 13 through 17) reach the bottom row, the "White BAR" symbol, which is the second small win symbol, will stop in the middle row. As a result, there will be room for the second small win symbol to be achieved on the downward-sloping right line L4. If the middle stop switch 43 is operated when any of the "Second Replay" symbols (numbered 9 through 13) reach the bottom row, the "Red 7" symbol, which is the seventh small win symbol, will stop in the middle row, as shown in Figure 20(b). As a result, there will be room for the seventh small win symbol to be achieved on the downward-sloping right line L4. If the middle stop switch 43 is operated when any of the "White Bell" symbols (numbered 6 through 10) reach the bottom row, the "Cherry" symbol, which is the ninth small win symbol, will stop in the middle row. If the middle stop switch 43 is operated at any other time, the second, seventh, and ninth small win symbols cannot be stopped in the middle row, even if the middle reel 32M is stopped after sliding four symbols. If the middle stop switch 43 is operated at such a time, the number 2 "LUCKY" symbol or the number 6 "white bell" symbol will stop in the middle row.

If the 7th small win symbol on the middle reel 32M stops in the middle row, the second stop information setting process changes the stop information so that the 7th small win symbol can be achieved.

The seventh minor win symbol on the right reel 32R is a "white bell" symbol. The "white bell" symbol is located only at the number 10 position on the right reel 32R. Therefore, depending on the timing of operation of the right stop switch 44, the seventh minor win symbol may or may not stop on the active line. Specifically, if the right stop switch 44 is operated when any of the "first replay" symbols (number 6) through the "white bell" symbol (number 10) has reached the bottom row, the seventh minor win symbol, the "white bell" symbol, will stop on the bottom row, as shown in Figure 20(c). As a result, a seventh minor win is achieved on the downward-sloping right line L4. If the right stop switch 44 is operated at any other time, the "watermelon" symbol or the "first replay" symbol will stop on the bottom row. For example, if the right stop switch 44 is operated when the No. 3 "Second Replay" symbol reaches the bottom row, the No. 4 "Watermelon" symbol will stop in the bottom row, as shown in Figure 20(d). The combination of the "Red Bell" symbol, "Red 7" symbol, and "Watermelon" symbol from the left is a transition result, as shown in Figure 11.

If the 9th minor winning symbol on the center reel 32M stops in the middle row, the second stop information setting process changes the stop information so that the 9th minor winning symbol can be achieved.

The ninth minor winning symbol on the right reel 32R is a "Youth" symbol. The "Youth" symbol is located at position 15 on the right reel 32R. Therefore, depending on the timing of operation of the right stop switch 44, the ninth minor winning symbol may or may not stop on the active line. Specifically, if the right stop switch 44 is operated when any of the "First Replay" symbols (number 11) through the "Youth" symbols (number 15) have reached the bottom row, the "Youth" symbol, which is the ninth minor winning symbol, will stop on the bottom row. As a result, the ninth minor winning symbol is achieved on the downward-sloping right line L4. If the right stop switch 44 is operated at any other time, the "Watermelon" symbol or the "First Replay" symbol will stop on the bottom row. The combination of the "White Bell" symbol ("Red Bell" symbol), "Cherry" symbol, and "Watermelon" symbol ("First Replay" symbol) from left to right results in a transition outcome, as shown in Figure 11.

When the second small win symbol on the center reel 32M stops in the middle row, the second stop information setting process changes the stop information so that the second small win symbol can be achieved.

The second small win symbol on the right reel 32R is a "white BAR" symbol. The "white BAR" symbol is located at position 18 on the right reel 32R. Therefore, depending on the timing of operation of the right stop switch 44, the second small win symbol may or may not stop on the active line. Specifically, if the right stop switch 44 is operated when any of the "watermelon" symbol (number 14) through the "white BAR" symbol (number 18) has reached the bottom row, the "white BAR" symbol, which is the second small win symbol, will stop on the bottom row. As a result, the second small win symbol is achieved on the downward-sloping right line L4. If the right stop switch 44 is operated at any other time, the "watermelon" symbol or the "first replay" symbol will stop on the bottom row. From left to right, the combination of "white bell" symbol ("red bell" symbol), "white BAR" symbol, and "watermelon" symbol ("first replay" symbol) is a transition result as shown in Figure 11.

If the second, seventh, and ninth small win symbols on the middle reel 32M do not stop in the middle row, i.e., if the "LUCKY" symbol or "white bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M stops in the middle row, the second stop information setting process changes the stop information so that the "watermelon" symbol or "first replay" symbol stops in the bottom row.

The "watermelon" and "first replay" symbols are arranged on the right reel 32R so that the distance between each "watermelon" and "first replay" symbol is four symbols or less. Therefore, when the right stop switch 44 is operated, the "watermelon" or "first replay" symbol will stop on the bottom row regardless of the timing of the operation. The combination of the "white bell" symbol ("red bell" symbol), "LUCKY" symbol ("white bell" symbol), and "watermelon" symbol ("first replay" symbol) from left to right is a transition result, as shown in Figure 11.

In this way, if center push bell 1 is won and the left stop switch 42 → center stop switch 43 → right stop switch 44 are operated in this order, the second small win will be achieved, the seventh small win will be achieved, the ninth small win will be achieved, or the transition result will stop.

Next, we will explain an example where center push bell 1 is won and the center stop switch 43, left stop switch 42, and right stop switch 44 are operated in that order. In this case, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are controlled to stop in order to achieve the first small win.

The "red bell" symbols, which are the first minor winning symbols, are arranged on the middle reel 32M so that the spacing between each "red bell" symbol is four symbols or less. Therefore, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated first, the "red bell" symbols will stop in the middle row regardless of the timing of the operation.

On the left reel 32L, the first minor winning symbols, the "red bell" symbol and the "white bell" symbol, are arranged so that the distance between each first minor winning symbol is four symbols or less. Therefore, when the left stop switch 42 is operated second, the "red bell" symbol or the "white bell" symbol will stop on the top row regardless of the timing of the operation.

On the right reel 32R, the first minor winning symbols, the "red bell" symbol and the "white bell" symbol, are arranged so that the distance between each first minor winning symbol is four symbols or less. Therefore, when the right stop switch 44 is operated third, the "red bell" symbol or the "white bell" symbol will stop on the bottom row regardless of the timing of the operation.

As described above, if center push bell 1 is won and the center stop switch 43, left stop switch 42, and right stop switch 44 are operated in this order, the first small win will be achieved regardless of the timing of the operations.

If the push order bell is won, and the stop switches 42-44 are operated in one or two predetermined operating sequences, the first small win will be achieved regardless of the timing of the operation. If the stop switches 42-44 are operated in any other operating sequence, a small win will be achieved or the transition result will stop on an active line depending on the timing of the operation. Incidentally, if the middle bell is won, the 38th small win will be achieved regardless of the operating sequence or timing, and if the no-question bell is won, the first small win will be achieved regardless of the operating sequence or timing.

Returning to the explanation of the reel control process, if it is determined in step S411 that all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, a payout determination process is performed in step S413. The payout determination process is a process for setting the number of medals to be paid out, with one of the conditions being that a winning combination of symbols is lined up on an active line. In the payout determination process, the symbol combination formed on the active line is derived from the symbol numbers of the symbols stopped on the lower rows of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R, and it is determined whether a winning combination has been formed on the active line. If a winning combination has been formed, it is further determined whether the winning combination corresponds to the winning flag set in the win flag storage area 106a. If the winning combination corresponds to the winning flag, the winning combination and the payout amount corresponding to the winning combination are set in the payout information storage area provided in RAM 106. On the other hand, if the winning combination does not correspond to the win flag, the slot machine 10 enters an error state and an error notification process is performed. This error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated.

After the payout determination process is performed, the winning result response process is performed in step S414. This winning result response process involves processes such as transitioning the game state based on the winning result. This winning result response process will be explained in detail later.

After the winning result processing is performed, the second section display processing is executed in step S415. The second section display processing is processing related to display control of the instruction monitor 68, and this processing will be explained in detail later. Then, in step S416, a winning result command is set to allow the display control device 81 to grasp the winning combination for this game, and the reel control processing is terminated.

Next, we will provide an overview of the medal payout process in step S213.

The medal payout process determines whether the payout number set in the payout information storage area is 0. If the payout number is 0, this means that the previous payout determination process determined that no small wins were achieved. In such a case, based on the winning combinations set in the payout determination process, it is determined whether any of the 1st to 8th replay wins have been achieved. If none of the replay wins have been achieved, the medal payout process ends. If any of the replay wins has been achieved, the replay setting process is performed to change the game state to a replay state, and the medal payout process ends. Note that in the start waiting process (step S204) described earlier, if it is determined that the current game state is a replay state, the automatic insertion process is performed.

On the other hand, if the payout number set in the payout information storage area is not 0, medals equal to the payout number are paid out, and the medal payout process ends. Specifically, when the credit counter count has not reached its upper limit (50 medals stored), the payout number is added to the credit counter count, and the resulting value is displayed on the credit display unit 60. If the credit counter count has reached its upper limit, or if the count reaches its upper limit while adding the payout number, the medal payout rotating plate is driven, and medals are paid out from the hopper device 51 to the medal tray 50 via the medal discharge port 49. The medal payout process also involves changing the payout number displayed in the payout number display unit 62 in accordance with the medal payout. If the current game state is BB, the payout number is subtracted from the value of the remaining payout number counter (described below), and the remaining payout number displayed in the remaining payout number display unit 61 is also subtracted.

Next, the RT state processing in step S214 will be explained based on the flowchart in Figure 21.

In step S501, it is determined whether the gaming state is the fourth RT state by checking whether the fourth RT setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c of RAM 106. If the gaming state is the fourth RT state, the process proceeds to step S502, where a subtraction process is performed for the fixed number of RT games. As will be explained in detail later, the fourth RT state is a RT state in which the number of games that can be played is predetermined, and the process of step S502 is a process for subtracting the number of remaining games that can be played. In the following step S503, based on the result of the process of step S502, it is determined whether the number of remaining games that can be played in the fourth RT state has become 0. If it has become 0, the fourth RT setting flag is cleared in step S504, and then the RT state process is terminated. By performing the process of step S504, the gaming state transitions to the normal gaming state. If a negative determination is made in step S503, the RT state process is terminated. In this case, the fourth RT state continues.

If a negative judgment is made in step S501, a determination is made in step S505 as to whether the transition result has stopped on an active line. If the transition result has stopped, the process proceeds to step S506, where a determination is made as to whether the current gaming state is a normal gaming state. If the current gaming state is a normal gaming state, a first RT setting flag is set in the status information storage area 106c of RAM 106 in step S507. This processing then terminates. If a determination is made in step S505 that the transition result has not stopped on an active line, the process proceeds to step S508, where a determination is made as to whether a second replay win has been achieved, based on the winning combination set in the previous payout judgment processing. If a second replay win has been achieved, the RT setting flag set in the status information storage area 106c is cleared in step S509, and the first RT setting flag is set in step S507. This processing then terminates. Furthermore, if the transition result stops on an active line in a game state other than the fourth RT state or the normal game state, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S509, and the first RT setting flag is set in step S507, and this process ends.

If the first RT setting flag is set in step S507, the game state transitions to the first RT state. Then, in step S302 of the lottery process, it is determined that the current game state is the first RT state based on the fact that the first RT setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, and a lottery table for the first RT state is selected.

Figure 22 is a lottery table for the first RT state selected in the first RT state of "Setting 3." When compared to the lottery table for the normal game state (see Figure 17), the lottery table for the first RT state has different point values PV for IV = 1 to 5, with the same point values PV set for other index values IV. Therefore, when using this lottery table to determine whether a winning combination will be achieved, the probability of winning when IV = 6 to 58 is equal to the respective winning probabilities in normal game state; the probability of winning when IV = 1 is approximately 1 in 67.0, and the probability of winning when IV = 2 to 5 is approximately 1 in 32.8. The probability of losing, i.e. not winning any combination, is approximately 1 in 1.94.

Here, as shown in FIG. 22, if a win occurs when IV = 1, it is a normal replay win; if a win occurs when IV = 2, it is a first promotion replay 1 win; if a win occurs when IV = 3, it is a first promotion replay 2 win; if a win occurs when IV = 4, it is a first promotion replay 3 win; and if a win occurs when IV = 5, it is a first promotion replay 4 win. The probability of winning when IV = 1 to 5 is approximately 1 in 7.30. The probability of winning a normal replay under normal gaming mode is also approximately 1 in 7.30. In other words, when the gaming mode transitions to the first RT mode, the winning probability for each of the roles of small win, replay, and bonus is the same as in normal gaming mode, but the winning pattern for awarding the replay privilege changes to one different from that under normal gaming mode. More specifically, in normal game mode, only the first replay win, which does not result in a transition to the game mode, is achieved, and in the first RT mode, in addition to the first replay win, a third replay win, which results in a transition to the second RT mode, is achieved.

In the second stop information setting process (step S409), in addition to when the above-mentioned push order bell is won, when First Promotion Replay 1 to First Promotion Replay 4 are won, stop information is set to change the winning pattern that is achieved depending on the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 that generated the stop command.

Figure 23(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between winning roles, the operation sequence of stop switches 42-44, and the winning patterns that are achieved. When First Promotion Replay 1 to First Promotion Replay 4 are won, unlike when the push order bell is won, the first replay win or third replay win is always achieved regardless of the operation timing of stop switches 42-44. For First Promotion Replay 1 to First Promotion Replay 4, one of the six operation sequences is associated with the third replay, and the other operation sequences are associated with the first replay.

In addition, in the first promotion replays 2 to 4, in addition to the first and third replays, the sixth, seventh, and eighth replays are also assigned as winning combinations. However, these sixth to eighth replays are not associated with any of the six operation sequences mentioned above. Therefore, even if the sixth to eighth replays are winning combinations in the first promotion replays 2 to 4, they will not win, regardless of the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44.

More specifically, for First Promotion Replays 1-4, First Promotion Replay 1 is assigned the first replay and the third replay, First Promotion Replay 2 is assigned the sixth replay in addition to the first replay and the third replay, First Promotion Replay 3 is assigned the seventh replay in addition to the first replay and the third replay, and First Promotion Replay 4 is assigned the eighth replay in addition to the first replay and the third replay, but for any of First Promotion Replays 1-4, the winning replay is either the first replay or the third replay. This is to make it difficult to understand the sequence of operations required to achieve a third replay win. In other words, for example, if there is only one type of first promotion replay, there will also be only one type of operation sequence corresponding to the third replay win, and when the first promotion replay is won, it may be possible to intentionally achieve the third replay win. Note that this relationship is not limited to the relationship between first promotion replays 1 to 4, and the same can be said for other overlapping roles.

Returning to the explanation of the RT state processing, if it is determined in step S508 that a second replay win has not been achieved, the process proceeds to step S510, where it is determined whether a third replay win has been achieved based on the winning combination set in the previous payout determination process. If a third replay win has been achieved, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S511, and the second RT setting flag is set in step S512, terminating this processing.

If the second RT setting flag is set in step S512, the game state transitions to the second RT state. Then, in step S302 of the lottery process, it is determined that the current game state is the second RT state based on the fact that the second RT setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, and a lottery table for the second RT state is selected.

Figure 24 shows the lottery table for the second RT state selected in the second RT state of "Setting 3." Compared to the lottery table for the first RT state (see Figure 22), the lottery table for the second RT state has different point values PV for IV = 1-10, 13, and 14, while the same point values PV are set for the other index values IV. Therefore, when determining whether a winning combination is a winning combination using this lottery table, the probability of winning when IV = 11, 12, and 15-58 is equal to the respective winning probabilities in the first RT state. The probability of winning when IV = 1 is approximately 1 in 13.2, no winning when IV = 2-5, the probability of winning when IV = 6-8 is approximately 1 in 15.5, and the probability of winning when IV = 9 and 10 is approximately 1 in 8.90. The probability of winning when IV = 13 is approximately 1 in 6.90, and the probability of winning when IV = 14 is approximately 1 in 131. The probability of missing, meaning that no winning combination occurs, is approximately 1 in 150. In other words, when transitioning to the second RT state, the probability of missing is lower than in the normal game state and the first RT state, giving the player an advantage. Also, in the second RT state, in addition to the first replay win, which does not transition the game state, the second replay win, which transitions to the first RT state, the fourth and fifth replay wins, which transition to the third RT state, and the eleventh and twelfth replay wins, which transition to the fourth RT state, are possible.

In the second stop information setting process (step S409), in addition to the above-mentioned cases where the first promotion replay 1 to first promotion replay 4 are won, stop information is set to change the winning pattern that is achieved depending on the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 that generated the stop command, even when the fall replay 1 to fall replay 3, second promotion replay 1, second promotion replay 2, transition replay 1, or transition replay 2 are won.

Figure 23(b) is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between winning roles, the order in which stop switches 42-44 are operated, and the winning patterns that result. If Fall Replay 1 to Fall Replay 3 are won, the first replay win or the second replay win will always be achieved, regardless of the timing of stop switches 42-44 operation. If Second Promotion Replay 1 is won, either the first replay win, the fourth replay win, or the fifth replay win will always be achieved, regardless of the timing of stop switches 42-44 operation. If Second Promotion Replay 2 is won, either the first replay win or the fourth replay win will always be achieved, regardless of the timing of stop switches 42-44 operation.

The numbers assigned to the 4th replay in the diagram correspond to the symbol combination that results in the 4th replay winning. "1" corresponds to the symbol combination that results in a scatter, and "2" corresponds to the symbol combination that results in a red 7, red 7, and black BAR stopping in the middle row (see Figure 11). For example, if the left stop switch 42 is operated first when the 2nd promotion replay 1 is won, the symbol combination that results in a scatter will stop, resulting in the 4th replay winning, or the symbol combination that results in a red 7, red 7, and black BAR stopping in the middle row will stop, resulting in the 4th replay winning.

Also, as shown in Figure 23 (d), if transition replays 1 and 2 are won, the first replay win, second replay win, and 11th or 12th replay win will be achieved regardless of the timing of operation of stop switches 42 to 44. In other words, regardless of the timing of operation of stop switches 42 to 44, either the first replay win will be achieved and no transition in game state will occur, the second replay win will be achieved and a transition to the first RT state will occur, or the 11th or 12th replay win will be achieved and a transition to the fourth RT state will occur.

Returning to the explanation of the RT state processing, if it is determined in step S510 that a third replay win has not been achieved, the process proceeds to step S513, where it is determined whether a fourth replay win or a fifth replay win has been achieved, based on the winning combination set in the previous payout determination process. If a fourth replay win or a fifth replay win has been achieved, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S514, and the third RT setting flag is set in step S515, terminating this processing.

If the third RT setting flag is set in step S515, the game state transitions to the third RT state. Then, in step S302 of the lottery process, it is determined that the current game state is the third RT state based on the fact that the third RT setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, and a lottery table for the third RT state is selected.

Figure 25 shows the lottery table for the third RT state selected in the third RT state of "Setting 3." Compared to the lottery table for the second RT state (see Figure 24), the lottery table for the third RT state differs in the point values PV for IV = 9-12, while the same point values PV are set for other index values IV. Therefore, when using this lottery table to determine whether a winning combination will result, the probability of winning when IV = 1-8 and 13-58 is equal to the respective winning probabilities in the second RT state, while winning is not achieved when IV = 9 or 10, and the probability of winning when IV = 11 or 12 is approximately 1 in 7.00. The probability of losing, i.e., not winning any combination, is approximately 1 in 150. In other words, when the gaming state transitions to the third RT state, the winning probability for each combination of small combinations, replays, and bonuses is the same as in the second RT state, but the winning pattern for awarding the replay bonus changes to one different from the second RT state. More specifically, in the third RT state, in addition to the first replay win which does not result in a transition to the game state, the second replay win which results in a transition to the first RT state, and the eleventh and twelfth replay wins which result in a transition to the fourth RT state, the sixth, seventh and eighth replay wins which do not result in a transition to the game state, and the third replay win which results in a transition to the second RT state, are also achieved.

In the second stop information setting process (step S409), even if BAR Replay 1 or BAR Replay 2 is won, stop information is set to change the winning pattern that is achieved depending on the operation order of the stop switches 42-44 that generated the stop command.

Figure 23(c) is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between winning combinations, the order in which stop switches 42-44 are operated, and the winning patterns that result. If BAR Replay 1 is won, regardless of the timing of stop switches 42-44 operation, one of the following will always be achieved: 1st Replay Win, 6th Replay Win, 7th Replay Win, or 3rd Replay Win. If BAR Replay 2 is won, regardless of the timing of stop switches 42-44 operation, one of the following will always be achieved: 1st Replay Win, 6th Replay Win, 8th Replay Win, or 3rd Replay Win.

Returning to the explanation of the RT state processing, if it is determined in step S513 that a 4th replay win or a 5th replay win has not been achieved, the process proceeds to step S516, where it is determined whether an 11th replay win or a 12th replay win has been achieved, based on the winning combination set in the previous payout determination process. If neither an 11th replay win nor a 12th replay win has been achieved, the RT state processing ends. If an 11th replay win or a 12th replay win has been achieved, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S517, the 4th RT setting flag is set in step S518, and the fixed RT game number setting process is executed in step S519, after which the process ends. Step S519 sets the number of games that can be played in the 4th RT state; this process will be explained in detail later along with the explanation of the 4th RT state.

As described above, the RT state processing causes transitions between the normal gaming state, the first RT state, the second RT state, the third RT state, and the fourth RT state. Figure 26 shows the triggers for transition and termination of each state, as well as whether or not transitions occur between each state.

When the game state is the normal game state or the first RT state, the probability of winning any of the replays (excluding IV = 48 to 51 (Special Replay A Duplicate 1, etc.), which results in a double win with a bonus), is approximately 1 in 7.30 (hereinafter referred to simply as the "replay probability") . On the other hand, in the second RT state to the fourth RT state, the replay probability is approximately 1 in 1.53, allowing players to play while minimizing the loss of medals, making this a more advantageous state for players than the normal game state or the first RT state. A transition from the normal game state to the first RT state occurs when the transition result stops, and a transition to the second RT state occurs when the third replay win is made. In the second RT state, a second replay win will cause a transition to the first RT state, and under normal circumstances, the game will basically remain in the normal game state and the first RT state.

In the second RT state and the third RT state, the RT state continues until the second replay win is achieved. The configuration for preventing the second replay win will be described later, but since the number of games played in the second RT state and the third RT state is variable as the number of games played until the second replay win is achieved, these second RT state and the third RT state are also referred to as infinite RT states. In contrast, the fourth RT state, which is entered upon the 11th replay win or the 12th replay win, has a fixed number of games played of 50 or 200, and is also referred to as a fixed RT state.

In the following explanation, the normal game state and first RT state will be referred to as the normal RT state in order to contrast them with the infinite RT state and fixed RT state. Also, to make it easier to understand that the replay probability is higher in the infinite RT state and fixed RT state than in the normal RT state, the infinite RT state and fixed RT state will be collectively referred to as the high RT state, and the normal RT state will also be referred to as the low RT state.

By the way, the first RT state is also included in the infinite RT state because the number of games in which it is stayed is variable, but for ease of explanation, it will be classified as above.

While it is possible to transition from the normal RT state and infinite RT state (normal gameplay state, 1st RT state to 3rd RT state) to another infinite RT state while staying in the fixed RT state (4th RT state), transition to the infinite RT state is not possible. Furthermore, while transition to the fixed RT state (4th RT state) does not occur in the normal RT state (normal gameplay state, 1st RT state), it is set up so that it can occur in the infinite RT state (2nd RT state, 3rd RT state).

Next, the bonus state processing in step S215 will be explained based on the flowchart in Figure 27.

First, in step S601, it is determined whether the current gaming state is a bonus state, i.e., whether the current gaming state is a BB state or a CB state. If the current gaming state is not a bonus state, the bonus determination process shown in steps S602 to S613 is performed.

In the bonus determination process, step S602 determines whether any of the first BB win flag, second BB win flag, or CB win flag is set. If any of the win flags is set, proceed to step S603, where it is determined whether a CB win has occurred based on the winning combination set in the previous payout determination process. If a CB win has occurred, step S604 sets a CB setting flag in the status information storage area 106c. In step S605, the remaining payout counter, which is provided in the status information storage area 106c and counts the number of medals remaining that can be paid out during the bonus state, is set to 15. By performing steps S604 and S605, the game state transitions to CB state.

Here, we will briefly explain CB and CB states.

A CB win occurs when the "Red Bell" or "White Bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Red Bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Watermelon," "First Replay," or "Black BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on an active line. The CB symbols are positioned on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R so that the spacing between them is four symbols or less. Therefore, if a CB win occurs, the CB win occurs regardless of the order or timing of operation of the stop switches 42-44.

When the CB setting flag is set in the status information storage area 106c, the main control device 101 determines that the game status is CB status. Then, in step S205 of the normal processing, it determines whether the number of medals bet has reached "2" instead of "3," and in the active line setting processing (step S209), it sets the bottom line L3 and the right-downward line L4 as active lines.

In step S302 of the lottery process, a lottery table for the CB state is selected. While the CB state lottery table is not shown, in the CB state lottery table, the point value PV for IV = 1 to 52 is set to "0," and the point value for IV = 55 to 58 is set to "16384" (see Figure 17, etc. for the correspondence between IV and winning roles). Therefore, in the CB state, the probability of winning CB small/medium role 1 (the probability of winning when IV = 55) is approximately 1 in 4.00, the probability of winning CB small/medium role 2 (the probability of winning when IV = 56) is approximately 1 in 4.00, the probability of winning CB small/medium role 3 (the probability of winning when IV = 57) is approximately 1 in 4.00, and the probability of winning CB small/medium role 4 (the probability of winning when IV = 58) is approximately 1 in 4.00. No losing events occur.

Figure 28(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between winning combinations, the operation order of stop switches 42-44, and the winning patterns that are achieved. While detailed explanations are omitted, regardless of the order and timing of operation of stop switches 42-44, whether CB small/medium combination 1 to CB small/medium combination 4 is won, some kind of small combination win is always achieved. Because CB state is a two-bet game, if the first small combination win, the 27th small combination win, the 31st small combination win, or the 36th to 38th small combination wins are achieved, 15 medals are paid out. If the second to 26th small combination wins, the 28th to 30th small combination wins, or the 32nd to 35th small combination wins are achieved, 14 medals are paid out. In other words, when the game transitions to CB state, 14 or 15 medals are always paid out.

In addition to or instead of CB as a winning combination and the CB state as a game state, a single bonus (SB) may be provided, which allows one game (JAC game) to be played as a winning combination, and an SB state to which a player transitions based on the winning of the single bonus (winning).

Returning to the explanation of the bonus state processing, if it is determined in step S603 that a CB win has not been achieved, this means that a bonus win flag other than CB has been set. In such a case, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S608, and it is determined in step S609 whether a first BB win or a second BB win has been achieved.

If any of the BB wins is achieved, the BB win flag set in the win flag storage area 106a of RAM 106 is cleared in step S610, and a BB setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c in step S611. Then, in step S612, the remaining payout counter is set to 216, and 216 is displayed in the remaining payout display unit 61. The value set in step S612 corresponds to the upper limit payout number in the BB state, and the BB state ends when medals equal to or greater than this value have been paid out in the BB state.

By performing steps S610 to S612, the game state transitions to BB state. Then, in step S302 of the lottery process, the current game state is determined to be BB state based on the BB setting flag being set in the state information storage area 106c, and the corresponding BB state lottery table is selected.

Figure 29 shows the lottery table for the BB state, which is selected in the BB state, which transitions to the first BB or second BB. In the lottery table for the BB state, the point value PV for IV = 1-30 and 34-58 is set to "0," and the point value for IV = 31-33 is set to "21845." Therefore, in the BB state, the probability of winning the first role in BB (the probability of winning when IV = 31) is approximately 1 in 1.11, the probability of winning the second role in BB (the probability of winning when IV = 32) is approximately 1 in 20.0, and the probability of winning the third role in BB (the probability of winning when IV = 33) is approximately 1 in 20.0. The probability of not winning any role is approximately 1 in 65,500.

The winning probabilities for the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd roles in BB are the same for both 1st BB and 2nd BB. Furthermore, the winning probabilities for the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd roles in BB are the same regardless of the trigger for transitioning to BB state for 1st BB or 2nd BB. For example, the winning probability for the 3rd role in BB in 1st BB based on winning one special reply A overlap is the same as the winning probability for the 3rd role in BB in 1st BB based on winning one special reply AB overlap. In other words, in both BB states, the lottery process is performed by referencing a common BB state lottery table.

Figure 28(b) is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between winning combinations, the operation order of the stop switches 42-44, and the winning modes that are achieved. As mentioned above, the first small combination win is a winning mode that can be achieved regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42-44. Therefore, if the first combination wins in BB, either the first small combination win, the 39th small combination win, or the 40th small combination win will always be achieved, regardless of the operation order and timing of the stop switches 42-44. Similarly, the 9th replay win is also a winning mode that can be achieved regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42-44. Therefore, if the second combination wins in BB, the 9th replay win will always be achieved, regardless of the operation order and timing of the stop switches 42-44.

Which of the three BB combinations that result in the 9th and 10th replay wins depends on the timing of the operation of the stop switches 42-44. If both are winnable when the stop switches 42-44 are stopped, the stop drive control is performed so that the replay with the fewer slips wins. More specifically, the symbol combinations that result in the 9th and 10th replay wins are the "1st Replay" and "2nd Replay" symbols on both the center reel 32M and the right reel 32R, but are different on the left reel 32L. That is, on the left reel 32L, the target symbols for the 9th replay are the "red bell" and "white bell," while the target symbols for the 10th replay are the "young man" and "watermelon."

For example, in a three-bet game, if the left stop switch 42 is operated to stop when the fourth "cherry" through seventh "red bell" symbols on the left reel 32L reach the top row, both the seventh "red bell" symbol, which is the target symbol for the ninth replay, and the eighth "watermelon" symbol, which is the target symbol for the tenth replay, can be stopped on the top row on the active line. However, in this case, the stop drive control is performed to stop the seventh "red bell" symbol, which has the least number of slips, on the top row. As a result, a ninth replay win is achieved, rather than a tenth replay win. Additionally, if the left stop switch 42 is stopped when the 9th "red 7" symbol through the 12th "white bell" symbol reach the top row on the left reel 32L, the drive control is similarly performed so that the 12th "white bell" symbol stops in the top row instead of the 13th "youth" symbol, making it easier to win on the 9th replay than on the 10th replay. In other words, to win on the 10th replay, the left stop switch 42 must be stopped when the 0th "youth" symbol, the 8th "watermelon" symbol, and the 13th "youth" symbol reach the top row of the left reel 32L; if it is stopped at any other time, a 9th replay win will be achieved.

Since the BB state is a three-bet game, if the first role is won during BB, and the first, 39th, and 40th small roles are won, nine medals will be paid out. Furthermore, if the second role is won during BB, the 9th replay win will be won, and even if the third role is won during BB, the 9th replay win will often be won. In other words, in the BB state, either a bell win, such as the first small role, or a replay win, which is the 9th replay, will frequently be won. When a replay win is won, no medals are paid out, but a replay is awarded, allowing the next game to be played without medals. Since the probability of a miss in the BB state is approximately 1 in 65,500, the BB state can be said to be a game state in which nine medals are paid out with an extremely high probability.

If the determination in step S609 is negative and no BB wins have been achieved, a carryover command is set in step S613. The carryover command is a command sent to the display control device 81 to indicate that a bonus win has not been achieved in the bonus winning game and that a so-called carryover state has occurred. This carryover command is output to the display control device 81 in the command output process (step S110) of the timer interrupt process.

As already explained, in games played in the carryover state, the ability to win other bonuses is restricted. More specifically, in the lottery table for the normal play state (Figure 17), if a combination of bonuses (1st BB, 2nd BB, CB) with IV = 34 to 51 is won, the win flags corresponding to these bonuses will not be set. Therefore, for example, if a combination of minor bonuses or replay with IV = 34 to 51 is won, the win flags for these minor bonuses and replay will be set, but the win flags corresponding to the bonuses will not be set, and only the minor bonus win will be valid. In other words, the carryover state can be said to be a state in which the ability to win bonuses is restricted.

If the game state transitions to the CB state or the BB state, a positive determination is made in step S601, and an end determination process is performed in step S614. In the end determination process, it is determined whether the value of the remaining payout counter has reached 0, and if it has reached 0, the CB setting flag or the BB setting flag is cleared. Furthermore, in the end determination process, if the BB setting flag is cleared, an end flag is set, indicating that the BB state has ended for this game. This end determination process will be explained in detail later.

As shown in steps S602 to S614, when a CB win occurs and a CB win is achieved, the CB setting flag is set without clearing the RT setting flag. Therefore, when the CB setting flag is cleared, i.e., when the CB state ends, the game state at the time the CB win occurred will be restored. For example, if a CB win occurs during normal game mode, the game will return to the normal game mode after the CB state ends, and if a CB win occurs during the third RT state, the game will return to the third RT state after the CB state ends. On the other hand, when the first BB or second BB is won, the RT setting flag is cleared in step S608 regardless of whether the corresponding BB win occurred. Therefore, when the BB setting flag is cleared, i.e., when the BB state ends, the game will transition to the normal game mode even if a first BB win occurs during the second RT state. If the game transitions to CB mode, the player can expect to receive an increase of 13 (= 15 - 2) or 25 (= 14 - 2 + 15 - 2) medals before the CB mode ends. If the game transitions to BB mode, the player can expect to receive an increase of approximately 144 (= 9 x 24 - 3 x 24) medals before the BB mode ends.

By the way, if you win the 2nd or 3rd BB role in BB state and a replay is awarded, the remaining payout counter will not be decremented. In other words, the number of times you win the 2nd or 3rd BB role in BB state does not affect the number of medal increases you can expect in BB state.

If none of the first BB win flag, second BB win flag, or CB win flag is set (NO in step S602), if none of the first BB win, second BB win, or CB win is achieved and a carryover command is set (step S613 is executed), if a predetermined value is set in the remaining payout counter in steps S605 and S612, or if an end determination process is performed in step S614, the process proceeds to step S606 and sets a status command. Here, a status command is a command sent to the display control device 81 to indicate the game status at the end of the game (i.e., the game status of the next game). In step S606, a status command corresponding to the setting flag set in the status information storage area 106c is set. After setting the status command, in step S607, an external signal setting process is performed to set an external signal to be output from the external centralized terminal board 121 to the outside of the slot machine 10. This process then ends.

<Overview of game state transitions and display modes>
Here, the transition of the gaming state will be explained using Figure 30. Note that the CB state is not shown in the figure.

If the game state is BB state, when the number of medals paid out in that BB state reaches 216, the BB state ends and the game state transitions to the normal game state.

When the game state is in the normal game state, the game state transitions to the first RT state when the transition result stops on an active line, and the game state transitions to the BB state when a BB win is achieved. The transition result stops on an active line when a miss occurs in a game in which the push order bell is won. In the lottery process using the normal game state lottery table, the first promotion replays 1 to 4, which trigger a transition to the second RT state, the second promotion replays 1 and 2, which trigger a transition to the third RT state, and the transition replays 1 and 2, which trigger a transition to the fourth RT state, are not won, so the game does not transition from the normal game state to the second RT state to the fourth RT state (see Figure 17).

When the gaming state is in the first RT state, the establishment of a third replay win will cause the gaming state to transition to the second RT state. The third replay win is established when one of the first promotion replays 1 to 4 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the specified operating sequence (see Figure 23 (a)). In the lottery process using the lottery table for the first RT state, the second promotion replays 1 and 2, which trigger a transition to the third RT state, and the transition replays 1 and 2, which trigger a transition to the fourth RT state, are not won, so the first RT state does not transition to the third RT state or the fourth RT state.

Furthermore, if a BB win is not achieved in a game for which a BB win flag is set, i.e., if the BB win flag is carried over, the game state will transition to the normal game state, and if a BB win is achieved in a game for which a BB win flag is set, the game state will transition to the BB state.

When the game state is in the second RT state, the game state transitions to the third RT state when the fourth replay win or the fifth replay win is achieved. Furthermore, when the second replay win is achieved or when the transition result stops on an active line, the game state transitions to the first RT state. The fourth replay win and the fifth replay win are achieved when the second promotion replay 1 or second promotion replay 2 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the specified order of operation (see Figure 23 (b)). The second replay win is achieved when one of the fall replays 1 to 3 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the specified order of operation (see Figure 23 (b)). The transition result stops on an active line when a miss occurs in the game that wins the push order bell. In addition, if a BB win is not achieved in a game for which a BB win flag is set, i.e., if the BB win flag is carried over, the game state will transition to the normal game state, and if a BB win is achieved in a game for which a BB win flag is set, the game state will transition to the BB state.

When the game state is in the third RT state, the game state transitions to the second RT state when a third replay win is made. Furthermore, when a second replay win is made or when the transition result stops on an active line, the game state transitions to the first RT state. The third replay win is made when BAR Replay 1 or BAR Replay 2 is won and the stop switches 42-44 are operated in the specified order (see Figure 23(c)). The second replay win is made when any of Fall Replay 1 to Fall Replay 3 is won and the stop switches 42-44 are operated in the specified order (see Figure 23(b)). The transition result stops on an active line when a miss occurs in a game that wins the push order bell. In addition, if a BB win is not achieved in a game for which a BB win flag is set, i.e., if the BB win flag is carried over, the game state will transition to the normal game state, and if a BB win is achieved in a game for which a BB win flag is set, the game state will transition to the BB state.

Furthermore, when the gaming state is in the second RT state or the third RT state, the gaming state transitions to the fourth RT state by achieving the 11th replay win or the 12th replay win. The 11th replay win and the 12th replay win are achieved when Transition Replay 1 or Transition Replay 2 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined operating sequence (see Figure 23 (d)). As already explained, the fourth RT state is a fixed RT state with a fixed number of games. Therefore, even if the transition result stops in the fourth RT state, there is no transition to the first RT state. Note that the lottery table for the fourth RT state will be explained later, but the second replay cannot be won in the fourth RT state. Therefore, there is no transition to the first RT state due to the second replay win. Additionally, if a BB win is not achieved in a game for which a BB win flag is set, i.e., if the BB win flag is carried over, the game state will transition to the normal game state, and if a BB win is achieved in a game for which a BB win flag is set, the game state will transition to the BB state, similar to the first to third RT states described above.

In this slot machine 10, the main control unit 101 manages seven gaming states: normal gaming state, first RT state, second RT state, third RT state, fourth RT state, BB state, and CB state. The main control unit 101 also manages five display modes, broadly classified as normal mode, CZ mode (chance zone mode), AT mode (assist time mode), VB mode (virtual bonus mode), and BB mode (big bonus mode).

Figure 31 shows the transitions between display modes.

BB mode is a display mode that is entered when the first or second BB win is achieved, and ends when the BB state ends. In other words, BB mode is a display mode that corresponds to the BB state. Therefore, when entering BB mode, players can expect to gain approximately 144 medals.

When transitioning from normal mode or CZ mode to BB mode, a lottery to transition to CZ mode and a lottery to transition to AT mode may be held in that BB mode. If you win the lottery to transition to AT mode, you will transition to AT mode after BB mode ends, and if you win the lottery to transition to CZ mode, you will transition to CZ mode after BB mode ends. If you do not win either transition lottery, you will transition to normal mode after BB mode ends. If you transition from AT mode to BB mode, you will return to AT mode after BB mode ends. If you transition from VB mode to BB mode, you will return to VB mode after BB mode ends.

Normal mode is a display mode in which the operation order of stop switches 42-44 is not announced when the push order bell is won, or when 1st Promotion Replay 1 to 1st Promotion Replay 4, Fall Replay 1 to Fall Replay 3, 2nd Promotion Replay 1, 2nd Promotion Replay 2, BAR Replay 1, BAR Replay 2, Transition Replay 1, and Transition Replay 2 (hereinafter collectively referred to as "push order replays") are won. In normal mode, a lottery for transitioning to CZ mode and a lottery for transitioning to AT mode are held. If the lottery for transitioning to CZ mode is won, the mode will transition from normal mode to CZ mode, and if the lottery for transitioning to AT mode is won, the mode will transition from normal mode to AT mode. There is no transition to VB mode from normal mode.

Normal mode corresponds to each of the game states: normal game state, 1st RT state, 2nd RT state, 3rd RT state, 4th RT state, and CB state. However, in normal mode, the operation order of the stop switches 42-44 is not announced when the push order bell or push order replay is won, so transitions to the 2nd RT state to the 4th RT state are rare, and the game state almost always corresponds to the normal game state or the 1st RT state. In normal mode, if the game state at that time is the normal game state or the 1st RT state, you can expect to lose approximately 1.59 medals per game, and if the game state at that time is the 2nd RT state to the 4th RT state, you can expect to lose approximately 0.06 medals per game.

CZ mode, like normal mode, is a display mode in which the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not announced when the push order bell or push order replay is won. In CZ mode, a lottery is held to transition to AT mode. However, the probability of winning the lottery to transition to AT mode in CZ mode is set higher than the probability of winning the lottery to transition to AT mode in normal mode. In other words, while CZ mode does not announce the operation order like normal mode, it is set as a mode in which it is easy to transition to AT mode. If the lottery to transition to AT mode is won, the game will transition from CZ mode to AT mode. If a predetermined number of games (e.g., 10 times) have been played without winning the transition lottery, the game will transition from CZ mode to normal mode. There is no transition from CZ mode to VB mode.

CZ mode corresponds to each of the game states: normal game state, 1st RT state, 2nd RT state, 3rd RT state, 4th RT state, and CB state. However, in CZ mode, the operation order of the stop switches 42-44 is not announced when a push order replay is won, so transitions to the 2nd RT state to the 4th RT state are rare, and the game state almost always corresponds to the normal game state or the 1st RT state. In CZ mode, if the game state at that time is normal game state or the 1st RT state, you can expect to lose approximately 1.59 medals per game, and if the game state at that time is the 2nd RT state to the 4th RT state, you can expect to lose approximately 0.06 medals per game.

AT mode is a display mode in which the operation sequence of the stop switches 42-44 is displayed when the push order bell is won or when the push order replay is won. AT mode is made up of four AT modes, ATLV.1 mode to ATLV.4 mode, which have different probabilities of transitioning to VB mode. In all AT modes, the probability of transitioning to VB mode is higher than in normal mode. If the lottery for transitioning to VB mode is won, the game will transition from AT mode to VB mode. If a predetermined number of games (e.g., 50 games) have been played without winning the lottery for transitioning to VB mode, the game will transition from AT mode to normal mode.

ATLV.1 mode to ATLV.4 mode are set so that the probability of winning the lottery to transition to VB mode differs. More specifically, the probability of winning the lottery to transition to VB mode is set so that ATLV.4 mode has the highest probability of winning and ATLV.1 mode has the lowest probability of winning. The probability of winning the lottery to transition to VB mode increases in the following order: ATLV.1 mode, ATLV.2 mode, ATLV.3 mode, ATLV.4 mode.

AT mode corresponds to each game state: normal game state, first RT state, second RT state, third RT state, fourth RT state, and CB state. However, in AT mode, the operation order of stop switches 42-44 is notified both when the push order bell is won and when the push order replay is won. Therefore, if the player operates the stop switches 42-44 in the notified operation order, it corresponds to the second RT state to the fourth RT state. In AT mode, if the game state at that time is normal game state or first RT state, the player can expect to gain approximately 0.61 medals per game. If the game state at that time is second RT state to fourth RT state, the player can expect to gain approximately 1.90 medals per game. Since AT mode continues for at least 50 games after the game state transitions to second RT state, the player can expect to gain approximately 100 medals when transitioning to AT mode. In addition, if Transition Replay 1 or Transition Replay 2 is won in the second RT state or the third RT state in AT mode, the operation sequence resulting in the first replay win may be announced, or the operation sequence resulting in the 11th replay win or the 12th replay win may be announced, and there may be cases where the transition to the fourth RT state does not occur, or where it does occur. These configurations will be explained in detail later.

VB mode is a pseudo-bonus mode, so-called pseudo-bonus (Virtual
In VB mode, when the symbols corresponding to the first BB or second BB (the "red 7" symbols or the "white BAR" symbols) stop, the game transitions to the bonus state, whereas in VB mode, when the symbols corresponding to the fourth or fifth replay win (the "red 7" symbols, "red 7" symbols, and "black BAR" symbols stop in the middle row, the "black BAR" symbols, "black BAR" symbols, and "red 7" symbols stop in the middle row, the "black BAR" symbols, "white BAR" symbols, and "white BAR" symbols stop in the middle row, etc.) stop, the game does not transition to the bonus state, but does transition to the third RT state, and in summary, it is a mode in which a push order notification occurs similar to the AT mode. That is, like the AT mode, the VB mode is a display mode in which the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44 is announced both when the push order bell is won and when the push order replay is won. The difference between the VB mode and the AT mode is that when the second promotion replay 1 or the second promotion replay 2 is won, the AT mode announces the operation sequence for realizing the first replay win, while the VB mode announces the operation sequence for realizing the fourth replay win or the fifth replay win (see FIG. 23(b)).

VB mode corresponds to each of the following game states: normal game state, first RT state, second RT state, third RT state, fourth RT state, and CB state. However, in VB mode, the operation sequence of the stop switches 42-44 is notified both when the push order bell is won and when the push order replay is won. Therefore, VB mode corresponds to the third RT state or the fourth RT state if the player operates the stop switches 42-44 in the notified operation sequence. In VB mode, if the game state at that time is normal game state or first RT state, the player can expect to gain approximately 0.61 medals per game. If the game state at that time is second RT state to fourth RT state, the player can expect to gain approximately 1.90 medals per game. In VB mode, the game state continues for at least 25 games after transitioning to the third RT state, so if a transition to VB mode occurs, the player can expect to gain approximately 50 more medals. Even in VB mode, if a win is made on Transition Replay 1 or Transition Replay 2, the notification of the operation sequence may or may not result in a transition to the fourth RT state; this configuration will be explained in detail later.

Explaining the transition of display modes when a player's medal holdings increase, the typical flow is to transition from normal mode to CZ mode, from CZ mode to AT mode, and then back from AT mode to normal mode. Furthermore, since a lottery is held in AT mode to transition to VB mode, if a loop occurs in which the player transitions from AT mode to VB mode and then back from VB mode to AT mode, the player can expect to increase their medal holdings even more.

As mentioned above, when comparing normal mode and CZ mode, the probability of winning the lottery to transition to AT mode is set to be higher in CZ mode than in normal mode. Therefore, CZ mode is also known as the so-called chance zone, which encourages players to expect a transition to AT mode.

In addition, AT mode is set to ATLV.1 mode through ATLV.4 mode, and the probability of winning the lottery for transitioning to VB mode differs for each AT mode. When transitioning from normal mode or CZ mode to AT mode, the game generally transitions to ATLV.1 mode. In ATLV.1 mode, a lottery for transitioning to VB mode is held, and a lottery for transitioning to ATLV.2 mode is also held. If the lottery for transitioning to ATLV.2 mode is won, the game transitions to ATLV.2 mode, and the probability of winning the lottery for transitioning to VB mode increases. In ATLV.2 mode, a lottery for transitioning to VB mode is held, and a lottery for transitioning to ATLV.3 mode is also held. If the lottery for transitioning to ATLV.3 mode is won, the game transitions to ATLV.3 mode, and the probability of winning the lottery for transitioning to VB mode increases. In ATLV.3 mode, a lottery for transitioning to VB mode is held, and a lottery for transitioning to ATLV.4 mode is also held. If you win the lottery to switch to ATLV.4 mode, you will switch to ATLV.4 mode, and your chances of winning the lottery to switch to VB mode will increase.

Therefore, when switching to AT mode, the AT mode is promoted from ATLV.1 mode to ATLV.2 mode to ATLV.3 mode to ATLV.4 mode, increasing the probability of switching to VB mode and making it more likely that a loop between AT mode and VB mode will occur.

As described above, this slot machine 10 is configured so that players can increase their owned medals in each of the display modes: AT mode, VB mode, and BB mode. In conjunction with each display mode, multiple RT states and multiple states such as BB state and CB state are switched back and forth depending on the winning combinations of each replay or the stopping of transition results. As described above, when a push order replay win or push order bell win is won, the order in which stop switches 42-43 are operated determines whether the corresponding replay win is achieved or the transition result is stopped. Furthermore, in AT mode or VB mode, when a push order bell win is won, the order of operation that will result in the first minor combination win is announced, allowing players to expect to increase their owned medals.

The display mode configuration is explained below.

The display mode configuration can be broadly divided into (1) processing related to the display mode transition lottery, (2) processing for transitioning the game state based on the results of the display mode transition lottery, (3) processing for transitioning the display mode based on the winning result, and (4) processing related to the notification effects on the sub-side. These will be explained in order below.

<Processing for lottery for transitioning display modes>
<Lottery result processing>
The process related to the display mode transition lottery in (1) is performed in the lottery result response process (step S312) of the lottery process (FIG. 16) by the main control device 101. Hereinafter, the lottery result response process will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

In step S701, it is determined whether the 1st BB win flag or the 2nd BB win flag has already been set prior to the current game, and whether the current game is in a carryover state from the 1st BB or the 2nd BB.

If a negative judgment is made in step S701, processing for switching display modes, etc., is executed in steps S702 to S710. On the other hand, if a positive judgment is made in step S701 and the bonus is in a carryover state, processing for switching display modes, etc. is not executed. In other words, while the bonus is in a carryover state, the execution of processing for switching display modes, etc. is restricted.

Specifically, if a negative judgment is made in step S701, a determination is made in step S702 as to whether the current gaming state is the normal gaming state, the first RT state, or the fourth RT state. If a positive judgment is made in step S702, indicating that the current gaming state is the normal gaming state, the first RT state, or the fourth RT state, a determination is made in step S703 as to whether either an AT mode win flag or an AT mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of RAM 106. The AT mode win flag is a flag that the CPU 102 uses to identify that the transition lottery to AT mode has been won. This flag is set when the AT mode transition lottery is won and is cleared when transitioning to AT mode. The AT mode flag is a flag that the CPU 102 uses to identify that the display mode is AT mode. This flag is set when transitioning to AT mode and is cleared when AT mode finally ends (excluding transitions from AT mode to VB mode, specialized zone, or BB mode). If a negative judgment is made in step S703, the first specific role processing is executed in step S704.

<First specific winning combination process>
The first specific winning process will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

Here, the first specific role processing is performed when the player is in normal game mode, first RT mode, or fourth RT mode, and has not yet won AT mode. The display mode in this case corresponds to normal mode or CZ mode. In the first specific role processing, a lottery is held to determine whether or not to switch the display mode to CZ mode, and a lottery is held to determine whether or not to switch to AT mode. Furthermore, in the first specific role processing, if the current display mode is CZ mode, processing is performed to add to the number of continued games in CZ mode.

That is, in step S801, it is determined whether the current display mode is in CZ mode. If it is not in CZ mode, it means that the current display mode is in normal mode. If a negative determination is made in step S801, a normal time table is obtained from the various table storage area 105a of ROM 105 as a table for AT mode lottery. On the other hand, if a positive determination is made in step S801, a CZ mode table is obtained from the various table storage area 105a of ROM 105 as a table for AT mode lottery. The normal time table and the CZ mode table each have a set probability of transitioning to AT mode depending on the type of lottery result (winning role).

Specifically, the mode lottery table stored in the various table storage area 105a is set so that the probability of winning each mode transition lottery varies depending on the current display mode and the type of game result that triggers the lottery.

Here, as shown in Figure 38, the game results that trigger the mode transition lottery are set as follows: Strong Cherry, Weak Cherry, Strong Watermelon, Weak Watermelon, Chance A, Chance B, Middle Bell, Strong Cherry Duplicate 1, Weak Cherry Duplicate 1, Strong Watermelon Duplicate 1, Weak Watermelon Duplicate 1, Chance A Duplicate 1, Chance B Duplicate 1, Middle Bell Duplicate 1, Special Lip A Duplicate 1, Special Lip A Duplicate 2, Single 1st BB, and Single 2nd BB (hereinafter, these are collectively referred to as "transition trigger roles"). Regardless of the setting value, the point value PV set for these transition trigger roles is the same, and there is no setting difference in the winning probability. Furthermore, there is no setting difference in the winning probability for each mode transition lottery. In contrast, the following combinations are set so that there are setting differences in the probability of winning: Strong Cherry Duplicate 2, Weak Cherry Duplicate 2, Strong Watermelon Duplicate 2, Weak Watermelon Duplicate 2, Chance A Duplicate 2, Chance B Duplicate 2, Middle Bell Duplicate 2, Special Lip AB Duplicate 1, and Special Lip AB Duplicate 2. The point values PV are set so that setting 1 generally has the lowest probability of winning and setting 6 has the highest probability of winning (hereinafter, these are collectively referred to as "non-trigger roles"). Furthermore, for these non-trigger roles with setting differences in the probability of winning, no mode transition lottery is held. In other words, a mode transition lottery with no setting differences in the probability of winning is held for transition trigger roles with the same appearance rate, and the transition rates for each mode transition are the same.

In the lottery table for transition to AT mode obtained in step S802 or step S803, the winning probability of the transition lottery is set according to the type of transition trigger role. As shown in FIG. 39, for example, if the transition trigger role is a strong cherry, the normal time table has a 45% probability of winning the transition lottery to AT mode, while the CZ mode table has a 90% probability of winning the transition lottery to AT mode, so that it is easier to win the transition lottery to AT mode in CZ mode than in normal mode. Also, if the transition trigger role is a strong cherry, the probability of winning the transition lottery to AT mode is higher on both the normal time table and the CZ mode table than when the transition trigger role is a weak cherry, and the lower the winning probability (appearance rate) in each game, the easier it is to win the transition lottery to AT mode.

After the table for the AT mode transition lottery is obtained in step S802 or step S803, AT mode lottery processing is executed in step S804. In this processing, the lottery counter is obtained from the various counter area 106e of RAM 106 and compared with the lottery table obtained in step S802 or step S803 to perform a lottery for transition to AT mode.

In step S805, based on the processing result of step S804, it is determined whether or not the lottery for transition to AT mode has been won. If the lottery for transition to AT mode has been won, in step S806 it is determined whether or not the AT mode for which this win has been made is SAT mode. SAT mode is an AT mode that starts after passing through the add-on specialized zone. For example, if the initial number of games in normal AT mode is 50, in SAT mode, the AT mode starts with the initial number of games of 50 plus the number of games added in the add-on specialized zone. Therefore, the degree of advantage to the player differs between normal AT mode and SAT mode, with SAT mode being more advantageous to the player than AT mode.

The lottery for transitioning to SAT mode is held when the lottery for transitioning to AT mode is won (when the lottery processing in step S804 is won). This lottery is held based on the SAT mode transition lottery table, which is set according to the transition trigger and the type of display mode. As shown in FIG. 39, the SAT mode transition lottery table is set so that winning the lottery for transitioning to SAT mode is easier when winning AT mode during CZ mode than when winning AT mode during normal mode, thereby ensuring the superiority of CZ mode. For example, during normal mode, the probability of winning the lottery for transitioning to AT mode triggered by a strong watermelon is 60%, and 5% of those who win the lottery win SAT mode. Therefore, essentially, when a strong watermelon is won during normal mode, 57% of the time the game transitions to AT mode and 3% of the time the game transitions to SAT mode. On the other hand, during CZ mode, there is a 50% chance of winning the lottery to transition to AT mode triggered by a strong watermelon, and 50% of those who win this lottery will enter SAT mode. Therefore, essentially, when a strong watermelon is won during CZ mode, 25% of players will transition to AT mode, and 25% will transition to SAT mode, making the transition rate to SAT mode higher than in normal mode. Furthermore, the probability of winning the lottery to transition to SAT mode varies depending on the transition trigger; for example, comparing a strong cherry and a strong watermelon, in normal mode the probability of winning the lottery to transition to SAT mode is the same for both strong cherries and strong watermelons (5% chance of winning), but in CZ mode the probability of winning the lottery to transition to SAT mode is set to be higher for strong watermelons than for strong cherries.

If it is determined in step S806 that the SAT mode has been won, the process of setting the specialized zone win flag is executed in step S807.

If a negative judgment is made in step S806, or after the processing of step S807 has been executed, the AT mode winning flag is set in step S808. In other words, when an AT mode win is made, the AT mode winning flag is set, and in some cases (when an SAT mode win is made), the specialized zone winning flag is set.

After processing step S808, processing for setting the premonition mode is performed in steps S809 to S812. Premonition mode is a mode in which winning suggestion effects suggesting that an AT mode, CZ mode, etc. has been won are more likely to occur. After each game in the premonition mode, a winning notification of an AT mode, CZ mode, etc. is made. The premonition mode lasts for 0 to 32 games, and the number of games that the premonition mode continues is set to vary depending on the type of AT mode, CZ mode, etc. that has been won, and whether or not a bonus has also been won. Note that if an AT mode, CZ mode, etc. has been won simultaneously with a bonus, a bonus winning notification is made after the premonition mode has been completed, and after the bonus state has ended, a notification of an AT mode, CZ mode, etc. has been won. Furthermore, if the number of premonition games is set to 0, a winning notification will be made without going through the premonition mode.

Specifically, in step S809, a premonition game number table is first retrieved from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105. As shown in FIG. 40, the premonition game number table is configured so that the number of premonition games selected varies depending on the current display mode (normal mode or CZ mode) and whether or not a bonus has been won simultaneously. Specifically, when the current display mode is normal mode and an AT mode win occurs, if a bonus has not been won simultaneously, 1 to 5 games are selected 80% of the time, and 6 to 10 games are selected 20% of the time. On the other hand, even if the current display mode is normal mode, if an AT mode win occurs simultaneously and a bonus win occurs simultaneously, 1 to 5 games are selected 10% of the time, 6 to 10 games are selected 20% of the time, 11 to 20 games are selected 50% of the time, and 21 to 32 games are selected 20% of the time. In other words, when the display mode is normal mode and a bonus has been won simultaneously, a longer premonition game number is more likely to be selected than when a bonus win has not occurred simultaneously. In other words, if a bonus is not won at the same time, the AT mode win will be announced a relatively short number of games after the AT mode winning game. On the other hand, if the current display mode is CZ mode, 0 games will be selected as the number of premonition games, regardless of whether a bonus is won at the same time. In other words, in this case, the premonition mode will not be set, and the AT mode win will be announced in the game following the winning game.

Furthermore, when a SAT mode win is made, which is an AT mode with a special zone for adding bonuses, if a bonus is not also won, games 1 to 5 are selected with a 70% probability, and games 6 to 10 are selected with a 30% probability. On the other hand, if a bonus is also won when an AT mode win is made, games 1 to 5 are not selected, games 6 to 10 are selected with a 20% probability, games 11 to 20 are selected with a 30% probability, and games 21 to 32 are selected with a 50% probability. In other words, even when a SAT mode win is made, if a bonus is also won at the same time, a longer number of premonition games is more likely to be selected than when a bonus is not won at the same time. If a bonus is not also won at the same time, the SAT mode win is announced a relatively short number of games after the SAT mode winning game. Even when a SAT mode win is made, if the current display mode is CZ mode, 0 is selected as the premonition game number regardless of whether a bonus is also won at the same time. In other words, in this case, the premonition mode is not set, and the SAT mode win is announced in the game following the winning game.

In addition, when a bonus is won at the same time, the number of premonition games that are likely to be selected may differ depending on the type of overlapping role. For example, a combination of a replay (9th replay) and a bonus, such as Special Replay A Overlap 1 or Special Replay A Overlap 2, may be configured to more easily select a longer premonition mode than a combination of a minor role (strong cherry, weak cherry, etc.) and a bonus, such as Strong Cherry Overlap 1 or Weak Cherry Overlap 1, or the reverse may be true.

In step S810, a process is performed to determine the number of games to be played in this premonition mode based on the premonition game number table obtained in step S809 and the lottery counter obtained from the various counter area 106e of RAM 106. Then, in step S811, a process is performed to input the premonition game number into the premonition counter provided in the various counter area 106e of RAM 106. The premonition counter is a counter that is decremented by one for each game, and when the premonition counter reaches 0, the premonition mode ends and a winning notification is issued indicating that the player has won the lottery to transition to AT mode, etc.

In step S812, a process is executed to set the premonition command as an output target to the display control device 81, which is the sub-side control device. The premonition command contains information on the lottery result that triggered the premonition mode (the display mode to transition to after the premonition mode; in the case of step S812 above, BB mode and AT mode) and the number of premonition games. The processing on the display control device 81 side based on receiving the premonition command will be explained in detail later. After the processing of step S812 is executed, the first specific role processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step S805 that the lottery for transitioning to AT mode has not been won, the process proceeds to step S813. In step S813, the CZ mode lottery process is executed. In the CZ mode lottery process, a table for the CZ mode lottery is obtained from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105, and a counter for the lottery is obtained from the various counter area 106e of the RAM 106. In the table for the CZ mode lottery, the probability of transitioning to CZ mode is set according to the type of transition trigger role (Figure 39). For example, between a strong cherry and a weak cherry, the probability of transitioning to CZ mode is set higher for a strong cherry than for a weak cherry.

Step S813 is performed when the display mode is CZ mode, but in this case too, step S813 executes the CZ mode lottery process, and the lottery table is the same for normal mode and CZ mode. Note that, as in steps S801-803, the lottery table may be different depending on whether or not the display mode is CZ mode.

In step S814, based on the processing result of step S813, it is determined whether or not CZ mode has been selected. If it is determined that CZ mode has been selected, in step S815 it is determined whether or not the current display mode is CZ mode. If it is normal mode and not CZ mode, in step S816 a process is executed to set a CZ mode selection flag in the various flags storage area 106d of RAM 106.

After processing step S816, the premonition mode setting process is performed in steps S817 to S820, similar to steps S809 to S812. That is, the premonition game number table is obtained in step S817, the premonition game number is selected in step S818, the premonition game number is set in step S819, the premonition command is set in step S820, and then the first specific role processing is terminated.

In the premonition game number table obtained in step S817, as shown in FIG. 40, if CZ mode alone is won, 1 to 5 games are selected with a 90% probability, and 6 to 10 games are selected with a 10% probability. On the other hand, if CZ mode and a bonus are won simultaneously, 1 to 5 games are selected with a 20% probability, 6 to 10 games with a 30% probability, and 11 to 20 games with a 50% probability. In other words, even when CZ mode is won, if a bonus is also won simultaneously, a longer premonition game number is more likely to be selected than if a bonus is not won simultaneously; and if a bonus is not won simultaneously, the CZ mode win will be announced a relatively short number of games after the CZ mode winning game.

In addition to the number of premonition games, regardless of whether a bonus is won at the same time, a longer number of premonition games is more likely to be selected in AT mode than in CZ mode, and a longer number of premonition games is more likely to be selected in SAT mode than in AT mode. If a display mode that is advantageous to the player is won, a longer number of premonition games is more likely to be selected. Furthermore, if a bonus is not won at the same time, a number of premonition games of 10 games or less is selected, and if the premonition mode continues for 11 games or more, a simultaneous win of a bonus and a win is confirmed. Even if a bonus is won at the same time, if CZ mode and a bonus are won at the same time, a number of premonition games of 20 games or less is selected, while if AT mode or SAT mode and a bonus are won at the same time, a number of premonition games of 21 games or more is also selected. If the premonition mode continues for 21 games or more, a bonus + AT mode or SAT mode is confirmed. In this way, the fun of predicting the win in relation to the number of premonition games is added.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, if a transition trigger role is won but the AT mode, CZ mode, etc. is not won, or if a non-trigger role is won, the mode may transition to pseudo premonition mode. This process will be described later, but the number of games set as pseudo premonition mode is between 1 and 20 games. Therefore, if the winning suggestion effect occurs frequently over 21 games or more, it is confirmed that the premonition mode or pseudo premonition mode to which the mode has transitioned is premonition mode.

If it is determined in step S815 that the CZ mode has been won again during the CZ mode, processing for adding additional games to the continued CZ mode is performed in steps S821 to S825. That is, in step S821, it is determined whether the bonus win flag is set. If the bonus win flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S822, where a lottery is performed to determine the number of games to be added to the CZ mode.

Here, "addition" refers to adding (increasing) the number of continuing games (remaining number) in CZ mode or AT mode, and the number of added games corresponds to the value added (increased) to the number of continuing games. In step S822, the value added to the number of continuing games in CZ mode is determined by lottery.

Specifically, in the lottery process for the number of added games, a table for lotterying the number of CZ mode added games is obtained from the various table storage area 105a in ROM 105, and a counter for the lottery is obtained from the various counter area 106e in RAM 106. The table for lotterying the number of CZ mode added games is set so that the number of added games increases depending on the type of game result that triggers the lottery. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 41, for example, a strong cherry adds 2 to 20 CZ mode games, with the average number of added games being 15. Furthermore, a weak cherry adds 5 to 30 games, with the average number of added games being 10. While a larger number of games may be selected for a weak cherry than for a strong cherry, the average number of games (expected number of added games) is set so that a strong cherry results in a larger number of games.

In step S823, a process for adding the number of games in CZ mode is performed. In this process, a value corresponding to the number of added games drawn in step S822 is added to a counter that manages the number of continued games in CZ mode (more specifically, a CZ mode continuation counter provided in the various counter area 106e of RAM 106). Then, in step S824, a process is performed to set the added command as an output target to the display control device 81, and then this first specific role process is terminated. The added command contains information that an add-on has occurred, the number of added games, and the target for the add-on (CZ mode or AT mode). The processing on the display control device 81 that receives the added command will be explained in detail later, but based on the reception of the added command, the display control device 81 performs an added-on notification (add-on effect) to notify the information contained in the added-on command.

If the bonus win flag is set in step S821, the process proceeds to step S825. In step S825, a CZ mode addition flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of RAM 106, and then the first specific combination process is terminated. The CZ mode addition flag is a flag that allows the CPU 102 to determine that the conditions for adding the number of games in CZ mode have been met. As will be described in detail below, if the bonus ends while the CZ mode addition flag is set, the CZ mode addition is performed at the end of the bonus. In other words, the game in which the addition notification is made is set to differ depending on whether or not a bonus is won at the same time.

Returning to the explanation of the lottery result response processing (Figure 32), if a negative judgment is made in step S702 or a positive judgment is made in step S703, proceed to step S705. In step S705, it is determined whether the current game state is the second RT state or the fourth RT state. If it is the second RT state or the fourth RT state, in step S706 it is determined whether either the VB mode win flag or the VB mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of RAM 106. The VB mode win flag is a flag that is set when the VB mode transition lottery is won and is cleared when transitioning to VB mode. The BV mode flag is a flag that allows the CPU 102 to identify that the display mode is VB mode, and is a flag that is set when transitioning to VB mode and is cleared when VB mode ends. If a negative judgment is made in step S706, the second specific role processing is executed in step S707. Furthermore, if a negative judgment is made in step S705, a judgment is made in step S708 as to whether or not the bonus state is in effect. If the bonus state is not in effect, or if a positive judgment is made in step S706, a third specific combination process is executed in step S709. If the bonus state is in effect, a fourth specific combination process is executed in step S710.

<Second specific winning combination process>
The second specific winning process will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

Here, the second specific role processing is performed when the player is in the second RT state or the fourth RT state and has not yet won VB mode. The corresponding display mode in this case is AT mode. In the second specific role processing, a lottery is held to determine whether or not to transition the display mode to VB mode or an add-on specialized zone. Note that an add-on specialized zone refers to a state in which there is a high probability of the number of continued games in the AT zone being added over multiple games. In addition, in the second specific role processing, a lottery is held to advance the AT mode level, and processing is performed to add to the number of continued games in AT mode.

That is, in step S901, the AT mode level is determined. As already explained, in this embodiment, four AT mode levels are provided: ATLV.1 mode to ATLV.4 mode, and the probability of transitioning to VB mode differs for each level. Therefore, step S901 determines whether the current AT mode level is ATLV.1 mode, ATLV.4 mode, or both.

In step S902, a VB mode lottery table corresponding to the AT mode level determined in step S901 is retrieved from the various table storage area 105a of ROM 105. In the VB mode lottery table, the probability of transitioning to VB mode is set according to the type of game result that triggers the lottery. As shown in FIG. 39, for example, between Strong Cherry 1 and Weak Cherry, Strong Cherry 1 is set to have a higher probability of transitioning to VB mode than Weak Cherry. Furthermore, in the VB mode lottery tables for each level, the probability of transitioning to VB mode varies overall, and is set so that the probability of transitioning to VB mode is higher for ATLV.2 mode than for ATLV.1 mode, the probability of transitioning to VB mode is higher for ATLV.3 mode than for ATLV.2 mode, and the probability of transitioning to VB mode is higher for ATLV.4 mode than for ATLV.3 mode.

In step S903, a lottery for transition to VB mode is conducted using the table acquired in step S902 and the lottery counter acquired from the various counter area 106e of RAM 106. Then, in step S904, it is determined whether the result of the lottery in step S903 corresponds to a win in VB mode. Note that in this embodiment, if a lottery for transition to VB mode is conducted using a combination that overlaps with a bonus as a transition trigger role, the lottery for transition to VB mode is not won. In other words, efforts are made to prevent transitions to BB mode and VB mode from occurring too frequently, so that the advantage of combinations with these bonuses is not increased too much.

If a positive judgment is made in step S904, a process is performed in step S905 to set a VB mode win flag in the various flag storage area 106d of RAM 106. Then, in steps S906 to S909, a process for setting the number of premonition games is performed. That is, in step S906, a premonition game number table is obtained, in step S907, the number of premonition games is drawn, in step S908, the number of premonition games is set, and in step S909, a premonition command is set, and then the second specific role processing is terminated. However, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 40, for VB mode wins during AT mode, the number of premonition games is set to 0. Therefore, if a VB mode win occurs during AT mode, the win will be announced in the next game.

If it is determined in step S904 that the result of the VB mode lottery process is not a VB mode win, proceed to step S910. Steps S910 to S913 are processes for upgrading the AT mode level.

In step S910, an AT mode promotion lottery process is performed. In this process, a promotion lottery table is obtained from the various table storage area 105a of ROM 105, and a lottery counter is obtained from the various counter area 106e of RAM 106. Multiple promotion lottery tables are provided according to the AT mode level. Specifically, there are three tables for promotion lottery: a table for ATLV.1 mode, a table for ATLV.2 mode, and a table for ATLV.3 mode (promotion lottery is not performed when the player is in ATLV.4 mode). Each table has a different winning probability for the promotion lottery depending on the type of game result that triggers the lottery. For example, between strong and weak cherries, the winning probability for strong cherries is set higher than that for weak cherries. Furthermore, for each AT mode table, the ATLV.2 mode table has a lower promotion probability than the ATLV.1 mode table. The table for ATLV.3 mode is set to have a lower promotion probability than the table for ATLV.2 mode, and as the AT mode level increases, it becomes more difficult to advance to the next level.

In step S911, it is determined whether the result of the lottery in step S910 was a promotion win. If a promotion win was found, in step S912, AT mode promotion processing is performed. In this processing, the level flag set in the various flag storage area 106d of RAM 106 is rewritten from the level flag corresponding to the current AT mode level to the level flag one level higher. Then, in step S913, a promotion command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The promotion command includes information about the AT mode to be promoted to. Upon receiving the promotion command, the display control device 81 controls the auxiliary display unit 65, etc., to perform an AT mode effect for the promoted level. For example, a different background color effect is set depending on the AT mode level as the AT mode effect in the auxiliary display unit 65. When the display control device 81 receives the promotion command, it notifies the user that the AT mode level has been promoted and controls the display control device 81 to perform an AT mode effect with a background color corresponding to the promoted level.

If it is determined in step S911 that the player has not won the promotion lottery, or after the processing of step S913 has been executed, processing to add to the number of continuing games in AT mode is performed in steps S914 to S921.

That is, in step S914, a lottery process for adding the number of games in AT mode is performed. In this lottery process, a table for the AT mode add-on lottery is obtained from the various table storage area 105a of ROM 105, and a lottery counter is obtained from the various counter area 106e of RAM 106. As shown in FIG. 42, the table for the AT mode add-on lottery is set so that the probability of winning the add-on lottery varies depending on the type of lottery result.

In this embodiment, the push order bell and push order replay are also set to trigger the lottery for the number of games added in AT mode. The push order bell and push order replay (hereinafter collectively referred to as "push order roles") are set to a common point value PV regardless of the setting value, as shown in Figure 38, and there are no setting differences in the probability of winning. Furthermore, there are no setting differences in the probability of winning the number of games added lottery triggered by the push order role, or the number of added games when won. In other words, there are no setting differences in the add-on performance triggered by the push order role. These push order roles, including the transition trigger role, are also referred to as specific roles in the following explanation as roles that trigger a lottery for the instruction function.

As shown in Figure 42, among the specific roles, the push order role has a lower probability of winning the lottery to add the number of games in AT mode compared to the transition trigger role. Therefore, if a transition trigger role appears as the lottery result for each game, there is a higher chance of adding the number of games in AT mode. As a result, players are likely to play the game with this in mind, hoping to win the transition trigger role. On the other hand, the push order role has a higher probability of winning in each game compared to the transition trigger role, making it a game result that is relatively easy to achieve. By configuring roles in this way, the push order role is less prominent as an add-on role, increasing the surprise when an add-on occurs. Furthermore, the opportunities for add-ons based on these push order roles are realistically low during AT mode (more specifically, the occurrence rate is such that they will occur once if the initial number of games, 50, is played 2-3 times). This makes it possible to optimally achieve unexpected add-ons, such as those triggered by the push order role described above.

If it is determined that the bonus lottery has been won, step S916 determines whether the bonus win flag is set. If the bonus win flag is not set, proceed to step S917, where a lottery process for the number of bonus games in AT mode is performed. In this lottery process for the number of bonus games, a table for determining the number of bonus games in AT mode is obtained from the various table storage area 105a in ROM 105, and a lottery counter is obtained from the various counter area 106e in RAM 106. The table for determining the number of bonus games in AT mode is set so that the number of bonus games varies depending on the type of specific combination, as shown in FIG. 41. For example, a strong cherry adds 20 to 200 games in AT mode, with the average number of bonus games being 30. A weak cherry adds 5 to 300 games, with the average number of bonus games being 20. Although a weak cherry may select a larger number of games than a strong cherry, the table is set so that the average number of games is higher for a strong cherry.

In step S918, processing is performed to add to the number of games played in AT mode. In this processing, a value corresponding to the number of additional games drawn in step S917 is added to a counter that manages the number of games continued in AT mode (more specifically, an AT mode continuation counter provided in the various counter area 106e of RAM 106). In the following step S919, processing is performed to notify the player that they have won the additional lottery and the number of games played.

<Additional notification processing>
Here, in this slot machine 10, a plurality of modes of notification of addition when an addition occurs to the number of continuing games in the AT mode are set. More specifically, as modes of notification of addition, there are a plurality of modes in which the game in which the addition is made is different, and there are set a case in which the addition is made in the game in which the addition occurred or in a series of games triggered by the game in which the addition occurred (also referred to as "immediate addition notification" in the following explanation), and a case in which the addition is made in a game after the game in which the addition occurred and the notification game is determined ex post (also referred to as "later addition notification" in the following explanation).

In the context of instant bonus notifications, a series of games triggered by a game in which bonuses were added refers to, for example, cases in which a premonition mode or a continuous effect occurs as a result of the game in which bonuses were added. A series of games refers to games that can continue over multiple games from the game in which bonuses were added. This series of games also includes cases in which continuous effects do not occur. For example, in cases in which a corresponding effect does not occur in the game in which bonuses were added, and a bonus notification occurs in the next game or multiple games later, the game in which bonuses were added and the games up until the bonus notification occurred are considered to be a series of games, and such bonus notification situations are also considered to be instant bonus notifications.

On the other hand, in the case of later bonus notifications, the notification game, which is a game that comes after the game in which the bonus occurred and is determined ex post, is different from the series of games in the above-mentioned immediate bonus notifications in that the notification timing is determined ex post as the AT mode progresses, such as a game near the end of the AT mode, rather than being determined in the game in which the bonus occurred. In other words, the notification game can be said to be a game that is set without being triggered by the game in which the bonus occurred.

With reference to Figure 43, we will now provide an overview of the display content of the auxiliary display unit 65 for the immediate loading notification and later loading notification.

As described above, the immediate add-on notification notifies a portion of the number of remaining games in AT mode, etc. (number of remaining games in the advantageous zone, ZG), while the later add-on notification notifies the number of remaining games in AT mode, etc. later. If the number of games notified first is the display remaining number counter HG and the number of games notified later is the later add-on counter BG, the number of remaining games in AT mode, etc. (number of remaining games in the advantageous zone, ZG) will be equal to the sum of the display remaining number counter HG and the later add-on counter BG. The display remaining number counter HG is decremented by one each time a game is played, and the later add-on counter BG is not decremented even if a game is played unless a later add-on notification occurs.

As shown in Figure 43, in this embodiment, when the number of remaining games displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 (remaining game number display ZGP) reaches a predetermined number (1) while the AT mode is being played, i.e., when the display remaining number counter HG reaches a predetermined number (1), a later-add notification is generated. The later-add notification notifies the player that the number of games corresponding to the later-add counter BG (150 in the figure) has been added. In this case, the later-add counter BG is decremented by the notification amount (returning to 0 in the figure), and the display remaining number counter HG is updated by adding the amount notified by the later-add notification, and the remaining game number display ZGP in the auxiliary display unit 65 also becomes a value corresponding to the display remaining number counter HG (150 in the figure after one game has been played).

In this way, when an additional win is won, if the later-addition notification is selected, a difference may occur between the display remaining number counter HG and the actual number of remaining games in AT mode, etc. (number of remaining games in the advantageous zone ZG). On the other hand, if the immediate-addition notification is selected, no difference occurs between the display remaining number counter HG and the actual number of remaining games in AT mode, etc. (number of remaining games in the advantageous zone ZG). In this slot machine 10, the later-addition counter BG is referenced when an additional win is won, and whether the later-addition notification or the immediate-addition notification is selected depends on the current value of the later-addition counter BG.

The add-on notification process in step S919 above sets the game for which the add-on notification will be made, and if an add-on notification is to be made for that game, sets the timing for executing the add-on notification. That is, as shown in FIG. 35, first, in step S1001, a process is performed to determine the value of the add-on counter BG in the various counter area 106e. In the following step S1002, a notification game lottery process is executed. The notification game lottery process is a lottery process to determine whether the current add-on notification will be a add-on notification or an immediate add-on notification. In the notification game lottery process, a add-on lottery table is obtained from the various table storage area 105a, and a lottery is performed to determine whether to make a add-on notification or an immediate add-on notification depending on the value of the add-on counter BG determined in step S1001.

As shown in Figure 44, the add-on lottery table is set up so that the probability of the add-on notification being selected varies depending on the value of the add-on counter BG and the type of specific role that triggered the add-on win. For example, when a strong cherry triggers an add-on, if the add-on counter BG is less than 30, there is a 20% chance that the add-on notification will be selected (80% chance that the immediate add-on notification will be selected), whereas if the add-on counter BG is between 30 and 100, there is a 10% chance that the add-on notification will be selected, and if the add-on counter BG is 100 or more, there is a 5% chance that the add-on notification will be selected. In other words, the higher the value of the add-on counter BG, the lower the selection rate of the add-on notification.

Furthermore, the types of specific roles that trigger additional wins are set so that the rate of selection of additional wins when the value of the additional win counter BG is small is higher for so-called normal roles (high probability trigger results, high probability results) that have a relatively high probability of winning, such as various push order replays and various push order bells, than for so-called rare roles (low probability trigger results, low probability results) that have a relatively low probability of winning, such as strong cherries, weak cherries, strong watermelons, and weak watermelons. More specifically, in the notification game lottery process triggered by various push order replays and various push order bells, when the additional win counter BG is less than 30, the additional win notification will be selected with a 100% probability.

As mentioned above, the add-on counter BG is decremented by the amount indicated by the add-on notification after the display remaining number counter HG reaches a predetermined number. Therefore, generally, as AT mode play progresses, the value of the add-on counter BG tends to increase; conversely, in the early stages of AT mode play, the value of the add-on counter BG is likely to be 0 or a small value.

In other words, if an additional win occurs in the early stages of play in AT mode, there is a high probability that the later win notification will be selected. In particular, if an additional win occurs as a result of a normal role that is not a rare role, such as a push order replay or push order bell, the later win notification will always be selected in the early stages of AT mode. As a result, after the AT mode starts, the later win counter BG tends to fill up relatively quickly.

After executing the notification game lottery process in step S1002, it is determined in step S1003 whether or not a later-additional win has been made. If a later-additional win has not been made and immediate-additional win notification has been selected, in step S1004, a process is performed to add the current additional-additional winning game to the display remaining number counter HG provided in the various counter area 106e. Then, in step S1005, a notification timing setting process is executed to set the timing at which the additional-additional win notification will be made in the current game. The notification timing setting process is a process for setting the timing at which the additional-additional win notification will be made in the current game.

In a single game, the timing of the additional bonus notification is set to vary depending on the number of additional bonus games. Specifically, as shown in the execution timing table in Figure 45, the execution timing of the additional bonus notification in the current game is set to be when the first reel is stopped, when the second reel is stopped, and when the third reel is stopped, assuming that the stop operation order for each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is the first reel, the second reel, and the third reel. Furthermore, the timing of the stop ON operation, which is when the stop switch 42-44 is pressed, and the stop OFF operation, which is when the pressing operation is terminated, are set.

Here, we will provide additional information about the operation of the stop switches 42-44. The stop switches 42-44 can be moved from an initial position, located at the frontmost position, to an operating position, located at the backmost position. When placed in the initial position, the detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a-44a are in a LOW state. When the stop switches are moved from the initial position to the operating position, the detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a-44a switch from a LOW signal to a HIGH signal. The main control device 101 then determines that a stop ON operation has been performed, which means that a stop switch 42-44 has been pressed, based on the detection signal switching from a LOW signal to a HIGH signal.

The stop switches 42-44 are also biased toward their initial positions by springs or other means. Therefore, when you release your hand from the stop switches 42-44 and no longer apply the operating force (pressing force) that pushed them toward their operating positions, the biasing force of the springs or other means causes the stop switches 42-44 to return to their initial positions. In this case, the detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a-44a switch from HI to LOW. When the detection signals switch from HI to LOW, the main control device 101 determines that the stop OFF operation has been performed, which means that the pressing of the stop switches 42-44 has ended.

The bonus notification is set to occur when each stop switch 42-44 is operated to either stop ON or stop OFF. In other words, in games where bonus notifications occur, the bonus effect can occur not only when a stop switch 42-44 is pressed, but also when the pressing operation ends.

In the timing table for executing the bonus notification, when a relatively small number of bonus games are added, for example 5 to 10 games, the timing when the stop ON operation for the first reel is performed is selected 5% of the time, the stop OFF operation for the first reel is selected 10%, the stop ON operation for the second reel is selected 15%, the stop OFF operation for the second reel is selected 20%, the stop ON operation for the third reel is selected 20%, and the stop OFF operation for the third reel (when all reels are stopped) is selected 30% of the time. In this case, the stop OFF operation for each reel is more likely to be selected than the stop ON operation, and the operation on the back is more likely to be selected.

On the other hand, when the number of added games is relatively large, for example, 100 or more games, the timing when the stop ON operation of the first reel is performed is selected 5% of the time, the stop OFF operation of the first reel is selected 10%, the stop ON operation of the second reel is selected 5%, the stop OFF operation of the second reel is selected 30%, the stop ON operation of the third reel is selected 5%, and the stop OFF operation of the third reel (when all reels are stopped) is selected 45% of the time. In this case, too, the stop OFF operation of each reel is more likely to be selected than the stop ON operation, and the operation on the latter side is relatively more likely to be selected.

In other words, in this embodiment, the system is set up so that an additional bonus notification occurs more easily when the reels are turned off than when they are turned on. Furthermore, when comparing the first to third reels, the system is set up so that the third reel's stop operation (ON operation, OFF operation) is most likely to be selected, the second reel's stop operation is next most likely to be selected, and the first reel's stop operation is least likely to be selected.

In relation to the number of added games, the greater the number of added games, the easier it is to select the timing for the third reel stop OFF operation. In other words, if a player knows in advance that an added game notification will occur, and the added game notification does not occur by the time the third reel stop ON operation is performed, the player is likely to perform the third reel stop OFF operation, with high hopes that a large number of games will be added.

In step S1005, the execution timing of the add-on notification for the current game is set based on the execution timing table for the add-on notification. After that, this add-on notification process is terminated. In this case, information that the current add-on will be announced in the current game as an immediate add-on notification, and information regarding the execution timing of the add-on notification for the current game, are set in the add-on command in the add-on command set process (step S920) executed following this add-on notification process. The display control device 81, which receives the add-on command containing this information, sets the add-on notification presentation based on this information. This process will be explained later.

If it is determined in step S1003 that the player has won the bonus lottery, the process proceeds to step S1006. In step S1006, the process adds the current number of bonus games to the bonus counter BG provided in the various counter area 106e. Then, in step S1007, the process sets the bonus flag in the various flag storage area 106d, and then the bonus notification process ends.

The later addition flag is a flag that allows the CPU 102 of the main control device 101 to recognize that a later addition notification should be made when the value of the later addition counter BG is greater than 0 and the display remaining number counter HG reaches a predetermined value. In this case, in the setting process of the add-on command that is executed following this add-on notification process, information that no add-on notification will be made in the current game is set in the add-on command. When the display control device 81 receives an add-on command containing this information, it controls so that no add-on notification will be made in the current game.

Returning to the explanation of the second specific role processing (Figure 34), after the additional role notification processing is executed in step S919, the additional role command including the processing result of the additional role notification processing is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S920, and then the second specific role processing is terminated.

If the bonus win flag is set in step S916, the process proceeds to step S921. In step S921, an AT mode addition flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of RAM 106, and then the second specific combination process is terminated. The AT mode addition flag is a flag that allows the CPU 102 to determine that the conditions for adding the number of games in AT mode have been met. As will be described in detail below, if the bonus ends while the AT mode addition flag is set, an AT mode addition is performed at the end of the bonus. In other words, similar to the notification of the number of games added in CZ mode, the game for which the addition notification is performed is set to differ depending on whether or not a bonus is simultaneously won.

If step S915 determines that the additional lottery has not been won, the process proceeds to step S922. In step S922, a lottery for transition to the specialized zone is executed. That is, if a specific combination is won during AT mode but the lottery for transition to VB mode or the lottery for additional game counts in AT mode is not won, a lottery for transition to the specialized zone is executed. In the specialized zone lottery process, a table for the specialized zone transition lottery is obtained from the various table storage area 105a of ROM 105, and a lottery is conducted using a lottery counter or the like to determine whether or not to transition the display mode to the specialized zone. As shown in FIG. 39, the table for the specialized zone transition lottery is configured so that the probability of winning the transition lottery differs depending on the type of transition trigger combination among the specific combinations. As already explained, transition trigger combinations that overlap with a bonus are not eligible to win the lottery for transition to VB mode. However, as shown in FIG. 41, combinations that overlap with the bonus are guaranteed to win the lottery for additional game counts in AT mode (100% probability of winning). Therefore, the specialized zone transition lottery is not triggered by overlapping roles with these bonuses; the specialized zone transition lottery is set up so that it can be won when a strong cherry or weak cherry, which does not overlap with a bonus, is won, and the VB mode transition lottery and the game count addition lottery are not won. For example, the specialized zone transition lottery based on a strong cherry has a 5% chance of being won, and the specialized zone transition lottery based on a weak cherry has a 0.5% chance of being won. On the other hand, the specialized zone transition lottery based on a strong watermelon has a 15% chance of being won, and the specialized zone transition lottery based on a weak watermelon has a 5% chance of being won.

In step S923, based on the processing result of step S922, it is determined whether or not the lottery for transition to the specialized zone has been won. If the lottery has been won, in step S924 a process is performed to set a specialized zone win flag in the various flag storage area 106d. Then, in step S925 a process is performed to obtain the premonition game number table, in step S926 a process is performed to draw the premonition game number, in step S927 a process is performed to set the premonition game number, and in step S928 a process is performed to set the premonition command, after which the second specific role processing is terminated. The processing of steps S925 to S928 is similar to the processing of steps S906 to S909, for example, and is processing for setting the premonition mode.

If a negative judgment is made in step S923 and the player has not won any of the lottery for transitioning to VB mode, the lottery for adding more games to the AT mode, or the lottery for transitioning to the specialized zone, a pseudo-addition notification process is performed in step S929, and then the second specific role processing is terminated. The pseudo-addition notification process is a process for maintaining a sense of anticipation by generating an effect similar to that which occurs when a player wins, even if the player has not won any of these lotteries.

<Third specific winning combination processing>
Next, the third specific winning process executed in step S709 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

The third special role processing is performed when the player is in the third RT state, or in the second or fourth RT state and has won VB mode. In this case, the corresponding display mode is AT mode or VB mode. The third special role processing involves processing to add to the number of games played in AT mode and a lottery to determine whether or not to transition to a specialized zone.

That is, in step S1101, a lottery process for adding the number of games in AT mode is performed. This process is similar to the process in step S914. Note that the winning probability of the additional lottery may be different between the lottery process in step S914 and the lottery process in step S1101.

In step S1102, it is determined whether the result of the lottery in step S1101 was a win for the bonus. If it is determined that the bonus lottery was won, in step S1103 it is determined whether the bonus win flag is set. If the bonus win flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S1104, where a lottery process for the number of bonus games in AT mode is performed. Then, in step S1105, the number of games in AT mode is added, in step S1106, the bonus notification process is performed, and in step S1107, the bonus command is set as an output target to the display control device 81, and then the third specific role process is terminated. The processes in steps S1103 to S1107 are the same as the processes in steps S916 to S920. Note that the number of bonus games may be different in the lottery process in step S916 and the lottery process in step S1104.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1102, proceed to step S1109. In step S1109, a lottery for transition to the specialized zone is executed. That is, if a specific combination is won during VB mode but the AT mode game number addition lottery is not won, a lottery for transition to the specialized zone is also executed. The specialized zone lottery process is the same as the process in step S922 above, and is performed based on a table for the specialized zone transition lottery (Figure 39). The processes in steps S1110 to S1116 are the same as the processes in steps S923 to S929 above. Furthermore, if it is determined in step S1103 that the bonus win flag is set, the AT mode addition flag is set in step S1107, and then the third specific combination process is terminated. The AT mode addition flag is as described above.

Returning to the explanation of the lottery result response process (Figure 31), the fourth specific role process in step S710 will be briefly explained. As already explained, the fourth specific role process is a process performed during the bonus state. The game results during the bonus state are set to the 1st role in BB, the 2nd role in BB, and the 3rd role in BB. The 1st role in BB is generally won, and occasionally the 2nd role in BB or the 3rd role in BB may be won (Figure 29). When the 1st role in BB is won, nine medals are paid out. On the other hand, when the 2nd role in BB or the 3rd role in BB is won, a lottery for transitioning to AT mode, etc., or a lottery for adding the number of games to AT mode, etc., is held. If the transition lottery is won, the details are announced after the bonus state ends. If the additional lottery is won, the additional notification process is executed and an additional notification is generated, just as in the case of winning during the AT mode, etc., described above.

If it is determined in step S701 that the carryover state is in progress, or after any of the processes in steps S704, S707, S709, and S710 has been executed, it is determined in step S711 whether the result of this lottery process was a win in the push order role of a push order replay or push order bell. If a win in the push order role was achieved, push order role processing is executed in step S712. Such push order role processing will be explained in detail later.

If a negative judgment is made in step S711, or after the processing of step S712 has been executed, the process proceeds to step S713. In step S713, it is determined whether a specialized zone flag corresponding to the added specialized zone has been set in the various flag storage area 106d of RAM 106. As described above, the specialized zone flag is a flag that is set when a transition to the specialized zone occurs (when the seventh re-play win is achieved) after the specialized zone win flag has been set based on winning the transition lottery to SAT mode or the transition lottery to the specialized zone. If the specialized zone flag is set in step S713, specialized zone processing is executed in step S714. If a negative judgment is made in step S713, or after the processing of step S714 has been executed, this lottery result response processing is terminated.

<Specialized zone treatment>
The specialized zone process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the specialized zone processing, first, in step S1201, the result of the current lottery processing is determined. In the following step S1202, a lottery processing for the number of additional games in AT mode is performed. In the following step S1203, processing for adding the number of games in AT mode is performed. Then, in step S1204, processing for notifying the addition is executed, and in step S1205, an addition command is set, and then the specialized zone processing ends. The processing of steps S1202 to S1205 is the same as the processing of steps S917 to S920. However, the number of games selected in the lottery processing for the number of additional games in step S1202 is greater than the number of games selected in the lottery processing for the number of additional games in step S917 (Figure 41). Furthermore, in the specialized zone, the number of games in AT mode is always added regardless of the game result (Figure 42).

As described above, in the lottery result response processing, provided that the game is not in a carryover state, a lottery for transitioning to CZ mode, AT mode, or VB mode, and processing for increasing the number of games continued in CZ mode or AT mode, etc., are performed. In other words, even if a specific role is won, during a carryover state, the lottery for transitioning to CZ mode, AT mode, or VB mode, and processing for increasing the number of games continued in CZ mode or AT mode, etc., are not performed, and their implementation is restricted. If the lottery for transitioning to CZ mode, AT mode, or VB mode is won, a premonition game will be played, and then a notification that the transition lottery has been won will be made. Therefore, the processing for transitioning the game state based on the results of the display mode transition lottery will be explained below.

<Process for transitioning the gaming state based on the result of the lottery for transitioning the display mode>
(2) In the process for transitioning the gaming state based on the result of the lottery for transitioning the display mode, a process for notifying the player that the lottery for transitioning the display mode has been won and a process for notifying the player that the gaming state has been transitioned are performed. Therefore, first, the process for notifying the player that the lottery for transitioning the display mode has been won will be described.

<Mode transition notification processing>
The notification of winning the transition lottery is performed in the mode transition notification process (step S206) in the normal process (FIG. 15). The mode transition notification process is performed when a predetermined bet operation is performed (when it is determined that the number of bets in step S205 is the specified number). The mode transition notification process will be described below with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

In step S1301, it is determined whether the number of premonition games is 0. The number of premonition games is counted in the winning result response processing described below, and the number of premonition games is decremented by 1 each time a game is played. If the number of premonition games is not 0, the mode transition notification processing is terminated.

If the number of premonition games is 0, step S1302 determines whether the bonus win flag is set. That is, it determines whether the current premonition mode was a premonition mode triggered by a bonus win. If the bonus win flag is set, step S1303 sets a bonus win notification command to be output to the display control device 81, and then ends the mode transition notification process. Upon receiving the bonus win notification command, the display control device 81 notifies the player that a bonus has been won, for example, by displaying "Bonus Confirmed!!" on the auxiliary display unit 65. Note that the type of bonus that has been won (either the first BB or the second BB) may also be notified.

Incidentally, in this embodiment, if a bonus and an AT mode, CZ mode, etc. are simultaneously won, the winning notification of these AT modes, etc. will be made at the end of the bonus notified in step S1303. The processing related to such winning notifications will be explained in detail later, but if a winning notification of AT mode, etc. is made in conjunction with a bonus winning notification, it is recommended to configure the winning notification command of AT mode, etc. to be set in conjunction with the bonus winning notification command set in step S1303.

If a negative determination is made in step S1302, the process proceeds to step S1304. In step S1304, it is determined whether the CZ mode win flag is set. That is, it is determined whether the current premonition mode was a premonition mode triggered by a CZ mode win. If the CZ mode win flag is set, the CZ mode win flag is cleared in step S1305. Then, in step S1306, a CZ mode flag is set in the various flags storage area 106d of RAM 106. The CZ mode flag is a flag that allows the CPU 102 to determine that the current display mode is CZ mode. In step S1307, a CZ mode start command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. Upon receiving the CZ mode start command, the display control device 81 notifies the user that CZ mode is about to start via the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like. This notification will be described in detail later.

Then, in step S1308, counting the number of CZ mode continuations begins. Specifically, the initial value (e.g., 10) of the number of CZ mode continuation games is set in the CZ mode continuation counter provided in the various counter area 106e of RAM 106. After processing step S1308, the mode transition notification process ends.

If it is determined in step S1304 that the CZ mode winning flag is not set, it is determined in step S1309 whether the AT mode winning flag is set. That is, it is determined whether the current premonition mode was a premonition mode triggered by an AT mode winning. If the AT mode winning flag is set, the AT mode winning flag is cleared in step S1310. Then, in step S1311, an AT notification flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of RAM 106. The AT notification flag is a flag for transitioning the gaming state to the second RT state in response to a win in the AT mode transition lottery. Then, in step S1312, an AT mode winning notification command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. Upon receiving the AT mode winning notification command, the display control device 81 notifies the player that the AT mode transition lottery has been won via the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. Such notification will be described in detail later. After executing step S1312, the mode transition notification process ends.

Incidentally, in this embodiment, the winning notification mode in SAT mode is different from the winning notification mode in AT mode. Therefore, in step S1312, it is preferable to set the AT mode winning notification command so that it includes information on whether or not the mode is SAT mode. The winning notification mode in AT mode and the winning notification mode in SAT mode should be different enough to be distinguishable by the player, and more preferably, the winning notification mode in SAT mode, which has a higher advantage, should be more flashy than the winning notification mode in AT mode.

It is also possible to configure the winning notification format for AT mode and SAT mode to be the same. By doing so, it is possible to make it appear as if the winning content has been promoted from AT mode to SAT mode between the AT mode winning notification game and the start notification game, eliminating the delay caused by the AT mode winning notification game and the start notification game being different.

If it is determined in step S1309 that the AT mode winning flag is not set, it is determined in step S1313 whether the VB mode winning flag is set. That is, it is determined whether the current premonition mode was a premonition mode triggered by a VB mode winning. If the VB mode winning flag is set, the VB mode winning flag is cleared in step S1314. Then, in step S1315, a VB notification flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of RAM 106. The VB notification flag is a flag for transitioning the gaming state to the third RT state upon winning the VB mode transition lottery. Then, in step S1316, a VB mode winning notification command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. Upon receiving the VB mode winning notification command, the display control device 81 notifies the player that the VB mode transition lottery has been won via the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. Such notification will be described in detail later. After executing step S1316, the mode transition notification process ends.

If it is determined in step S1313 that the VB mode win flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S1317. In step S1317, it is determined whether the specialized zone win flag is set. If it is not set, the mode transition notification process is terminated. If it is set, the specialized zone win flag is cleared in step S1318. Then, in step S1319, a specialized zone notification flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. The specialized zone notification flag is a flag for executing a push order notification corresponding to the 7th replay win. After executing the process of step S1319, in step S1320, a specialized zone win notification command is set as an output target to the display control device 81, and then the mode transition notification process is terminated. Upon receiving the specialized zone win notification command, the display control device 81 controls the auxiliary display unit 65 and speaker 64 to notify the player that the specialized zone has been won. If a negative determination is made in step S1317, the mode transition notification process ends.

That is, among the CZ mode, AT mode, VB mode, and specialized zone, which transition through the premonition mode, the CZ mode is initiated based on a bet operation made when the premonition game count in the premonition mode reaches zero. On the other hand, for the AT mode, VB mode, and specialized zone, only a notification of winning the AT mode transition lottery or VB mode transition lottery is made based on a bet operation made when the premonition game count in the premonition mode reaches zero. The AT mode, VB mode, and specialized zone do not initiate even if the premonition game count reaches zero. This is due to the difference between the two modes: while the CZ mode as a display mode does not involve a transition in game state, the AT mode and VB mode involve a transition in game state. Specifically, the AT mode is initiated by transitioning to the second RT state, and the VB mode is initiated by transitioning to the third RT state. Note that while the specialized zone may not involve a transition in game state (from the third RT state to the third RT state), in this embodiment, the seventh replay winning game in the third RT state is the starting game, resulting in the above processing configuration.

As already explained, a transition to the second RT state occurs when the first promotion replays 1-4 are won and the third replay win is achieved, and a transition to the third RT state occurs when the second promotion replays 1 and 2 are won and the fourth and fifth replay wins are achieved. A win on the first promotion replays 1-4 and the third replay win, or a win on the second promotion replays 1 and 2 and the fourth and fifth replay wins, occurs when the operation sequence of the stop switches 42-44 at the time of winning these promotion replays corresponds to the third replay win, etc. Therefore, if a player wins the lottery for transitioning to AT mode or VB mode, the operation sequence of the stop switches 42-44 is notified in the game that subsequently wins the winning combination that will transition the game state. This allows the game state to transition. Furthermore, from the time a notification is issued that the player has won the lottery to transition to AT mode or VB mode, until the AT mode or VB mode begins (until the game state transitions), a notification indicating the preparation state (for example, a notification that "preparing") will be issued.

<Explanation about transitioning display modes>
The notification process for transitioning the game state is performed in the push order role process (step S712) in the lottery result corresponding process (FIG. 32). Prior to explaining the push order role process, an overview of the case where the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified will be explained with reference to FIG.

<Outline of the push order announcement>
Notification of the operation order when a push order role is won (push order notification, push order notification effect, sequence notification, mode notification) is mainly performed by the auxiliary display unit 65 and the instruction monitor 68. Here, the push order notification effect on the auxiliary display unit 65 will be explained using the example of a case where a push order role is won when the operation order to be notified this time is center → right → left. The push order notification on the instruction monitor 68 will be explained in detail later.

As shown in Figure 47(a), in the auxiliary display unit 65, of the three parallel button displays corresponding to the stop switches 42-44, the button display corresponding to the stop switch that should be operated first (in the figure, the middle button display corresponding to the middle stop switch 43) is marked with the number 1 and displayed larger than the other button displays. Each button display is also displayed in a color corresponding to the winning combination (yellow for a bell, blue for a replay, etc.). This allows the player to recognize the winning combination for the current game and that the middle stop switch 43 is the stop switch that should be operated first. Furthermore, in the auxiliary display unit 65, the right button display is displayed with the number 2 and the left button display is displayed with the number 3, indicating that the next stop switch that should be operated is the right stop switch 44 and the last stop switch that should be operated is the left stop switch 42.

When a player operates the middle stop switch 43, as shown in Figure 47 (b), the center button display corresponding to the middle stop switch 43 disappears on the auxiliary display unit 65, and the right button display corresponding to the right stop switch 44 is displayed large. This allows the player to confirm that the operation of the middle stop switch 43 has been completed, and that the next stop switch to be operated is the right stop switch 44.

When the player operates the right stop switch 44, as shown in Figure 47 (c), the right button display corresponding to the right stop switch 44 disappears on the auxiliary display unit 65, and the left button display corresponding to the left stop switch 42 is displayed larger. This allows the player to confirm that the operation of the right stop switch 44 has been completed, and that the next stop switch to be operated is the left stop switch 42.

Explaining the timing of the push order notification, the notification is set to be executed during the inactive period of the stop switches 42-44, from when the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R begins, through the acceleration period, and up to the constant speed rotation. By configuring the notification to be executed before the operation of the stop switches 42-44 becomes effective, it is possible to recognize the operation order of the stop switches 42-44 before operating them as desired, allowing the game to proceed at a good tempo.

<Push order processing>
Next, the push order role processing executed in step S712 in the lottery result response processing (Figure 32) will be explained with reference to the flowchart of Figure 48.

In step S1401, it is determined whether the result of this lottery is one of the first promotion replays 1 to 4. A positive determination is made in step S1401 if the first replay or the third replay wins, depending on the operation order of this game. In this case, the process proceeds to step S1402, where it is determined whether the AT notification flag has been set in the various flag storage area 106d of RAM 106. As already explained, the AT notification flag is set when the number of premonition games in the premonition mode becomes 0 after winning the lottery to transition to the AT mode in the mode transition notification process (Figure 46).

If the AT notification flag is set, in step S1403, processing for the push order notification for the third replay is executed. Specifically, of the first and third replays, the operation sequence corresponding to the third replay winning is notified (see Figure 23 (a)). Then, in step S1404, processing is performed to set the push order notification command as an output target to the display control device 81, which is the sub-side control device, and then this push order role processing is terminated. The push order notification command includes information on the current display mode and information on the lottery result. The processing on the display control device 81 side based on receiving the push order notification command will be explained in detail later.

Note that the notification of the operation sequence corresponding to the third replay win in step S1403 basically occurs after the lottery for transitioning to AT mode is won, the premonition mode is passed, and the AT mode win notification is made, but before the transition to AT mode. In other words, the lottery table for the second RT state and the third RT state does not allow the first promotion replays 1 to 4 to be won, and the first promotion replays 1 to 4 can only be won in the first RT state. However, even in AT mode, there are cases where the game state falls from the second RT state to the first RT state due to an incorrect operation, etc., and even in such cases, it is possible to quickly return to the second RT state by winning the first promotion replays 1 to 4.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1401, a judgment is made in step S1405 as to whether the current lottery result is one of Fall Replays 1 to 3. A positive judgment is made in step S1405 when the first replay or second replay wins based on the operation sequence of the current game. In this case, a judgment is made in step S1406 as to whether the AT notification flag is set. If the AT notification flag is set, processing for notifying the push order for the first replay is executed in step S1407. Specifically, the operation sequence corresponding to the first replay winning, of the first replay and second replay, is notified (see Figure 23 (b)). Thereafter, in step S1408, processing is performed to set the push order notification command, and then this push order processing is terminated.

In this way, if you win the lottery to transition to AT mode and you win the first promotion replays 1 to 4, the operation sequence corresponding to the third replay win will be announced, making it possible to transition the game state to the second RT state. On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in step S1402, the push order notification process will be terminated without any processing. Therefore, for example, even if you win the first promotion replays 1 to 4 without winning the AT mode in the first RT state, there are cases where the first replay win will be realized or the third replay win will be realized.

Furthermore, if a Fall Replay 1 to 3 is won while the AT notification flag is set, the operation sequence corresponding to the first replay win is notified, making it possible to prevent the game state from transitioning to the first RT state. On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in step S1406, the push order notification process is terminated without processing. Therefore, for example, when the AT mode ends, the AT notification flag is cleared, and the display mode transitions to normal mode, a second replay win may be achieved by winning a Fall Replay 1 to 3, and the RT state will transition from the second RT state or the third RT state to the first RT state.

Also, for example, in the first RT state, if you win the first promotion replays 1-4 without winning the AT mode, and the operation sequence happens to correspond to the third replay win and the third replay win is realized (even if you transition to the second RT state), the second replay win may be realized by winning the fall replays 1-3. Therefore, as mentioned above, even if you happen to transition to the second RT state without winning the AT mode, you will then quickly transition to the first RT state.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1405, then in step S1409 it is determined whether the result of this lottery is either the second promotion replay 1 or 2. A positive judgment in step S1409 occurs when the first replay, fourth replay, or fifth replay wins, depending on the operation order of this game. In this case, in step S1410 it is determined whether the above-mentioned AT notification flag is set. If the AT notification flag is set, then in step S1411 it is determined whether a VB notification flag or a specialized zone notification flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of RAM 106. As already explained, the VB notification flag is a flag that is set in the mode transition notification process (Figure 46) when the number of premonition games in the premonition mode becomes 0 after winning the lottery to transition to VB mode. Additionally, the specialized zone notification flag is a flag that is set when the number of premonition games in the premonition mode becomes 0 after winning the lottery to transition to the specialized zone during the mode transition notification process (Figure 46).

If the VB notification flag or the specialized zone notification flag is set, processing is executed in step S1412 to notify the push order for the 4th replay or the 5th replay. Specifically, the operation sequence corresponding to the 4th replay winning or the 5th replay winning among the 1st replay, 4th replay, and 5th replay is notified (see Figure 23 (b)). Then, in step S1413, processing is executed to set the push order notification command, and this push order processing is terminated.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1410, the push order notification process is not performed and the push order role processing is terminated. On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in step S1411, the push order notification process for the first replay is executed in step S1407, and the push order notification command is set in step S1408, after which the push order role processing is terminated. Therefore, if the second promotion replay 1 or 2 is won without winning VB mode or the specialized zone, if the AT mode is active, the push order notification effect corresponding to the first replay win is performed, but if the AT mode is not active, the push order notification effect is not performed.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1409, then in step S1414 it is determined whether the result of this lottery is a BAR replay. A positive judgment in step S1414 means that, depending on the operation sequence of this game, any of the first replay, third replay, and sixth to eighth replays will win. In this case, in step S1415 it is determined whether the AT notification flag is set. If the AT notification flag is set, then in step S1416 it is determined whether the specialized zone notification flag is set. If the AT notification flag is set and the specialized zone notification flag is set, then in step S1417 processing is executed to notify the push order for the seventh replay. Specifically, out of the first replay, third replay, and sixth to eighth replays, the operation sequence corresponding to the seventh replay winning is notified (see Figure 23 (c)). Then, in step S1418, the push order notification command is set, and the push order processing ends.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1415, the push order notification process is not performed and the push order role processing is terminated. On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in step S1416, the push order notification process for the third replay is executed in step S1403, and the push order notification command is set in step S1404, after which the push order role processing is terminated. Therefore, if a BAR replay is won without winning VB mode or a specialized zone, if the AT mode is active, a push order notification effect corresponding to the third replay win is performed and a transition to the second RT state occurs, but if the AT mode is not active, no push order notification effect is performed.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1414, then in step S1419 it is determined whether the result of this lottery is Transition Replay 1 or Transition Replay 2. A positive judgment is made in step S1419 when, depending on the operation order of this game, any of the first replay, second replay, eleventh replay, and twelfth replay will win. In this case, in step S1420 it is determined whether the AT notification flag is set. If the AT notification flag is set, then in step S1421 it is determined whether the transition notification flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of RAM 106. The transition notification flag is a flag that is set when the conditions that allow transition to the fourth RT state are met. The process of setting the transition notification flag will be explained in detail later. If the AT notification flag is set and the transition notification flag is set, processing for notifying the push order for the 11th or 12th replay is executed in step S1422. Specifically, the operation sequence corresponding to the 11th or 12th replay winning among the 1st, 2nd, 11th, and 12th replays is notified (see FIG. 23(d)). Then, in step S1423, processing is performed to set the push order notification command, and this push order processing is terminated.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1420, the push order notification process is not performed and the push order role processing is terminated. On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in step S1421, the push order notification process for the first replay is executed in step S1407, and the push order notification command is set in step S1408, after which the push order role processing is terminated. Therefore, if transition replays 1 and 2 are won without the conditions that allow transition to the fourth RT state being met, if the AT mode is in effect, a push order notification effect corresponding to the first replay win is performed, but if the AT mode is not in effect, no push order notification effect is performed.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1419, a determination is made in step S1424 as to whether the result of this lottery is a win for the push order bell. If a win for the push order bell is made, a determination is made in step S1425 as to whether the current display mode is normal mode or CZ mode. If it is not normal mode or CZ mode, a push order notification process is executed in step S1426 to notify the operation sequence corresponding to the first small win (see Figure 19). Then, in step S1427, a process is performed to set the push order notification command, and the main push order role processing is terminated. If a negative judgment is made in step S1424 or a positive judgment is made in step S1425, the main push order role processing is terminated without performing the push order notification process.

If the configuration is such that the push order notification is executed at least a predetermined number of times (once) in CZ mode, it is preferable to determine in step S1425 whether the push order notification has been executed a predetermined number of times during the CZ mode. If the determination is negative, it is preferable to count the predetermined number of times and proceed to the push order notification processing in step S1426.

Furthermore, if the push order bell is won when the AT notification flag is set (a negative judgment is made in step S1425), and the current game state is the normal game state, it is recommended that the push order notification corresponding to the first minor win not be issued. By doing so, the transition result will stop, transitioning the game state to the first RT state; in other words, if the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are then won, transitioning to the high RT state will be possible.

<Process for Transitioning Display Mode Based on Winning Results>
<Processing for winning results>
Next, the process when a winning combination corresponding to the transition of the gaming state is won as a result of the notification for transitioning the gaming state as described above will be described (3). This process is performed in the winning result response process (step S414) in the reel control process (FIG. 18). The winning result response process will be described below with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

In step S1501, a game count management process is executed. Details will be described later, but this game count management process counts the number of premonition games in the premonition mode described above, as well as the number of continued games in CZ mode, AT mode, VB mode, and specialized zones. In the following step S1502, a post-addition notification process is executed. The post-addition notification process is a process for making the post-addition notification described in FIG. 43 above, and executes a post-addition notification (post-addition notification) corresponding to the post-addition counter BG, provided that the post-addition flag is set based on the display remaining number counter HG reaching a predetermined value (1). Then, a value corresponding to the executed post-addition notification is added to the display remaining number counter HG and subtracted from the post-addition counter BG, and the post-addition flag is cleared, provided that the post-addition counter BG is 0.

In the following step S1503, it is determined whether the current stop result is a third replay win. As described above, if a third replay win has been achieved, the RT state processing (Figure 21) performs processing to transition the game state to the second RT state. In this case, in step S1504, it is determined whether the AT notification flag is set. If the AT notification flag is not set, this occurs when a third replay win is achieved without the conditions for transitioning to AT mode being met. In this case, the winning result response processing ends without performing processing to start AT mode. If the AT notification flag is set, it is determined in step S1505 whether the current display mode is in AT mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the AT mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. As described above, the AT mode flag is a flag that allows the CPU 102 to identify that the display mode is AT mode. Incidentally, in addition to the AT mode flag, flags for specifying the display mode include a CZ mode flag, a VB mode flag, a specialized zone flag, and a BB mode flag. In this embodiment, when the display mode is a mode corresponding to a higher RT state than AT mode (VB mode, added specialized zone), the AT mode flag coexists with the corresponding flag for that mode (VB mode flag, specialized zone flag). Therefore, for example, cases in which it is determined in step S1505 that the AT mode flag is set include when in AT mode, when in VB mode, or when in a specialized zone.

If the AT mode flag is set in step S1505, the display mode is already AT mode, and the winning result processing ends. On the other hand, if the AT mode flag is not set, processing to start AT mode is performed in steps S1506 to S1509.

That is, in step S1506, the AT mode flag is set. In the following step S1507, an AT mode start command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. Upon receiving the AT mode start command, the display control device 81 notifies the user, via the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like, that the AT mode will start from the next game. This notification will be explained in detail later. Then, in step S1508, counting the number of AT mode continuations begins. Specifically, an initial value (e.g., 50) for the number of continuation games in AT mode is set in the AT mode continuation counter provided in the various counter area 106e of RAM 106.

After processing step S1508, step S1509 determines whether the specialized zone flag is set. If step S1509 determines positive, it means that the AT mode in which the current win occurred is SAT mode. In this case, step S1510 clears the specialized zone win flag, and then the process for starting the added specialized zone (steps S1519 to S1521) proceeds. The process for starting the added specialized zone will be explained later. If step S1509 determines negative, the winning result response process ends.

If it is determined in step S1503 that the third replay win has not been achieved, the process proceeds to step S1511. In step S1511, it is determined whether the fourth and fifth replay wins have been achieved as the current stop result. As described above, if the fourth and fifth replay wins have been achieved, the RT state processing (Figure 21) performs processing to transition the game state to the third RT state. In this case, in step S1512, it is determined whether the VB notification flag is set. If the VB notification flag is not set, this means that the fourth and fifth replay wins have been achieved without winning the VB mode transition lottery. In this case, the winning result response processing is terminated without performing the VB mode start processing. If the VB notification flag is set, it is determined in step S1513 whether the VB mode flag is set. If the VB mode flag is set, the display mode is already VB mode, so the winning result response processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the VB mode flag is not set, processing to start VB mode is performed in steps S1514 to S1516.

That is, in step S1514, the VB mode flag is set. In this case, the AT mode flag and the VB mode flag coexist in the various flag storage area 106d. This is because VB mode is a mode that is transitioned to via AT mode, and after VB mode ends, the transition to AT mode is always made.

Then, in step S1515, a VB mode start command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. Upon receiving the VB mode start command, the display control device 81 notifies the user, via the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like, that VB mode will begin from the next game. This notification will be described in detail later. Then, in step S1516, counting the number of VB mode continuations begins. Specifically, an initial value (e.g., 25) for the number of VB mode continuation games is set in a VB mode continuation counter provided in the various counter area 106e of RAM 106. After step S1516 has been performed, this winning result response process ends.

If step S1511 determines that neither the fourth nor fifth replay win has been achieved, the process proceeds to step S1517. In step S1517, it is determined whether the seventh replay win has been achieved as a result of the current stop. In this embodiment, if the seventh replay win has been achieved, that is, if the "black BAR" symbol stops in the middle row of the left reel 32L, the "black BAR" symbol stops in the middle row of the middle reel 32M, and the "black BAR" symbol stops in the middle row of the right reel 32R, and the "black BAR" symbol stops on the middle row combination line, the game transitions to the bonus zone. Note that a seventh replay win is achieved when BAR Replay 1 is won and the stop switches 42-44 are operated in the operation sequence corresponding to the seventh replay win (Figure 23 (c)).

If the seventh replay win is achieved, step S1518 determines whether the specialized zone notification flag is set. If the specialized zone notification flag is set, steps S1519 to S1521 perform processing to start the specialized zone. As already explained, at the start of SAT mode, even if a positive determination is made in step S1509 and processing in step S1510 is performed, steps S1519 to S1521 are also performed.

Specifically, in step S1519, a process is performed to set a specialized zone flag in the various flag storage area 106d of RAM 106. The specialized zone flag is a flag that allows the CPU 102 to determine that the above-mentioned additional specialized zone is in place, and when the specialized zone flag is set, counting the number of continued games in VB mode is stopped. In this case, the various flag storage area 106d may contain an AT mode flag, a VB mode flag, and a specialized zone flag all at once.

Then, in step S1520, the specialized zone start command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. Upon receiving the specialized zone start command, the display control device 81 notifies the user, via the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like, that the specialized zone will start from the next game. This notification will be described in detail later. Then, in step S1521, counting the number of continuations of the specialized zone begins. Specifically, an initial value (e.g., 5) for the number of continuation games of the specialized zone is set in the specialized zone continuation counter provided in the various counter area 106e of RAM 106. After the processing of step S1521 is performed, this winning result response processing ends.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1517 or step S1518, the process proceeds to step S1522. In step S1522, it is determined whether the 11th or 12th replay win has been achieved as a result of this stop. As described above, if the 11th or 12th replay win has been achieved, the RT state processing (Figure 21) performs processing to transition the game state to the 4th RT state. In this case, in step S1523, it is determined whether the transition notification flag is set. If the transition notification flag is set, this means that the 11th or 12th replay win has been achieved after the conditions enabling transition to the 4th RT state have been met. In this case, in step S1524, the first fixed RT start command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. Upon receiving the first fixed RT start command, the display control device 81 notifies the user that a transition to the 4th RT state has occurred via the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. Such notification will be described in detail later. On the other hand, if the transition notification flag is not set in step S1523, this means that the 11th and 12th re-play wins have been achieved without the conditions for transitioning to the 4th RT state being met. In this case, in step S1525, the second fixed RT start command is set as the output target to the display control device 81. Upon receiving the second fixed RT start command, the display control device 81 notifies the player that a transition to the 4th RT state has occurred via the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like. This notification will be explained in detail later, but the notification when the first fixed RT start command is received and the notification when the second fixed RT start command is received are different enough to be distinguishable by the player. If a negative judgment is made in step S1522, the processing of either step S1522 or step S1525 is executed, and then the winning result response processing ends.

As described above, processing to transition the display mode is performed separately from the RT state processing (Figure 21), particularly based on the winning of a combination (third to fifth replays) that corresponds to transitioning the gaming state to the second RT state or the third RT state. This is to prevent AT mode, etc. from starting based on the winning of a combination that corresponds to transitioning the gaming state, even though the display mode transition lottery has not been won.

Furthermore, when transitioning between display modes, which involve a transition in the game state, transitions to higher modes, i.e., transitions from normal mode or CZ mode to AT mode, transitions from AT mode to VB mode, or transitions from AT mode or VB mode to a specialized zone, are configured to be transitions based on the winning results of the corresponding role. Therefore, the transition between display modes and the transition between game states occur as a set in the same game. On the other hand, when transitioning to a lower mode, for example, when the game state transitions due to a second replay win as a fall replay or the stopping of a transition result, the display mode does not transition. When transitioning to a lower mode, the game state is managed by the winning result (RT state processing), while the display mode is managed by the number of games. Therefore, when transitioning to a lower mode, the transition between game states and the transition between display modes may occur in separate games.

<Game count management process>
The number-of-games management process executed in step S1501 of the winning result response process will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 50. In the number-of-games management process, the number of premonition games in the premonition mode is counted, and the number of continued games in the CZ mode, AT mode, VB mode, and specialized zone is counted, and when the number of continued games in these display modes reaches 0, processing is performed to end the corresponding display mode.

In the game count management process, first, in step S1601, it is determined whether the number of bets is a specific number. As already explained, in this embodiment, each game can be played with a bet number of 1 to 3, and in step S1601, it is determined whether the specific number is 3 bets. If it is not 3 bets, the game count management process ends. In other words, in games with 1 or 2 bets, the number of games in premonition mode or the number of continued games in CZ mode, etc. is not counted. Note that it is also possible to configure the counting to be performed regardless of the number of bets.

If the current game is a 3-bet game, proceed to step S1602. In step S1602, it is determined whether the bonus win flag is set or whether the game is in a bonus state. If a positive determination is made in step S1602, the display mode flags CZ mode flag, AT mode flag, VB mode flag, and specialized zone flag are cleared in step S1603, and then this game count management process is terminated. In other words, if the bonus win flag is set or during a bonus, the number of games played in AT mode, etc. is not counted. Note that if any flag is not set in step S1603, that state is maintained.

Incidentally, in step S1603, while the AT mode flag, VB mode flag, etc. are cleared, the AT notification flag and VB notification flag are not cleared. Therefore, after the bonus ends, after going through the preparation state of AT mode, etc., these flags will notify the push order to transition the gaming state, making it possible to return to the gaming state before the bonus. On the other hand, if a bonus is won in CZ mode or a specialized zone, the CZ mode or specialized zone will end when the bonus is won. Also, in step S1603, the CZ mode win flag, AT mode win flag, etc. are not cleared. Therefore, if AT mode, etc. and a bonus are won simultaneously, a win notification based on these win flags will be made after the bonus ends.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1602, a determination is made in step S1604 as to whether the number of premonition games is 0. If it is not 0, the number of premonition games is decremented by 1 in step S1605. If the number of premonition games is 0 in step S1604 (if the game is not in premonition mode), or after the processing of step S1605 has been executed, the number of continued games for each mode is counted in steps S1606 to S1628.

That is, in step S1606, it is determined whether the current display mode is CZ mode. If it is CZ mode, proceed to step S1607, where the CZ mode continuation counter is decremented by 1, thereby subtracting the number of CZ mode continuation games. Then, in step S1608, it is determined whether the CZ mode continuation counter is 0. If it is not 0, the number-of-games management process ends. If it is 0, the CZ mode flag is cleared in step S1609, and a CZ mode end command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S1610. Upon receiving the CZ mode end command, the display control device 81 notifies the auxiliary display unit 65, etc., that CZ mode will end with the current game. After performing the process of step S1610, the number-of-games management process ends.

If it is determined in step S1606 that the mode is not CZ mode, the process proceeds to step S1611. In step S1611, it is determined whether the current display mode is AT mode. If it is AT mode, the process proceeds to step S1612, where it is determined whether it is a specialized zone in AT mode. In other words, if the system transitions to a specialized zone when the AT mode starts, as in SAT mode, a positive determination is made in step S1612. If it is in a specialized zone, game count management processing for the specialized zone is performed in steps S1625 to S1628. These processes will be explained later.

If it is determined in step S1612 that the zone is not a specialized zone, the AT mode continuation counter is decremented by 1 in step S1613, thereby decrementing the number of games to be played in AT mode. Then, in step S1614, it is determined whether the AT mode continuation counter is 0. If it is not 0, the number-of-games management process ends. If it is 0, the AT mode flag is cleared in step S1615, and the AT notification flag is cleared in step S1616. Then, in step S1617, an AT mode end command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. Upon receiving the AT mode end command, the display control device 81 notifies the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like that the AT mode will end with this game. Such notification will be explained in detail later. After the process of step S1617 is performed, the number-of-games management process ends.

If it is determined in step S1611 that the mode is not AT mode, the process proceeds to step S1618. In step S1618, it is determined whether the current display mode is VB mode. If it is VB mode, the process proceeds to step S1619, where it is determined whether it is in an add-on specialized zone. If it is not in an add-on specialized zone, the VB mode continuation counter is decremented by 1 in step S1620, thereby subtracting the number of games in VB mode. Then, in step S1621, it is determined whether the VB mode continuation counter is 0. If it is not 0, the number-of-games management process ends. If it is 0, the VB mode flag is cleared in step S1622, and the VB notification flag is cleared in step S1623. Then, in step S1624, a VB mode end command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. Upon receiving the VB mode end command, the display control device 81 notifies the auxiliary display unit 65, etc., that VB mode will end in this game. Such notification will be explained in detail later. After processing step S1624, the game count management process ends.

If step S1619 determines that the zone is an added specialized zone, the process proceeds to step S1625. As already explained, if step S1612 determines that the zone is a specialized zone in AT mode, the process also proceeds to step S1625. In step S1625, the specialized zone continuation counter is decremented by 1, thereby subtracting the number of games continued in the specialized zone. Then, in step S1626, it is determined whether the specialized zone continuation counter is 0. If it is 0, in step S1627, the specialized zone flag is cleared, and in step S1628, a specialized zone end command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. Upon receiving the specialized zone end command, the display control device 81 notifies the auxiliary display unit 65, etc., that the specialized zone will end with this game. As such a notification, for example, the total number of games successfully added in this specialized zone is notified. After processing step S1628, the game number management process ends. If a negative judgment is made in step S1618 or step S1626, the game count management process ends.

<End Determination Process>
Next, the end determination process, which is the process at the end of the bonus, will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 51. As already explained, the end determination process is the process carried out in step S614 in the bonus state process (Fig. 27). In the end determination process, it is determined whether the bonus end condition is met, and when the bonus is to be ended, a process for notifying the winning of the AT mode, etc., which has been won both in addition to the bonus, and a process for adding the number of games, etc., which has been won both in addition to the bonus, are carried out.

That is, in step S1701, it is determined whether a small win has been achieved. As already explained, during the first BB and second BB bonuses, the first BB win has a high probability of being achieved, and occasionally the second BB win and the third BB win are achieved (Figure 28). When the first BB win is achieved, the first small win is achieved, resulting in the payout of a predetermined number of medals (9 medals). The second BB win and the third BB win are replays of the ninth and tenth replays, and no medals are paid out even if a win is achieved. Also, during a CB, any of CB small wins 1 to 4 is achieved, and regardless of which win is achieved, the first small win is achieved, resulting in the payout of a predetermined number of medals (15 medals). Step S1701 is the process of determining whether a small win resulting in the payout of medals has been achieved among the wins during these bonuses and CBs.

If it is determined in step S1701 that a small win has been achieved, the process of subtracting the payout amount for this game from the remaining payout amount is performed in step S1702. If a negative determination is made in step S1701, or after the process of step S1702 has been executed, it is determined in step S1703 whether the remaining payout amount has reached 0. If it is not 0, the end determination process is terminated. If it is 0, a bonus end command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S1704, and then in steps S1705 to S1719, processing for notifying a win in AT mode, etc., and processing for adding to the number of games to be continued in AT mode, etc., are performed.

That is, in step S1705, it is determined whether the AT mode win flag is set. If the AT mode win flag is set, a lottery process for the number of premonition games is performed in step S1706, the number of premonition games is set in step S1707, and a premonition command is set in step S1708. Incidentally, in this embodiment, the lottery process for the number of premonition games in step S1706 performs a lottery with a 100% probability that the number of premonition games will be 0. That is, in step S1707, the number of premonition games is always set to 0, and a win notification for AT mode, etc. will be made in the game following the bonus end game. After executing the process in step S1708, the end determination process ends.

If the AT mode win flag is not set in step S1705, a determination is made in step S1709 as to whether the CZ mode win flag is set. If the CZ mode win flag is set, steps S1706 to S1708 for the premonition mode are performed, and then the end determination process ends. If the CZ mode win flag is not set in step S1709, a determination is made in step S1710 as to whether the VB mode win flag is set. If the VB mode win flag is set, steps S1706 to S1708 for the premonition mode are performed, and then the end determination process ends. In other words, if the bonus ends while the CZ mode or VB mode has also been won, a win notification for the CZ mode or VB mode is issued after the bonus ends, following a premonition game.

When the AT mode win flag or CZ mode win flag is set, the bonus ends when the AT mode or CZ mode win flag and the bonus are won simultaneously, or when the bonus is won during the premonition mode of the win notification in AT mode or CZ mode. On the other hand, when the VB mode win flag is set, the bonus ends when the VB mode and the bonus are won simultaneously during the AT mode, or when the bonus is won during the premonition mode of the win notification in VB mode (in this case, the premonition mode of game 0 is selected, so the game after the VB mode win occurs).

If the VB mode win flag is not set in step S1710, proceed to step S1711. In step S1711, it is determined whether the AT mode addition flag is set. If the AT mode addition flag is set, step S1712 performs a lottery process for the number of AT mode addition games, step S1713 performs an AT mode number addition process, step S1714 performs an addition notification process, and step S1715 sets an addition command. The processes in steps S1712 to S1715 are the same as the processes in steps S917 to S920. After the process in step S1715 is executed, the end determination process ends.

If the AT mode addition flag is not set in step S1711, it is determined in step S1716 whether the CZ mode addition flag is set. If the CZ mode addition flag is set, a lottery process for the number of CZ mode addition games is performed in step S1717, a process for adding the number of CZ mode games is performed in step S1718, and an addition command is set in step S1719. The processes of steps S1717 to S1719 are the same as the processes of steps S822 to S824. If a negative determination is made in step S1716, or after the process of step S1719 has been executed, the end determination process is terminated.

As described above, the main control device 101 performs the following processes: (1) processing related to the display mode transition lottery, (2) processing for transitioning the game state based on the results of the display mode transition lottery, and (3) processing for transitioning the display mode based on the winning result.As a result, the auxiliary display unit 65 generates a push order notification effect, and the game state transitions in line with the transition of the display mode.Furthermore, the push order notification effect by the auxiliary display unit 65 can generate a push order bell win, allowing for the possibility of winning a large number of medals.

Here, when a push order replay or push order bell is won, if a push order notification effect is performed by the auxiliary display unit 65 (a push order notification effect by the display control device 81), in addition to the push order notification effect, a push order notification is also performed by the instruction monitor 68 connected to the main control device 101. The configuration of this instruction monitor 68 will be explained with reference to Figure 52. Figure 52(a) is a front view of the instruction monitor 68, and Figure 52(b) is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the display mode of the instruction monitor 68 and the display content.

As shown in Figure 52(a), the indication monitor 68 has eight display segments N1 to N8. Each display segment N1 to N8 has its own light source made up of an LED, and by controlling the on/off of these individual light sources, it is possible to light up any one display segment, or any combination of display segments. This allows the indication monitor 68 to individually display predetermined symbols (including letters and numbers). Note that since all of the individual light sources emit light of the same color, the same color is displayed on all of the display segments N1 to N8.

Regarding each display segment N1-N8 in more detail, the first display segment N1 through the seventh display segment N7 are all linear display segments, and these first display segment N1 through the seventh display segment N7 are arranged so that they can at least display the numbers "1" through "6." The eighth display segment N8 is a circular display segment, and is arranged to the side of the lower right corner of the area where the first display segment N1 through the seventh display segment N7 are located. Therefore, the indicator monitor 68 can at least display "1" through "6," "1." through "6.", and ".".

Note that, as long as the indicator monitor 68 can individually display multiple patterns of symbols, the shape and arrangement of each display segment N1-N8 can be arbitrary, and a configuration using seven segments instead of eight, or even nine segments, is also possible. Furthermore, it is not necessary for each display segment N1-N8 to display the same color; the color displayed by each display segment N1-N8 can be changed as needed. Furthermore, it is not necessary to control the on/off of each display segment N1-N8 by turning the light source on and off; as long as the display can be individually controlled for each display segment N1-N8, the segment display can be constructed using a single backlight and LCD display. Furthermore, rather than applying a segment display to each display area, symbols can be displayed using other types of display devices, such as an LCD display, organic EL display, CRT, or dot matrix.

The first display segment N1 through the seventh display segment N7 are display segments used to notify the player of the operation sequence of the push-order combination. For example, as shown in FIG. 52(b), if the player achieves a winning combination advantageous to him by operating the stop switches 42-44 in the order "left" → "center" → "right," the sixth display segment N6 and the seventh display segment N7 will light up to display "1." Furthermore, if the player achieves a winning combination advantageous to him by operating the stop switches 42-44 in the order "right" → "left" → "center," the first display segment N1, the second display segment N2, the third display segment N3, the fifth display segment N5, and the sixth display segment N6 will light up to display "5." In other words, the numbers (symbols) displayed on each display segment N1 to N7 correspond one-to-one to the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, and by operating the stop switches 42 to 44 in accordance with the numbers (symbols) displayed on the display segments N1 to N7, the player can win in an advantageous manner.

The eighth display segment N8 is lit when the display mode is normal mode and the player wins the lottery to transition to AT mode, SAT mode, or CZ mode, or when the player wins the bonus (first BB) that can be won simultaneously in AT mode, SAT mode, or CZ mode. It is also extinguished when the AT mode, SAT mode, CZ mode, or first BB ends and the player transitions to normal mode (excluding transitions back to AT mode, etc. after passing through premonition mode, etc.).

In other words, advantageous zones (specific game states, specific modes) include zones that include navigation states (AT mode, SAT mode, high frequency mode) in which the push order bell and push order replay operation sequence is more easily notified, making it easier for players to win in an advantageous manner; chance states (CZ mode, 1st BB, high probability mode) in which it is easier to win the lottery to transition to said navigation state; or winning states (winning modes) in which the lottery to transition to said navigation state or chance state is won but the player does not transition to said navigation state or chance state. The eighth display segment N8 lights up during said advantageous zones and turns off during normal zones that are not advantageous zones, thereby serving as a zone indicator (specific notification means) that clearly indicates whether or not the zone is advantageous.

The eighth display segment N8 starts with the game in which the game result (such as a specific combination like a strong cherry) that triggered the advantageous zone, such as the Navi state, Chance state, or Win state, is won and the game result is realized, and begins to light up as a notification that the advantageous zone has been entered, before the player is allowed to make any game operations in the game following the starting game. More specifically, in this embodiment, regardless of whether the game result that triggered the advantageous zone is won or not, that is, regardless of whether a miss occurs or not, the game in which the game result is won is the starting game, and the eighth display segment N8 is lit up before the player is allowed to make any bet operations as a game operation in the next game. In other words, the eighth display segment N8 starts to light up before the start of the game following the game in which the player won the lottery to move to the advantageous zone.

As already explained, the instruction monitor 68, which has the first display segment N1 through the seventh display segment N7 as a push order indicator and the eighth display segment N8 as a section indicator, is located near the side of the payout number display unit 62 on the gaming panel 25. In other words, the instruction monitor 68 is located above the stop switches 42 through 44, which are operated by the player. In other words, the instruction monitor 68 is not located on the decorative panel, which is the front part of the gaming machine, below the positions where the stop switches 42 through 44 are located. This prevents the eighth display segment N8 from being obscured by the hands operating the stop switches 42 through 44, and it can be said that it is located in a position that is easy for players to see. Furthermore, since it is located near the payout number display unit 62, which is easily visible to players who are playing the game in an effort to win medals, it can be said that players are less likely to miss it.

Furthermore, the brightness of the corresponding LED of the eighth display segment N8 on the instruction monitor 68 is set so that it is brighter than the brightness of the surrounding display elements (e.g., the payout number display element 62 and the backlight of the gaming panel 25) (more specifically, so that it is twice as bright as the surrounding display elements). Therefore, even when the eighth display segment N8 and the surrounding display elements are both controlled to emit light (i.e., lit), the eighth display segment N8 stands out. The brightness of the corresponding LED is also set so that the eighth display segment N8 has a higher brightness toward the front of the gaming machine than the surrounding display elements (more specifically, so that it is twice as bright as the surrounding display elements). This configuration also improves the visibility of the eighth display segment N8, reducing the likelihood of missing it when it is lit.

Below, we will explain the first section display process and the second section display process as processes related to turning on/off the eighth display segment N8.

<First section display process>
First, the first section display process will be described with reference to Fig. 53. The first section display process is a process carried out in step S316 of the lottery process (Fig. 16), and is carried out after the lottery result of the game is determined based on the operation of the start lever 41, and a lottery for switching the display mode, etc. (lottery result response process) is carried out based on the lottery result.

In step S1801, it is determined whether the eighth display segment N8, which serves as a zone indicator, is currently displayed, or more specifically, whether the eighth display segment N8 is currently lit. As described above, when the eighth display segment N8 is currently lit, this indicates that the lottery for transitioning to the advantageous zone AT mode, SAT mode, or CZ mode has been won, or that the mode is currently in one of these modes. If a negative determination is made in step S1801 and it is determined that the eighth display segment N8 is currently off, the process proceeds to step S1802.

In step S1802, it is determined whether either the CZ mode win flag or the AT mode win flag is set. If the eighth display segment N8 is off and either the CZ mode win flag or the AT mode win flag is set, this means that the current lottery process has won the lottery to transition to CZ mode, or the lottery to transition to AT mode or SAT mode. As already explained, in the first specific role process (Figure 33), if the lottery to transition to CZ mode is won, the CZ mode win flag is set, and if the lottery to transition to AT mode or SAT mode is won, the AT mode win flag is set. If neither flag is set in step S1802, the first section display process is terminated.

If either the CZ mode win flag or the AT mode win flag is set, proceed to step S1803, where the eighth display segment N8 is lit to begin displaying the section indicator. Additionally, when the main control unit 101 starts displaying the eighth display segment N8 as a section indicator with the lit state, it outputs a sound output command to the display control unit 81 so that a predetermined sound effect (e.g., a mechanical "gag!") is output from the speaker 64. Based on the sound output command, the display control unit 81 controls the speaker 64 to emit the predetermined sound effect. Note that when the eighth display segment N8 begins displaying, a performance may be generated in the auxiliary display unit 65 or another display unit. In this case, it is preferable to output a corresponding command to the display control unit 81 and control the auxiliary display unit 65, etc., so that the corresponding performance is generated by the display control unit 81.

After executing the processing of step S1803, processing is executed in step S1804 to start measuring the number of games continued in the advantageous zone, and then the first zone display processing is terminated. The number of games continued in the advantageous zone is determined by measuring the advantageous zone game number AG provided in the various counter areas 106e of RAM 106, and processing is executed in step S1804 to set the advantageous zone game number AG to its initial value of 0. The advantageous zone game number AG is incremented by 1 for each game in the advantageous zone.

If it is determined in step S1801 that the eighth display segment N8 is currently being displayed as a section indicator, then in step S1805, processing is performed to continue display during the favorable section, and then this section display first processing is terminated. Specifically, in step S1805, processing is performed to continue the situation in which the eighth display segment N8 is lit. In other words, processing to terminate the display of the section indicator is not performed in this section display first processing.

<Second Section Display Process>
Next, the second section display process will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 54. As already explained, the second section display process is a process performed in step S415 of the reel control process, and is performed after medal payout (payout determination process) and transition of the game state based on the winning result (winning result response process) have been performed at the end of one game.

In step S1901, it is determined whether the eighth display segment N8 is currently lit as a zone indicator. If it is off (not lit, not displayed), the second zone display process is terminated. If it is currently lit, the process proceeds to step S1902. In step S1902, a process is executed to count the number of games played in the advantageous zone. Specifically, a process is executed to increment the advantageous zone game count AG by 1. The advantageous zone game count AG is a counter that allows the CPU 102 to grasp the number of games played in the advantageous zone, and it measures the number of games played while the eighth display segment N8 is lit. After executing the process in step S1902, in step S1903, a remaining game count management process is executed. The remaining game count management process is a process for managing whether the advantageous zone will reach its upper limit number of games with the current remaining number of games, based on the number of games remaining in AT mode, etc.

Specifically, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 55, first, in step S2001, the premonition game count G1 is determined. For example, if the current situation is premonition mode in a favorable zone, the premonition game count G1 represents the number of remaining premonition mode games, and is decremented by one for each game in the game count management process (FIG. 50). In step S2002, the CZ mode continuation count G2 is determined. For example, if the current situation is CZ mode in a favorable zone, the CZ mode continuation count G2 represents the number of remaining CZ mode games, and is decremented by one for each game in the game count management process (FIG. 50). In step S2003, the AT mode continuation count G3 is determined. For example, if the current situation is AT mode in a favorable zone, the AT mode continuation count G3 represents the number of remaining AT mode games, and is decremented by one for each game in the game count management process (FIG. 50). In step S2004, the VB mode continuation count G4 is determined. The VB mode continuation count G4 represents the number of remaining VB mode games, for example, when the current state is VB mode in an advantageous zone, and is decremented by one for each game in the game count management process (FIG. 50). In step S2005, the specialized zone continuation count G5 is determined. For example, when the current state is a specialized zone in an advantageous zone, the specialized zone continuation count G5 represents the number of remaining specialized zone games, and is decremented by one for each game in the game count management process (FIG. 50). In step S2006, the BB remaining game count G6 is determined. For example, when the current state is BB mode (bonus state) in an advantageous zone, the BB remaining game count G6 represents the number of remaining BB mode games, and is decremented by one each time the game count management process (FIG. 50) is started, provided that BB mode is in progress, by a decrement process (not shown).

Here, values of 0 or greater may be entered for these continuation numbers G1 to G6 even if the current state is not the corresponding mode or zone. Specifically, for example, in VB mode, specialized zone, or BB mode, the count of the remaining number of games in AT mode is stopped, but if a transition to VB mode, specialized zone, or BB mode occurs during AT mode, values of 0 or greater are entered for AT mode continuation number G3 and the continuation number for each of these modes.

In step S2007, the remaining number of games in the advantageous zone ZG is calculated by accumulating G1 to G6 determined in the processes of steps S2001 to S2006 above. By performing this process, it is possible to determine how many more games the advantageous zone will continue. In the following step S2008, the total number of games in the advantageous zone SG is calculated by adding the number of games in the advantageous zone that have been played so far (number of games in the advantageous zone AG) and the remaining number of games ZG. Then, in step S2009, the total number of games in the advantageous zone SG is subtracted from 1500G, which is the upper limit number of games that the advantageous zone can continue, to calculate the number of free games FG (number of free games that can be added, number of remaining games).

After processing step S2009, step S2010 determines whether the number of available games FG is greater than 0, i.e., whether there are available games and whether an increase is possible. If the number of available games FG is greater than 0, the remaining game number management process is terminated. On the other hand, if the number of available games FG is 0 or less, step S2011 executes a process to set an excess flag in the various flag storage area 106d, and then the remaining game number management process is terminated. The excess flag is a flag that allows the CPU 102 to determine whether an increase in the number of continued games in the advantageous zone cannot be made; more specifically, whether even if an increase is made, the additional games will not be played due to a forced termination at 1,500 games.

In this embodiment, by setting the excess flag, the implementation of lotteries for adding the number of games during AT mode is restricted, even if a specific role is won during the advantageous zone. More specifically, if the excess flag is set during the lottery process for adding the number of games in AT mode, such as step S914 or step S1101, the implementation of such lottery process is restricted, and no additional wins are made (or even if a win is made, an additional 0 games are added). This makes it possible to prevent the misunderstanding that an advantageous zone will continue beyond the upper limit number of games by adding an amount that cannot be continued.

Note that once the excess flag is set, the remaining game count management process may not be performed during the current advantageous period.

Returning to the explanation of the second interval display process (Figure 54), after executing the process of step S1903, fixed RT processing is executed in step S1904. The fixed RT processing is a process that determines whether the conditions that allow transition to the fourth RT state are met, and sets a notification flag (transition notification flag) to transition to the fourth RT state if the conditions are met. This process will be explained in detail later.

After executing the processing of step S1904, step S1905 determines whether the number of games in the advantageous zone AG for the current game has reached the upper limit of 1500. If it has reached 1500, step S1906 clears the number of games in the advantageous zone AG to 0, and then step S1907 performs processing to turn off the eighth display segment N8 as the display termination processing for the zone display. Then, step S1908 performs data initialization processing, and then ends the second zone display processing.

The data initialization process resets flags and counters set upon transition to the current advantageous zone, as well as flags and counters set during the current advantageous zone, to their initial values. For example, if a CZ mode win flag or AT mode win flag is set upon transition to the advantageous zone, or a VB mode win flag is set during AT mode, and these flags remain set until this initialization process, these win flags are cleared. Furthermore, the initialization process also clears AT notification flags, AT mode flags, VB mode flags, specialized zone flags, and other flags that are set. Furthermore, if premonition counters, counters for the number of games continued in AT mode, etc., are greater than 0, all of these counters are reset to 0. In other words, the initialization process initializes all variables and parameters that affect the performance of push order notifications for advantageous zones that are advantageous states using push order notifications, and clears RAM for such variables and parameters.

If step S1905 determines that the number of games in the favorable zone AG has not reached its upper limit, the process proceeds to step S1909, where it determines whether the favorable zone has ended. Specifically, step S1909 determines whether neither the CZ mode win flag nor the AT mode win flag is set, and step S1910 determines whether neither the CZ mode flag nor the AT mode flag is set. A positive determination in both step S1909 and step S1910 means that the favorable zone ended before reaching its upper limit. In this case, the process proceeds to step S1906, where the number of games in the favorable zone AG is cleared to 0. Step S1907 terminates the display of the zone indicator, and step S1908 initializes the data before terminating the zone display second process. If a negative determination is made in either step S1909 or step S1910, the zone indicator (eighth display segment N8) continues to illuminate, indicating that the zone is still in the favorable zone, and the zone display second process terminates.

<About the push order indicator and section indicator displays and game progress>
The relationship between the start and end of the advantageous zone and the display of the eighth display segment N8 as a zone indicator will be explained with reference to Figure 56.

In this slot machine 10, as shown in Figure 56, in the normal zone, which is not an advantageous zone, the eighth display segment N8, which serves as the zone indicator, is off (not lit). In this normal zone, the push order notification effect is not performed. In other words, while the advantageous zone has the ability to perform instruction functions such as push order notification, the normal zone can be said to be a zone that does not have such instruction functions. The situation in which the display mode is in normal mode mainly corresponds to the normal zone.

In the normal zone, for example, if a weak watermelon wins and the player wins the lottery to move to a favorable zone such as CZ mode or AT mode, the game in which the winning result is realized will be the starting game, and before the player is allowed to place a bet in the game following the starting game, the eighth display segment N8, which serves as the zone indicator, will light up and notification of the favorable zone will begin.

In this case, in the game in which the weak watermelon role is won as described above, the game is in a state before the transition to the advantageous zone, and is included in the normal zone. Therefore, if we consider the eighth display segment N8, which serves as a zone indicator indicating the advantageous zone, to be notified at the timing when betting operations are permitted for the game following the starting game in which the weak watermelon role was won, in other words, when the game in which the advantageous zone begins becomes playable, then the notification of the eighth display segment N8 being lit in the game in which the weak watermelon role was won (starting game) as described above can be said to be an advance notification that occurs before the notification of the advantageous zone (state notification, mode notification).

After that, when a notification is issued that the player is in a favorable zone, a push order notification is generated using the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7. In this case, as described above, push order information ("1" to "6") is displayed by the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7, and the player can understand the push order based on this push order information. In the push order notification, the push order information begins to be displayed when the start lever 41 is operated in that game, and ends when the third reel is stopped and turned on in that game. If the game is not the final game in the favorable zone, only the display of the push order information by the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 ends when the third reel is stopped and turned on, while the display of the favorable zone by the eighth display segment N8 continues. Then, if a push order combination is won again in the next game or later, the push order information corresponding to that push order combination is displayed by the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7.

When the number of continuing games in the advantageous zone reaches its upper limit, or when it becomes the final game of the advantageous zone, the eighth display segment N8 also turns off and the notification of the advantageous zone ends. The number of games in the advantageous zone is counted in the games in which the eighth display segment N8 is lit; specifically, the game following the starting game is counted as the first game, and the number of games in the advantageous zone continues until the final game when the eighth display segment N8 turns off.

In this embodiment, in the final game of the advantageous zone, the eighth display segment N8 is turned off when medal payout is completed (by the second zone display process, which is the process that follows the payout determination process). If medal payout is not performed in the final game, the eighth display segment N8 is turned off when the third reel is stopped and turned off. This allows the player to clearly understand that the game in question was the final game of the advantageous zone.

In this way, the eighth display segment N8 lights up when a favorable zone is entered, and turns off when the favorable zone ends. The eighth display segment N8 not only starts to light up when a transition to CZ mode, AT mode, etc. is made, but also when a player wins the lottery to transition to CZ mode, AT mode, etc. In other words, even if a notification is not made in a game in which a player wins the lottery to transition to these modes, by checking whether or not the eighth display segment N8 is lit, it is possible to clearly determine whether or not a player has won the lottery to transition to these modes. This makes it possible to prevent a difference in the degree of advantage between a player who wins the lottery to transition to these modes but quits the game without knowing it, and the successor player who takes his or her seat.

In addition, this slot machine 10 is configured so that there is no difference in the degree of advantage depending on the setting value for gameplay that changes the degree of advantage based on the push order notification in CZ mode, AT mode, etc. Therefore, by setting the degree of advantage based on the push order notification to a uniform level for each gaming machine (setting value) and each game (situation), it is possible to eliminate advantages/disadvantages between players, while still being able to fully enjoy the original gameplay of the slot machine 10, which is to aim for symbols to obtain bonuses, and to create a well-balanced gaming machine in relation to the gameplay based on the accompanying push order notification.

<Processing related to notification effects on the sub-side>
Next, (4) the process related to the notification effect on the sub-side will be described. The various notification processes performed by the sub-side display control device 81 are described. The various notification processes include a performance setting process executed at a predetermined cycle (1.49 msec). This performance setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 57.

In the effect setting process, first, in step S2101, it is determined whether a new command has been received from the main control device 101. If a new command has been received, in step S2102, a process is executed to store the received command in RAM 183. RAM 183 is provided with a command storage area, which is configured as a ring buffer that can store multiple commands individually and can read commands from previously stored commands.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2101, or after the processing of step S2102 has been executed, step S2103 determines whether the newly received command is a bet command. A bet command is a command output from the main control device 101 in response to a bet operation. In addition to the bet command set in step S207 of the normal processing, there are also commands such as the CZ mode start command in the mode transition notification processing (FIG. 46), the AT mode win notification command, the VB mode win notification command, and the bonus win notification command. If the command is one of these bet commands, step S2104 executes the bet effect setting processing.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2103, or after the processing of step S2104 has been executed, step S2105 determines whether the newly received command is a start command. A start command is a command output from the main control unit 101 based on the operation of the start lever 41. In addition to the lottery result command set in step S313 of the lottery processing, there are also premonition commands and additional commands set in the first to third specific role processing (Figures 33 to 36), and push order notification commands set in the push order role processing (Figure 48). If it is one of these start commands, step S2106 executes the start effect setting processing.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2105, or after the processing of step S2106 has been executed, step S2107 determines whether the newly received command is a command at the time of each stop operation. A command at the time of each stop operation is a command output from the main control device 101 based on the stop operation being performed on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and is a stop command command set in step S405 of the reel control processing (Figure 18). If the stop command is a stop command at the time of each stop operation, step S2108 executes a process for setting the effect at the time of each stop operation.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2107, or after the processing of step S2108 has been executed, step S2109 determines whether the newly received command is an all-stop command. An all-stop command is a command output from the main control device 101 when all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped. It includes the winning result command set in step S411 of the reel control processing (FIG. 18), as well as the AT mode start command, VB mode start command, specialized zone start command, CZ mode end command, AT mode end command, VB mode end command, specialized zone end command, first fixed RT start command, second fixed RT start command, etc., which are set in the winning result response processing (FIG. 49). If it is one of these all-stop commands, step S2110 executes the all-stop effect setting processing.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2109, or after the processing of step S2110 has been performed, other processing is performed in step S2111, and then the effect setting processing is terminated. In step S2111, effects based on commands from the main control device 101 other than when a bet is made, when the game is started, or when the game is stopped (for example, effects based on the operation of the settlement switch 59), effects based on signals from sensors connected without going through the main control device 101 (such as an effect switch detection sensor), and settings for error notifications are set.

The following explains the bet effect setting process, start effect setting process, each stop operation effect setting process, and all stop effect setting process. When explaining each effect setting process, reference will be made to the overview diagrams of the display effects in Figures 67 to 73.

<Bet effect setting process>
The bet time effect setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S2201, it is determined whether the currently received bet command includes a CZ mode start command. If a CZ mode start command is included, in step S2202, processing is performed to set the CZ mode start effect. In the CZ mode start effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 68(a), the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the words "Chance Zone Start," and also displays a display (for example, a specified character display) suggesting that the display mode to be transitioned to is in a situation where it is easy to win the AT mode transition lottery. In addition, in the CZ mode start effect, control is performed so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, a man's deep voice saying "It's your chance!") is emitted from the speaker 64.

If a CZ mode start command is not included in step S2201, then in step S2203 it is determined whether the currently received bet time command includes an AT mode winning notification command. If an AT mode winning notification command is included, then in step S2204 a process is performed to set up an AT mode winning notification effect. In the AT mode winning notification effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 69(a), the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the words "AT confirmed." In addition, in the AT mode winning notification effect, control is exercised so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, a high-pitched female voice saying "I did it!") is emitted from the speaker 64.

If an AT mode winning notification command is not included in step S2203, it is determined in step S2205 whether the currently received bet time command includes a VB mode winning notification command. If a VB mode winning notification command is included, processing is performed to set a VB mode winning notification effect in step S2206. In the VB mode winning notification effect, for example, as shown in Figure 69 (b), the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the text "V-BONUS confirmed." Additionally, in the VB mode winning notification effect, control is exercised so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, a male and female voice saying "Super lucky!") is emitted from the speaker 64.

If a VB mode winning notification command is not included in step S2205, then in step S2207 it is determined whether the currently received bet time command includes a bonus winning notification command. If a bonus winning notification command is included, then in step S2208 a process is performed to set up a bonus winning notification effect. In the bonus winning notification effect, for example, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the text "Yay! Bonus confirmed." In addition, in the bonus winning notification effect, control is exercised so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, a male or female voice saying "Yay!") is emitted from the speaker 64.

If a bonus winning notification command is not included in step S2207, then in step S2209 it is determined whether or not a specialized zone winning notification command is included as a bet time command received this time. If a specialized zone winning notification command is included, then in step S2210 processing is performed to set up a specialized zone winning notification effect. In the specialized zone winning notification effect, for example, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the text "Get on with it!!" In addition, in the specialized zone winning notification effect, control is exercised so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, the deep voice of an ecstatic man saying "Let's get into it!") is emitted from the speaker 64.

After executing any of the processes in steps S2202, S2204, S2206, S2208, and S2210, or if a negative judgment is made in step S2209, other bet effects are set in step S2211, and then this effect setting process ends. The process in step S2211 may, for example, respond to the reception of a bet command by turning off the lamps around (or inside) the credit insertion switches 56-58 for the corresponding bet number to indicate that the operation has been accepted, or may return from demo mode, which transitions to a certain condition when no play has been made for a predetermined period of time, or may turn on the lamp around the start lever 41 to indicate that the operation has been validated.

<Start-up performance setting process>
Next, the start-up effect setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S2301, a display mode setting process is performed. This process determines whether the display mode currently set on the main control device 101 is normal mode, CZ mode, AT mode, VB mode, or specialized zone mode, and sets the auxiliary display unit 65 to display the corresponding display mode. Specifically, the various flag storage area 183a of the RAM 183 on the display control device 81 also has areas for setting the CZ mode flag, AT mode flag, VB mode flag, and specialized zone flag as flags for identifying the display mode. The corresponding flag is set when each mode starts and cleared when it ends. For example, when setting the CZ mode start effect in step S2202 above, the CZ mode flag is set. In step S2301, these various mode-compatible flags are identified to identify the current display mode, and the auxiliary display unit 65, speaker 64, upper lamp 63, etc. are controlled to create the corresponding effect.

In the following step S2302, it is determined whether the lottery result for the game to be started this time is a press order role win based on the received lottery result command. If the press order role win is a press order role win, in step S2303, processing for notifying the press order is performed. Here, the press order notification processing will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 60.

In step S2401, it is determined whether the currently received start command includes a push order notification command. If a push order notification command is not included, the push order notification process is terminated. If a push order notification command is included, the process proceeds to step S2402.

In step S2402, it is determined whether the result of this lottery is the first promotion replay 1 to 4. If it is the first promotion replay 1 to 4, in step S2403, the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. is controlled to notify the push order that will result in the third replay winning, and then the push order notification process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S2402 that the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are not a win, then in step S2404 it is determined whether the current lottery result is a fall replay 1 to 3. If it is a fall replay 1 to 3, the process proceeds to step S2405, where the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. is controlled to notify the player of the push order that will result in the first replay win, and then the push order notification process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S2404 that the result is not one of Fall Replays 1 to 3, then in step S2406 it is determined whether the result of this lottery is Second Promotion Replay 1 or 2. If it is Second Promotion Replay 1 or 2, then in step S2407 it is determined whether a VB mode winning notification effect or a specialized zone winning notification effect has already been executed. For example, when setting the VB mode winning notification effect in step S2206 or the specialized zone winning notification effect in step S2210, a notification flag indicating that a VB win or specialized zone win has been notified is set in the various flag storage area 183a of RAM 183. The notification flag is cleared upon transition to VB mode or the specialized zone. Then, in step S2407, it is desirable to determine whether the notification flag exists. If a win has already been announced in VB mode or the specialized zone, in step S2408 the auxiliary display unit 65 etc. is controlled to announce the push order for the fourth and fifth replay wins, and then the push order announcement process ends. If a win has not already been announced in VB mode or the specialized zone, proceed to step S2405, announce the push order for the first replay win, and then end the push order announcement process.

If it is determined in step S2406 that the result is not the second promotion replay 1 or 2, then in step S2409 it is determined whether the result of this lottery is a BAR replay. If it is a BAR replay, then in step S2410 it is determined whether the specialized zone winning notification effect has already been executed. If a winning notification for the specialized zone has already been issued, then in step S2411 the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. is controlled to issue a push order notification for the seventh replay win, and then the push order notification process ends. If a winning notification for the specialized zone has not already been issued, then proceed to step S2403 above, issue a push order notification for the third replay win, and then end the push order notification process.

If step S2409 determines that the replay is not a BAR replay, step S2412 determines whether the current lottery result is transition replay 1 or 2. If it is transition replay 1 or 2, step S2413 determines whether a transition replay notification flag is set in the various flag storage area 183a of RAM 183. The transition replay notification flag is a flag that allows the CPU 181 to determine whether the conditions that allow transition to the fourth RT state are met. If the transition replay notification flag is set, step S2414 controls the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. to notify the player of the push order that will result in the 11th and 12th replay wins, and then the push order notification process ends. If the transition replay notification flag is not set, proceed to step S2405 above, notify the player of the push order for the first replay win, and then end the push order notification process.

If it is determined in step S2412 that the result is not Transition Replay 1 or 2, it is determined in step S2415 whether the result of this lottery is a bell. If a bell is won, in step S2416 the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. is controlled to notify the player of the press order in which a bell win will be achieved as the first minor win, and then the press order notification process is terminated. If a negative determination is made in step S2415, the press order notification process is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of the start-up effect setting process (Figure 59), if it is determined in step S2302 that the push order role has not been won, it is determined in step S2304 whether or not a transition trigger role has been won. If a transition trigger role has been won, processing for announcing the transition trigger role is performed in step S2305. The processing for announcing the transition trigger role will be explained in detail later.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2304, or after the processing of step S2303 or step S2305 has been executed, the process proceeds to step S2306. In step S2306, it is determined whether an additional command has been received as the current start command. If an additional command has been received, in step S2307, processing is performed to set the additional effect in advance so that an additional effect for the number of games corresponding to the additional command will be executed when the game stops. As an additional effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 63, a number corresponding to the number of games to be added is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. In addition, the additional effect is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, an electronic sound like "Kyukyukyukyukyueen!") is emitted from the speaker 64.

Details of the additional effect setting process in step S2307 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 61.

In step S2501, a process is performed to determine the number of additional games to be notified based on the currently received additional command. In the following step S2502, a process is performed to determine the notification timing. The notification timing is the timing at which the additional effect is executed, and this timing is determined by the processing on the main control device 101 side (additional effect notification processing) described above. Information on the determined timing is set in the above-mentioned additional command and output. Therefore, the display control device 81 side can determine the timing at which the additional effect should be executed by reading this additional command. The notification timing is set to the game at which the additional effect should be executed and the timing corresponding to the stop operation of each stop switch 42 to 44.

After determining the notification timing in step S2502, step S2503 determines whether the determination result in step S2502 indicates that an additional effect will be performed in the current game. An additional effect will not be performed in the current game if a later addition notification is selected, in which case the additional effect setting process ends. If an additional effect will be performed in the current game, step S2504 determines whether the timing for executing the additional effect in the current game was when any of the reels stopped ON. If the timing was when the reels stopped ON, step S2505 sets the target reel for generating the additional effect, and sets the additional effect to occur when the target reel is stopped ON. Specifically, a process is performed to set one of the first reel stop ON operation flag to the third reel stop ON operation flag in the various flag storage area 183a. These flags are used by the CPU 181 to determine the timing for generating the additional effect. In step S2505, the effect data for the additional effect corresponding to the number of additional games to be generated when the stop ON operation is performed is read from the effect data storage area 182b, and the data is temporarily stored in a predetermined effect data setting area. When the CPU 181 determines that an additional effect will be generated at the timing corresponding to the stop ON operation flag, it reads the effect data temporarily stored in the effect data setting area and performs the additional effect.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2504, in step S2506 it is determined whether the first or second reel was stopped and turned off. If these reels were stopped and turned off, in step S2507 a target reel is set for generating an additional effect, and the additional effect is set to occur when the target reel is stopped and turned off. Specifically, a process is performed to set either a flag for when the first reel is stopped and off or a flag for when the second reel is stopped and turned off in the various flag storage area 183a. These flags are also flags that allow the CPU 181 to determine the timing of the additional effect occurrence. Also in step S2507, the effect data for the additional effect corresponding to the number of games played for the additional effect is read from the effect data storage area 182b, and the data is temporarily stored in a predetermined effect data setting area.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2506, in step S2508, the current additional effect is set to occur when all reels stop (when the third reel is stopped and turned OFF). Specifically, a process is performed to set a flag for when the third reel is stopped and turned OFF in the various flag storage area 183a. Also in step S2508, temporary storage process is performed for the effect data of the additional effect corresponding to the number of additional games. After the process of step S2505, step S2507, or step S2508 is executed, the process of setting the additional effect is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of the start-up effect setting process, if no additional command is received in step S2306, or after the process of step S2307 is executed, the bonus effect setting process is executed in step S2308, the continuous effect setting process is executed in step S2309, and then other start-up effects are set in step S2310, after which the start-up effect setting process ends. The bonus effect setting process and the continuous effect setting process will be explained in detail later. The process of step S2310 performs, for example, setting effects that suggest the lottery results in response to the start of the game, or turning off the lamp around the start lever 41 to notify that the operation has been accepted, etc.

<Performance setting process for each stop operation>
Next, the process for setting the effects at the time of each stop operation, which is performed in step S2108, will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S2601, it is determined whether the currently received stop operation command is a stop ON operation command. A stop ON operation command is a command output from the main control device 101 when one of the stop switches 42 to 44 is pressed during the stop operation for each reel.

If a positive judgment is made in step S2601, the process proceeds to step S2602, where it is determined whether an effect that occurs when a reel is stopped is set as an effect for this game. If it is not set, the setting process is terminated. If it is set, it is determined in step S2603 whether the stop ON operation command received this time is a stop operation for the reel that is the target of the effect that is set for the stop ON operation. If it is not a stop ON operation for the target reel, the setting process is terminated. If it is a stop ON operation for the target reel, the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. is controlled in step S2604 so that an effect is displayed when a stop ON operation is performed, and then the setting process is terminated.

For example, if an additional effect is set as the effect to be displayed when the current stop ON operation is performed, an additional effect will be generated on the auxiliary display unit 65 when the stop switches 42 to 44 are pressed (turned ON), as shown in FIG. 67(a). In this case, a sound effect corresponding to the additional effect will be emitted from the speaker 64.

Also, for example, if the current game is a winning push order role and the push order notification effect is set, the corresponding reel will stop based on each stop ON operation, and the push order notification effect will change to an effect indicating the next reel to be operated. Specifically, if all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are spinning before the stop ON operation effect, a display indicating the first reel to be operated is shown as in FIG. 47(a). Then, when the corresponding reel (middle reel 32M in the figure) stops due to the stop ON operation corresponding to the first reel, the display changes to an effect indicating the next reel to be operated (right reel 32R in the figure), as shown in FIG. 47(b). Also, if two reels are spinning before the stop ON operation effect, a display indicating the second reel to be stopped is shown as in FIG. 47(b), and when the second reel stops due to the stop ON operation, the display changes to an effect indicating the third reel to be stopped (FIG. 47(c)).

If a negative judgment is made in step S2601, the process proceeds to step S2605, where it is determined whether the stop operation command received this time is a stop OFF operation command. A stop OFF operation command is a command output from the main control device 101 when the pressing operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, which is one of the operations to stop each reel, is completed.

If a positive judgment is made in step S2605, the process proceeds to step S2606, where it is determined whether an effect that occurs when a reel is stopped/turned off is set as an effect for this game. If it is not set, the setting process is terminated. If it is set, it is determined in step S2607 whether the stop/turned off operation command received this time is a stop operation for the reel that is the target of the effect that is set for the stop/turned off operation. If it is not a stop/turned off operation for the target reel, the setting process is terminated. If it is a stop/turned off operation for the target reel, the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. is controlled in step S2608 so that an effect is displayed when a stop/turned off operation is performed, and then the setting process is terminated.

For example, if an additional effect is set as the effect to be displayed during the current stop OFF operation, as shown in FIG. 67(b), when the pressing of the stop switch 42-44 is stopped and the hand is released from the stop switch 42-44, an additional effect will be generated on the auxiliary display unit 65. In this case, a sound effect corresponding to the additional effect will be emitted from the speaker 64. If a negative judgment is made in step S2605, this effect setting process will be terminated.

<Performance setting process when all stops>
Next, the process for setting the effects when the machine is completely stopped will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

First, in step S2701, it is determined whether the currently received stop command includes a CZ mode end command. If a CZ mode end command is included, in step S2702, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so that a CZ mode end effect is displayed. In the CZ mode end effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 68(b), the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the text "Chance Zone End." In addition, in the CZ mode end effect, control is exercised so that a sound effect corresponding to the end of CZ mode (for example, a man's deep voice saying "Work harder!") is emitted from the speaker 64.

If the CZ mode end command is not included in step S2701, then in step S2703 it is determined whether the currently received stop command includes an AT mode start command. If the AT mode start command is included, then in step S2704 processing is performed to set the AT mode start effect. In the AT mode start effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 70(a), the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the text "AT Start!! LV.1". In addition, in the AT mode start effect, control is performed so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, a high-pitched female voice saying "Here we go!") is emitted from the speaker 64.

By the way, the "LV.1" display during the AT mode start effect corresponds to the AT mode level. In other words, it is a display indicating that the AT mode being started this time is ATLV.1 mode. Then, when the AT mode level is promoted to ATLV.2 mode (when a promotion command is received), the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the characters "LV.2" as a promotion effect. Furthermore, when the AT mode level is promoted to ATLV.3 mode, the characters "LV.3" are displayed, and when it is promoted to ATLV.4 mode, the characters "LV.4" are displayed.

If an AT mode start command is not included in step S2703, it is determined in step S2705 whether the currently received stop command includes an AT mode end command. If an AT mode end command is included, processing is performed in step S2706 to set the AT mode end effect. In the AT mode end effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 70(b), the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the words "AT END" and also displays the number of games continued in the current AT mode (including VB mode and specialized zone), as well as the total number of coins paid out in the current AT mode (including VB mode, specialized zone, and bonus). In addition, in the AT mode end effect, the speaker 64 is controlled to emit a corresponding sound effect (for example, a high-pitched female voice saying "See you later").

If the AT mode end command is not included in step S2705, then in step S2707 it is determined whether the currently received stop command includes a VB mode start command. If the VB mode start command is included, then in step S2708 processing is performed to set the VB mode start effect. In the VB mode start effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 71(a), the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the text "777 Lucky!!" In addition, in the VB mode start effect, control is performed so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, a male and female voice saying "Bonus Start!!") is emitted from the speaker 64.

If a VB mode start command is not included in step S2707, it is determined in step S2709 whether the currently received stop command includes a VB mode end command. If a VB mode end command is included, processing is performed in step S2710 to set the VB mode end effect. In the VB mode end effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 71(b), the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the words "V-BONUS END," and also displays the number of games continued in the AT mode (including VB mode and specialized zones) at the end of the current VB mode, and the total number of coins paid out in the AT mode (including VB mode, specialized zones, and bonuses) at the end of the current VB mode. In addition, in the VB mode end effect, the speaker 64 is controlled to emit a corresponding sound effect (for example, a male or female voice saying "It's not over yet").

If step S2709 does not include a VB mode end command, step S2711 determines whether the currently received stop command includes a specialized zone start command. If a specialized zone start command is included, step S2712 performs processing to set the specialized zone start effect. In the specialized zone start effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 72(a), the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the text "Add-on Challenge!!" and a character indicating that this is a special mode in which AT mode add-ons are likely to occur. In addition, in the specialized zone start effect, control is exercised so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, a boy's voice saying "Let's go") is emitted from the speaker 64.

If a specialized zone start command is not included in step S2711, then in step S2713 it is determined whether the currently received stop command includes a specialized zone end command. If a specialized zone end command is included, then in step S2714 a process is performed to set a specialized zone end effect. In the specialized zone end effect, for example, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the total number of games that have been added in this specialized zone. Additionally, in the specialized zone end effect, control is exercised so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, an electronic sound like "Kyukyukyukyukyueen!") is emitted from the speaker 64. It is preferable to vary the display content of the auxiliary display unit 65 and the sound effect emitted from the speaker 64 depending on the total number of games that have been added.

If a specialized zone end command is not included in step S2713, then in step S2715 it is determined whether the currently received stop command includes a bonus end command. If a bonus end command is included, then in step S2716 a process is performed to set up a bonus end effect. In the bonus end effect, for example, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the total number of coins won during the current bonus, and if the bonus transitioned to AT mode, VB mode, or a specialized zone, the total number of coins won in AT mode (including VB mode, specialized zone, and bonus) is displayed. In addition, in the bonus end effect, depending on whether the AT mode was successful, whether the CZ mode was successful, and the number of added games, characters or the like are used to indicate these contents.

After executing any of the processes in step S2702, step S2704, step S2706, step S2708, step S2710, step S2712, step S2714, and step S2716, or after a negative judgment in step S2715, the process proceeds to step S2717. In step S2717, if an additional effect is set, the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. is controlled to execute the additional effect. As already explained, the additional effect is set in step S2307 of the start-up effect setting process. Specifically, if the timing for the current additional effect to occur is set to when all reels stop in the additional effect setting process (FIG. 61), the additional effect will occur on the auxiliary display unit 65 when all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop, as shown in FIG. 67(c). In this case, a sound effect corresponding to the additional effect will be emitted from the speaker 64.

Then, in step S2718, fixed RT state notification processing is executed. The fixed RT state notification processing is processing for the fourth RT state, and this processing will be explained in detail later. Then, in step S2719, other stop-time effects are set, and then this effect setting processing ends. In step S2719, for example, control is performed so that the upper lamp 63 lights up in a color corresponding to the winning combination, sound effects corresponding to the payout number of the winning combination are controlled to be emitted from the speaker 64, and sound effects corresponding to the automatic bet during replays are controlled to be emitted from the speaker 64.

As described above, various processes for notifying the transition of display modes are performed on the display control device 81 side based on various commands from the main control device 101, and these notifications are made by the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. In addition to notifying the transition of display modes, the display control device 81 side also performs various in-game presentation processes.

<In-game effects processing>
In this embodiment, bonus effects and continuous effects are provided as effects during various games. Bonus effects are effects that are performed in each game during a bonus state that is transitioned to based on winning the first BB or second BB. Continuous effects are effects that make the player look forward to a favorable result (winning a bonus, AT mode, CZ mode, VB mode, etc.), and can be continued over multiple games (four games in this embodiment), and are effects that notify the player of whether or not the favorable result was achieved in the final game.

<Bonus performance setting process>
First, the bonus effect setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 64. The bonus effect setting process is a process carried out in step S2308 of the start effect setting process (Fig. 59).

In the bonus effect setting process, step S2801 determines whether a bonus game will start from the current game. The bonus game refers to the game following the first or second BB win until the end of the bonus. A positive determination is made in step S2801 if a first or second BB win was achieved in the previous game. In this case, step S2802 determines the type of bonus for this game. More specifically, it determines whether the current bonus game is based on a first BB win or a second BB win. Then, in step S2803, the bonus effect setting process is set to correspond to the bonus type determined in step S2802. If a negative determination is made in step S2801, or after the processing of step S2803 has been executed, the bonus effect setting process ends.

Incidentally, in this embodiment, the content of the bonus effects in the bonus game based on the first BB win and the bonus game based on the second BB win are different enough to be discernible to the player. More specifically, in the bonus game based on the first BB win, a bonus effect is set in which a live-action video effect is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, while in the bonus game based on the second BB win, a bonus effect is set in which an animation effect is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. In addition, the sound effects (songs) output from the speaker 64 are different for the first BB and the second BB.

All bonus effects are implemented independently of the progress of the game, and are set to be repeated as long as the bonus game continues. For example, a five-minute video or animation effect is set as a unit effect, and when five minutes have passed since the start of the bonus effect and the unit effect ends, the unit effect is set to start again from the beginning. The effect on the auxiliary display unit 65 may be configured to stop on the screen at the end of the unit effect, with only the sound effects (songs) being repeated. The effect on the auxiliary display unit 65 may also be configured to be implemented in synchronization with the progress of each game, with only the sound effects (songs) being implemented independently of the progress of each game.

As described above, while the bonus effect based on a first BB win and the bonus effect based on a second BB win are distinguishable, the game results that triggered the first BB win and the second BB win are set to be indistinguishable or difficult to distinguish from the bonus effect. In other words, for bonus effects based on a first BB win, for example, if a first BB win is triggered by a double win of Toku Lip A and a double win of Toku Lip AB, the bonus effect is indistinguishable or difficult to distinguish; more specifically, the same bonus effect is executed. The same is true for bonus effects based on a second BB win; for example, the bonus effect triggered by a double win of Toku Lip A and a double win of Toku Lip AB are indistinguishable or difficult to distinguish, and the same bonus effect is executed.

<Processing for continuous performance>
The outline of the continuous performance will be explained with reference to FIG.

For example, as shown in FIG. 73(a), at the start of the first game in which a continuous effect is set, a display is displayed indicating the number of times the continuous effect will continue (the illustration shows a four-stage Daruma Otoshi effect corresponding to the four games of continuous effect). Then, at the end of the first game in which the continuous effect is set, an effect is displayed to notify whether the continuous effect will continue (the illustration shows an effect indicating that the first stage of Daruma Otoshi is successful, indicating that the continuous effect will continue). If the continuous effect is interrupted, at the end of the first game in which the continuous effect is set, an effect is displayed to notify that the continuous effect will end halfway (for example, an effect indicating that the first stage of Daruma Otoshi fails). The effect indicating whether the continuous effect will continue is the same for each game in the continuous effect.

As shown in Figure 73 (b), at the start of the second game in which a consecutive performance has been set, a display is displayed indicating the number of consecutive performances remaining (in the figure, a Daruma Otoshi performance with three stages remaining). Then, at the end of the second game, a performance is displayed to notify whether the consecutive performances will continue (in the figure, a performance is shown in which the second stage of the Daruma Otoshi has been successful, indicating that the consecutive performances will continue).

As shown in Figure 73 (c), at the start of the third game in which consecutive effects have been set, a display is displayed indicating the number of consecutive effects remaining (in the figure, a display of two daruma drop stages remaining). Then, at the end of the third game, a display is displayed to notify whether the consecutive effects will continue (in the figure, a display of the third daruma drop stage being successful, indicating that the consecutive effects will continue).

As shown in Figure 73 (d), at the start of the final game (fourth game) of the series, a display is displayed indicating that this is the final game of the series (in the figure, a one-stage Daruma Otoshi display). Then, at the end of the final game, a display is displayed indicating whether the result was advantageous to the player (in the figure, a display indicating that the final Daruma Otoshi was successful).

As described above, in continuous effects, the effects of the next game are set by continuing the effects of the previous game, and the effects of each game are continuous. It is also possible to clearly see which game the current game is since the start of the continuous effects (how many games remain until the end of the continuous effects).

In each game of continuous effects, the continuation rate of the continuous effects into the next game is set so that the further the game progresses, the higher the continuation rate becomes. In other words, the likelihood of announcing that the continuous effects will not continue is highest at the end of the first game of the continuous effects, and the further the game progresses, the lower the likelihood of announcing that the continuous effects will not continue. Therefore, in continuous effects, the level of player interest varies greatly depending on which game in the continuous effects the current game is, and interest increases as the game progresses from the starting game to the ending game.

Below, we will explain the processes related to the above-mentioned continuous effects, namely the transition trigger role notification process (step S2305) in the start-time effect setting process (Figure 59) and the continuous effect setting process (step S2309).

<Transition trigger role notification processing>
In the transition trigger role notification process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 65, first, in step S2901, a chance role lottery process is executed to determine whether or not to set a chance role as the role of the current game. In the chance role, as shown in FIG. 72(b), for example, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the word "Chance!!" and characters with exclamation marks are displayed corresponding to each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. In addition, the chance role is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (e.g., an electronic sound "Cui") is emitted from the speaker 64. In the chance role lottery process, for example, a lottery is executed so that a chance role occurs approximately half the time when a transition trigger role is won. Note that the winning probability of the chance role lottery process may vary depending on the type of transition trigger role, the display mode, the game status, a setting value, etc. In the following step S2902, it is determined whether or not the lottery process of step S2901 has been won. If a win has been achieved, a chance effect is set to be performed as the effect for this game in step S2903.

Here, we will explain the recommended game modes for achieving wins for each minor role, including transition trigger roles, in this slot machine 10.

Among the winning combinations in each game, the minor combinations that cannot be won depending on the timing of the operation of the stop switches 42-44, resulting in so-called missed wins, are set to Strong Cherry, Weak Cherry, Strong Watermelon, and Weak Watermelon. More specifically, as already explained, Strong Cherry is a combination that can be won by any of the 28th minor combination and the 32nd through 35th minor combinations, while the 28th minor combination symbol and the 32nd through 35th minor combination symbols on the left reel 32L are the "Cherry" symbol and the "Second Replay" symbol. In this case, in a three-bet game, if the left reel 32L is stopped when the 7th "Red Bell" symbol through the 20th "White Bell" symbol reach the top row of the left reel 32L, none of the 28th minor combination symbol and the 32nd through 35th minor combination symbols, the "Cherry" symbol and the "Second Replay" symbol, can be stopped on a winning line. Therefore, if the left reel 32L is stopped at these times, the strong cherry combination will be missed.

Furthermore, while the weak cherry is a winning combination for the 27th minor win symbol and any of the 32nd to 35th minor win symbols, the 27th minor win symbol and the 32nd to 35th minor win symbols on the left reel 32L are the "cherry" symbol and the "2nd replay" symbol. Even in this case, if the left reel 32L is stopped when the 7th "red bell" symbol through the 20th "white bell" symbol reach the top row of the left reel 32L in a 3-bet game, none of the 27th minor win symbol and the 32nd to 35th minor win symbols, the "cherry" symbol and the "2nd replay" symbol, can be stopped on a winning line. Therefore, if the left reel 32L is stopped at these times, the weak cherry symbol will be missed.

A strong watermelon is a combination in which either the 30th or 41st minor combination can win, and the 30th and 41st minor combination symbols on the left reel 32L are "watermelon" symbols. In this case, in a 3-bet game, if the left reel 32L is stopped when the 9th "red 7" symbol through the 3rd "white bell" symbol reach the top row of the left reel 32L, the 30th and 41st minor combination symbols, the "watermelon" symbols, cannot be stopped on an active line. Therefore, if the left reel 32L is stopped at these times, the strong watermelon combination will be missed.

A weak watermelon is a winning combination in which either the 29th or 41st minor combination can be won, and the 29th and 41st minor combination symbols on the left reel 32L are "watermelon" symbols. Even in this case, in a 3-bet game, if the left reel 32L is stopped when the 9th "red 7" symbol through the 3rd "white bell" symbol reach the top row of the left reel 32L, the 29th and 41st minor combination symbols, the "watermelon" symbols, cannot be stopped on an active line. Therefore, if the left reel 32L is stopped at these times, the weak watermelon combination will be missed.

In this case, if you want to stop the left reel 32L while still maintaining the possibility of winning for any of these combinations that could result in a miss, you need to stop the reel when the fourth "Cherry" symbol through the sixth "Second Replay" symbol reach the top of the left reel 32L. In the following explanation, this operation mode of the left reel 32L, which does not result in a miss, is also referred to as a specific operation mode (first operation mode), and the operation modes that result in the misses described above are also referred to as non-specific operation modes (second operation modes).

The chance effect set in step S2903 suggests that the current winning combination is one of the transition trigger combinations, but is set up so that it is impossible or difficult to determine which transition trigger combination it is. In other words, when the chance effect is activated, the winning combination for this game is likely to be one of the following: strong cherry, weak cherry, strong watermelon, weak watermelon, etc., but it is not possible to determine whether it is a strong cherry or weak cherry, whether it is a strong watermelon or weak watermelon, or whether it is a strong cherry or strong watermelon. Therefore, the player will operate the left reel 32L in the specific operation mode described above to avoid missing out on any winning combinations, regardless of which transition trigger combination they have won.

Furthermore, the chance effect does not necessarily occur in a game in which a transition trigger role is won, but rather occurs on the condition that the chance effect lottery process (step S2901) is won. Therefore, to avoid missing out on a transition trigger role, it is recommended that you operate the left reel 32L in the above-mentioned specific operation mode in every game, even during normal play.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2902, or after processing in step S2903, the process proceeds to step S2904. In step S2904, it is determined whether or not a premonition command is included as the current start command. If a premonition command is not included, it is determined in step S2905 whether or not an additional command is included as the current start command. If an additional command is not included, it is determined in step S2906 whether or not a bonus has been won. If a bonus has not been won, that is, if the lottery result was a win of a transition trigger role such as a strong cherry or weak watermelon, but the lottery for transition to CZ mode, AT mode, or VB mode or the lottery for adding on the number of continued games has not been won, and if the bonus has not been won, then in step S2907, lottery processing for the pseudo premonition mode is executed. Pseudo premonition mode is visually difficult to distinguish from premonition mode, but while premonition mode notifies the player of a favorable result (such as a win in CZ mode) based on the completion of the premonition game number, pseudo premonition mode ends without notifying the player of a favorable result based on the completion of the pseudo premonition game number.

In step S2907, a table for the pseudo-premonition mode lottery is obtained from the various table storage area 182a of ROM 182, and a lottery counter is obtained from the various counter area 183b, and a lottery is held to determine whether or not to execute the pseudo-premonition mode. The pseudo-premonition mode lottery table is set so that the probability of winning the pseudo-premonition mode lottery differs depending on the type of transition trigger role that has been won; for example, it is set so that a strong cherry has a higher probability of winning the pseudo-premonition mode lottery than a weak cherry.

In step S2908, based on the processing result of step S2907, it is determined whether or not the pseudo-omen mode lottery has been won. If the result has been won, in step S2909, a lottery process is performed to determine the number of games to be played in the pseudo-omen mode. This process corresponds to step S810 on the main control unit 101 side, and a pseudo-omen game number of 1 between 1 and 20 is randomly determined by lottery. However, as described above, unlike the premonition modes based on various wins, the number of pseudo-omen games is determined to be 20 games or less. Furthermore, zero games are not selected in the lottery for the number of pseudo-omen games. In the following step S2910, a process is performed to set the number of pseudo-omen games determined in step S2909 in a continuous effect counter provided in the various counter area 183b. The continuous effect counter is a counter for keeping track of the number of games until the result is announced, and is decremented by one for each game. For example, in a configuration in which four games are played consecutively, the consecutive performance begins in the game in which the consecutive performance counter reaches 4, and the result is announced in the game in which the consecutive performance counter reaches 0. In this embodiment, when the premonition mode or pseudo-premonition mode is set, the premonition mode or pseudo-premonition mode ends after a consecutive performance. Then, by inputting the number of pseudo-premonition games into the consecutive performance counter in step S2910, the consecutive performance will begin when the number of games remaining in the pseudo-premonition mode corresponds to the start of the consecutive performance (four games remaining).

In step S2911, a pseudo flag indicating pseudo premonition mode is set in the various flag storage area 183a. In the following step S2912, a continuous performance flag is set. After that, the transition trigger role notification process ends. Also, if a positive judgment is made in any of steps S2904 to S2906, or a negative judgment is made in step S2908, the transition trigger role notification process ends.

<Continuous performance setting process>
Next, the continuous effect setting process performed in step S2309 of the start-time effect setting process (FIG. 59) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S3001, it is determined whether the currently received start command includes a premonition command. If a premonition command is included, in step S3002, the number of premonition games in premonition mode included in the premonition command is entered into the continuous effect counter. As a result, when the number of remaining games in premonition mode corresponds to the start of continuous effects (4 games remaining), continuous effects will begin. Note that if the premonition game number of 1 to 3 games is entered into the continuous effect counter in step S3002, the continuous effects will start from the middle. For example, if 2 is entered into the continuous effect counter in step S3002, the continuous effects will start from the current game and will be performed from the third game of the continuous effects as shown in Figure 73 (c). Furthermore, if 0 is entered into the continuous effect counter, i.e., if a win notification for AT mode or the like is made without going through the premonition mode, continuous effects will not be executed. After processing in step S3002, the continuous effect flag is set in step S3003.

If a negative judgment is made in step S3001, or after executing the processing of step S3003, the process proceeds to step S3004. In step S3004, it is determined whether the continuous performance flag is set. If the continuous performance flag is set, the process subtracts 1 from the continuous performance counter in step S3005. Then, in step S3006, it is determined whether the continuous performance counter is a number (0 to 3) corresponding to continuous performance. If the continuous performance counter is a number corresponding to continuous performance, it is determined in step S3007 whether the pseudo flag is set. If the pseudo flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S3008, where the performance table for this premonition is obtained from the various table memory area 182a. Then, in step S3009, the performance data for the corresponding continuous performance is identified from the performance table for this premonition and the continuous performance counter, the corresponding performance data is obtained from the performance data memory area 182b of ROM 182, and the process is performed to set it as the current continuous performance. The continuous effect data specified by this premonition effect table is effect data indicating that the continuous effect will continue into the next game if the continuous effect counter is 1-3, and effect data indicating that the current continuous effect will end successfully if the continuous effect counter is 0.

If it is determined in step S3007 that the pseudo flag is set, the process proceeds to step S3010. In step S3010, a pseudo premonition effect table is obtained from the various table storage area 182a. Then, in step S3011, the effect data for the corresponding continuous effect is identified from the pseudo premonition effect table and the continuous effect counter, the corresponding effect data is obtained from the effect data storage area 182b in ROM 182, and processing is performed to set this as the current continuous effect. The continuous effect data identified from the pseudo premonition effect table is either effect data indicating that the continuous effect will continue into the next game or effect data indicating that it will not continue if the continuous effect counter is 1 to 3, and effect data indicating that the current continuous effect will end in failure if the continuous effect counter is 0.

Note that when the continuous effect counter is 1 to 3, the effect data specified from the pseudo premonition effect table includes those in which no continuous effect is set. For example, when the continuous effect counter is 3 or 2, no continuous effect data is set; when the continuous effect counter is 1, effect data for the first game of the continuous effect is set, indicating that the continuous effect will continue until the next game, as shown in Figure 73(a); and when the continuous effect counter is 0, effect data for the second game of the continuous effect is set, indicating that the continuous effect will not continue until the next game, as shown in Figure 73(b). This makes it possible to set an effect in which the continuous effect is interrupted midway in a game in which the number of pseudo premonition games in the pseudo premonition mode is 0.

After performing the processing of step S3009 or step S3011, step S3012 determines whether the continuous performance counter is 0. If the continuous performance counter is 0, step S3013 performs processing to clear the continuous performance flag and pseudo flag. If the pseudo flag is not set, that state is maintained. If a negative judgment is made in step S3004, step S3006, or step S2912, or after performing the processing of step S3013, this continuous performance setting processing is terminated.

As described above, in this slot machine 10, a lottery process is performed on the main control unit 101 based on the insertion of a medal as a gaming medium and the start operation of the start lever 41, and each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R begins to spin. Each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R stops based on the stop operation of the stop switches 42-44. If the combination of symbols that stops on an active line corresponds to the result of the lottery process, the corresponding bonus is awarded. In this configuration, multiple infinite RT states with different probabilities of a replay being awarded as a result of the lottery process are provided, and the infinite RT state is entered when a corresponding promotion replay or fall replay is won. Whether or not a corresponding replay is won is determined by the result of the win/lose lottery, as well as the operation order of the stop switches 42-44. The operation order is notified by winning the display mode transition lottery, which is conducted based on the result of the lottery process. The result of the lottery process is a push order bell, and depending on the order in which the stop switches 42-44 are operated, it is possible to achieve this push order bell winning and win medals. By transitioning to the second or third RT state, which is an infinite RT state in which the replay probability is improved, and transitioning to a display mode in which the operation order is announced, it is possible to achieve the push order bell winning in that infinite RT state with an improved replay probability, making it possible to win a large number of medals.

As already explained, when switching to AT mode, for example, a mode where a large number of medals can be expected to be won, an initial number of games (50) is set, and play in AT mode is possible for that initial number of games. If an additional lottery is won in AT mode, the number of games to continue in AT mode is increased, and the number of games that can be played in AT mode increases. As a result, the number of medals that can be won in that AT mode can also increase.

Furthermore, in this slot machine 10, in addition to the infinite RT states of the second RT state and the third RT state described above, a fourth RT state is provided as a fixed RT state in which the number of playable games is predetermined, as a state in which the replay probability is improved (see FIG. 26). As already explained, the fourth RT state is entered when transition replay 1 or 2 is won in the second RT state or the third RT state, and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the operation sequence corresponding to the 11th replay win or the 12th replay win. In this embodiment, by transitioning to the fourth RT state just before the end of the AT mode that results in the second RT state or the third RT state described above, it is possible to avoid the end of the high RT state after the end of the AT mode due to the lack of a push order notification when a drop replay is won, as occurs in the second RT state or the third RT state, and to extend the high RT state.

First, the lottery table for the 4th RT state will be explained with reference to Figure 74. The lottery table for the 4th RT state is a table selected in step S302 of the lottery process based on the fact that the 4th RT setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c.

Compared to the lottery tables for other RT states (see Figure 22, etc.), the lottery table for the fourth RT state has different point values PV for IV = 1 to 14, while the same point values PV are set for other index values IV. Therefore, when using this lottery table to determine whether a winning combination is a winning combination, the probability of winning when IV = 15 to 58 is equal to the probability of winning in other RT states, the probability of winning when IV = 1 is approximately 1 in 1.25, and there is no winning when IV = 2 to 14. In other words, when transitioning to the fourth RT state, as with the second and third RT states, the probability of losing is lower compared to the normal game state and the first RT state, giving the player an advantage. Furthermore, the total replay probability in the fourth RT state is set to be the same as that of the second and third RT states. On the other hand, when the game state transitions to the fourth RT state, the first promotion replays 1-4, fall replays 1-3, second promotion replays 1 and 2, and BAR replays 1 and 2, which trigger a transition in the game state, are not won, and a transition to the game state based on these replay wins does not occur. Also, as already explained, even if a transition result stops in the fourth RT state, there is no transition to the first RT state. Then, the fourth RT state transitions to the normal game state after a predetermined number of games have been played.

When playing the 4th RT state in AT mode, you can expect to gain medals similar to those in the 2nd and 3rd RT states; more specifically, you can expect to gain approximately 1.90 medals per game. In contrast, when playing the 4th RT state in normal mode, the expected medal gain is smaller than when playing in AT mode, and no medal gain is expected. More specifically, you can expect to lose approximately 0.06 medals per game. In other words, when playing the 4th RT state in normal mode, you cannot expect to gain medals, but you can also limit the loss of medals (there is no loss), allowing you to wait for the next AT mode win or BB win while minimizing the loss of medals you have. Note that when playing in normal mode, the number of medal gains is the same in the 4th RT state, the 2nd RT state, and the 3rd RT state; even when playing in normal mode in the 2nd and 3rd RT states, no medal gain or loss occurs.

The number of games in the fourth RT state is set in step S519. The fixed RT game number setting process performed in step S519 will now be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 75.

In step S3101, it is determined whether an 11th replay win has been achieved. If an 11th replay win has been achieved, in step S3102, a process is executed to input "50" as the number of games to be continued in this fourth RT state into the fixed RT game number counter provided in the various counter area 106e of RAM 106, and then the fixed RT game number setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3101 that an 11th replay win has not been achieved, this means that a 12th replay win has been achieved. In this case, in step S3103, a process is executed to input "200" as the number of games to be continued in this fourth RT state into the fixed RT game number counter, and then the fixed RT game number setting process is terminated.

The fixed RT game number counter input in step S3102 or step S3103 is decremented by 1 for each game by the subtraction process in step S502. Then, when the fixed RT game number counter reaches 0, the fourth RT setting flag is cleared in step S504, and the game state transitions to the normal game state.

<Fixed RT Processing>
Next, we will explain the process for causing or preventing a transition to the 4th RT state during AT mode. This process is provided as a fixed RT process in step S1904 of the second section display process (FIG. 54).

As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 76, in step S3201, it is determined whether an AT notification flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. As already explained, the AT notification flag is set when the player wins the lottery to transition to the AT mode and is notified of the winning lottery to transition to the AT mode. It is a flag that is cleared when the AT mode ends. A situation in which the AT notification flag is set indicates a situation in which a push order notification may occur. If the AT notification flag is not set, the fixed RT processing ends. If the AT notification flag is set, proceed to step S3202. Note that the AT notification flag is not cleared even if the game state transitions to the second RT state or the third RT state and the AT mode is initiated, and then the game state transitions to the BB state, or even if the game state transitions to the first RT state before the AT mode ends due to an operational error, etc. Therefore, as described above, proceed to step S3202 even if the game state transitions to the first RT state before the AT mode ends.

In step S3202, it is determined whether the number of games remaining in AT mode has reached a predetermined value of 10. The predetermined value determined in step S3202 is a value that is less than the number of games to continue (50 or 200) when transitioning to the fourth RT state. If a negative determination is made in step S3202, the number of games remaining in AT mode is greater than 10, and the AT mode can still continue, the fixed RT processing is terminated. If the number of games remaining to continue in AT mode has reached 10 and the AT mode is approaching the end, proceed to step S3203.

In step S3203, a process is executed to set a transition notification flag in the various flag storage area 106d of RAM 106. The transition notification flag is a flag that allows the CPU 102 to know that a state has been reached in which transition to the fourth RT state is permitted. The transition notification flag is cleared when the AT mode ends. After executing the process of step S3203, in step S3204, the transition command is set as an output target to the display control device 81, and then the fixed RT process is terminated.

As already explained, a transition to the 4th RT state occurs based on winning Transition Replays 1 and 2. More specifically, if the operation sequence of stop switches 42-44 when Transition Replays 1 and 2 are won matches the 11th or 12th replay win, a transition to the 4th RT state occurs. Here, in the 2nd RT state and the 3rd RT state, which are primarily occupied during AT mode, the probability of winning Transition Replays 1 and 2 is approximately 1 in 6.5 (Figures 24 and 25). Furthermore, when comparing the probability of winning Transition Replays 1 and 2 with the number obtained by dividing 1 by 10, which is set as the predetermined value above (1 in 10), the probability of winning Transition Replays 1 and 2 is greater (higher probability). In this case, the probability of winning Transition Replays 1 and 2 and the predetermined value (10) for setting the Transition Notification Flag can be said to be set so that it is possible to win Transition Replays 1 and 2 at least once during the 10 games from when the number of games remaining in AT mode reaches 10 and the Transition Notification Flag is set until the number of games remaining in AT mode reaches 0.

<Fixed RT Status Notification Processing>
Next, the process related to the fixed RT state on the display control device 81 side will be described. As such a process, the fixed RT state notification process of step S2718 in the all stop effect setting process (FIG. 63) is provided. As already explained, the all stop effect setting process is a process that is performed based on a command for all stop effect from the main control device 101, and is a process for an effect that occurs when all reels 32L, 32M, 32R stop.

As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 77, in step S3301, the above-mentioned transition command is received and it is determined whether the AT mode is nearing the end. If a transition command has been received, in step S3302, a process is executed to set a transition replay notification flag in the various flag storage area 183a of RAM 183. The transition replay notification flag is a flag that allows the CPU 181 to understand that a transition command is being received from the main control device 101. Then, in step S3303, a process is executed to set a first RT transition period effect. In the first RT transition period effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 78(a), the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the text "Chance to extend RT," and also displays a display (for example, a female character display or explanatory text) suggesting that the infinite RT state (second RT state or third RT state) will not end when the AT mode ends, but will transition to a fixed RT state, thereby extending the high RT state itself. Additionally, during the first RT transition period, the speaker 64 is controlled to emit a corresponding sound effect (for example, a gentle female voice saying "You can do it").

If a negative judgment is made in step S3301, or after the processing of step S3303 is executed, a determination is made in step S3304 as to whether the AT mode has ended for this game. If the AT mode has ended, the above-mentioned transition replay notification flag is cleared in step S3305, and a process for setting the second RT transition period effect is executed in step S3306. In the second RT transition period effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 79(a), the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the text "Chance to extend RT! It's still going on!", and also displays (e.g., a male character display or explanatory text) suggesting that the high RT state itself may be extended by transitioning to a fixed RT state before the infinite RT state (second RT state or third RT state) ends after the AT mode ends. In addition, in the second RT transition period effect, the speaker 64 is controlled to emit a corresponding sound effect (e.g., a male's rough voice saying "Don't give up! It's still okay!").

Here, we will explain the differences between when the first transition period effect is performed and when the second transition period effect is performed. The first transition period effect is performed when the AT mode is about to end, as described above, and more specifically, when the number of games remaining in the AT mode is 10. In this case, the transition replay notification flag is set, and if transition replays 1 and 2 are won in this situation (before the AT mode ends), a positive judgment is made in step S2413 in the push order notification process (Figure 60), and a push order notification is generated in step S2414 for the operation sequence that will result in the 11th replay win or the 12th replay win. As a result, at the end of the AT mode, it is possible to transition the RT state from the second RT state or the third RT state to the fourth RT state. In other words, when the first transition period effect is performed, the AT mode will end thereafter, but if Fall Replay 1 or 2 is won before the AT mode ends, a push order notification will occur, allowing the player to transition to a fixed RT state and maintain a high RT state even after the AT mode ends. In this case, in the transition replay winning game, a push order notification corresponding to the 11th replay win or the 12th replay win may be displayed, along with a presentation celebrating the possibility of achieving the 11th replay win or the 12th replay win. For example, as shown in FIG. 78(b), the auxiliary display unit 65 may be controlled to re-appear the character that appeared in the first RT transition period effect along with the push order notification effect, and the speaker 64 may be controlled to play a corresponding sound effect (e.g., a gentle female voice saying "Go for it!!").

On the other hand, the second transition period effect occurs when the AT mode ends, as described above. More specifically, when the AT mode ends, the push order notification effect does not occur from the next game. In this case, the transition replay notification flag is cleared. If transition replays 1 and 2 are won in this situation, the push order notification command is not received from the main control unit 101. Therefore, a negative judgment is made in step S2401 in the push order notification processing (Figure 60), and the push order notification effect does not occur. In other words, the second transition period effect occurs when the AT mode has already ended, but if a transition replay is won before a fall replay is won or won, and the operation sequence of stop switches 42-44 in the transition replay winning game matches the 11th or 12th replay winning, the high RT state can be maintained. In this case, it is recommended to generate an effect in the transition replay winning game that indicates the possibility of achieving the 11th or 12th replay winning. For example, as shown in Figure 79 (b), the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the push order as "???", and the character that appeared in the second RT transition period performance is made to reappear, and the speaker 64 is controlled to emit a corresponding sound effect (for example, a rough male voice saying "Mine is pretty rough").

If a negative judgment is made in step S3304, or after the processing of step S3306 has been executed, the process proceeds to step S3307. In step S3307, it is determined whether a first fixed RT start command has been received. The first fixed RT start command is a command that is output when an 11th replay win or a 12th replay win is achieved and the transition notification flag is set in the winning result response processing (Figure 49) on the main control device 101 side (step S1524). If the first fixed RT start command has been received, processing is performed in step S3308 to set the first fixed RT start effect. In the first fixed RT start effect, for example, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the text "RT extension successful!!" and displays a display suggesting that the high RT state will be extended (for example, a female character display or explanatory text). Additionally, in the first fixed RT start performance, the speaker 64 is controlled to emit a corresponding sound effect (for example, a gentle female voice saying "You did it! You can do more!").

After executing the processing of step S3308, processing is executed in step S3309 to set the first fixed RT effect flag. This effect flag is referenced in the display mode setting processing of step S2301 during the start-time effect setting processing (Figure 59). For example, if the first fixed RT effect flag is set, in step S2301, the effect content of the current game (e.g., the background color of the auxiliary display unit 65) is set to content that makes it possible to recognize that the current game is in the fourth RT state.

If a negative judgment is made in step S3307, or after executing the processing of step S3309, the process proceeds to step S3310. In step S3310, it is determined whether or not a second fixed RT start command has been received. The second fixed RT start command is a command output when an 11th replay win or a 12th replay win is achieved in the winning result response processing (FIG. 49) on the main control device 101 side, and the transition notification flag is not set (step S1525). Incidentally, when the transition notification flag is not set, this corresponds to before the transition notification flag is set or when the AT mode is not in effect, i.e., mainly after the AT mode has ended. If the second fixed RT start command has been received, it is determined in step S3311 whether or not the AT mode is in effect. If the AT mode is in effect, the fixed RT status notification processing ends. A positive judgment in step S3311 occurs when there is a transition from the second RT state or the third RT state to the fourth RT state during AT mode (before the final transition notification flag is set). In this case, the replay probability itself does not change, and the presence or absence of a push order notification does not change, so no notification for that purpose is made.

If it is determined in step S3311 that the player is not in AT mode, processing is performed in step S3312 to set the second fixed RT start effect. In the second fixed RT start effect, for example, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the text "Yay! Life extension successful!!" along with a display suggesting that the high RT state will be extended (for example, a male character display or explanatory text). In addition, in the second fixed RT start effect, control is performed so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, a gentle male voice saying "Yesssssss!") is emitted from the speaker 64.

After executing the processing of step S3312, processing is executed in step S3313 to set the second fixed RT effect flag. This effect flag is referenced in the display mode setting processing of step S2301 during the start-time effect setting processing (FIG. 59). For example, if the second fixed RT effect flag is set, in step S2301, the effect content of the current game (e.g., the background color of the auxiliary display unit 65) is set to an effect that enables the player to understand that the current game is in the fourth RT state, and is set to an effect that is different enough from when the first fixed RT effect flag is set to be distinguishable by the player. If a negative judgment is made in step S3310, or after executing the processing of step S3313, the fixed RT state notification processing is terminated.

<High RT state is extended>
The manner in which the high RT state after the end of AT mode is extended by utilizing the infinite RT state and fixed RT state will be explained with reference to the timing charts of Figures 80 to 82.

First, we will explain what happens when AT mode ends without transitioning to the fixed RT state (fourth RT state).

Let's say that during AT mode, at timing t1, when the number of remaining games in that AT mode is greater than 10, you win Transition Replay 1 or Transition Replay 2. In this case, even though you're in AT mode, the transition notification flag is not set, so no push order notification for a fixed RT transition corresponding to the 11th replay win or the 12th replay win is made, and instead a push order notification for no RT transition corresponding to the 1st replay win is made. As a result, the RT state remains in the second RT state or the infinite RT state of the third RT state.

At timing t2, when the number of games remaining in AT mode reaches 10, the transition notification flag is set. When the transition notification flag is set, the push order notification when a transition replay is won changes from a push order notification for no RT transition to a push order notification for a fixed RT transition. However, in this example, a transition replay will not be won when the transition notification flag is set.

When the number of remaining games in AT mode reaches 0 at time t3, the notification mode (display mode) transitions from AT mode to normal mode. The transition notification flag is then cleared, and even if a transition replay is subsequently won, the push order notification will no longer occur.

If one of Fall Replays 1 to 3 is won at timing t4, no push order notification will be generated, and if the operation sequence of stop switches 42 to 44 corresponds to the second replay win, the RT state will transition to the normal RT state of the first RT state.

Next, we will explain how to transition to the fourth RT state at the end of AT mode.

Even if you win either Transition Replay 1 or 2 at time t5 when you are in AT mode and the number of games remaining in that AT mode is greater than 10, just like at time t1 above, a push order notification for no RT transition will be made, rather than a push order notification for a fixed RT transition. As a result, the RT state will remain in the second RT state or the infinite RT state of the third RT state. Then, when the number of games remaining in the AT mode reaches 10 at time t6, the transition notification flag will be set.

If you win either Transition Replay 1 or 2 at time t7, when the transition notification flag is set, a push order notification for transitioning to a fixed RT will occur. As a result, by operating stop switches 42-44 in the order indicated by the push order notification, it is possible to transition from the RT state to a fixed RT state (fourth RT state).

When the number of remaining games in AT mode reaches 0 at time t8, the notification mode (display mode) transitions from AT mode to normal mode. However, in the fourth RT state, it is set so that fall replays 1 to 3 cannot be won, and the RT state will continue until time t10, when a predetermined number of games (50 or 200) have been played. In this case, the high RT state is extended beyond time t9, which corresponds to time t4 when the transition to the normal RT state (first RT state) occurred in Figure 80 above.

Next, we will explain how to transition to the fourth RT state after exiting AT mode.

When the number of games remaining in the AT mode reaches 10 at time t11, the transition notification flag is set. This example shows a case where a transition replay is not won by the end of the AT mode. In other words, by the time the number of games remaining in the AT mode reaches 0 at time t12, a transition replay has not been won, and the transition notification flag is cleared.

As already explained, even after the AT mode ends, the second RT state or the third RT state will continue until the second replay win is achieved. The timing of t13 indicates that a transition replay is won before the second replay win is achieved, and the stop switches 42-44 are operated in the stop order corresponding to the 11th or 12th replay win. In this case, the RT state will transition to a fixed RT state, and the high RT state will be extended for a predetermined number of games in the fixed RT state from the game where the transition was successful (until the timing of t14).

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent effects:

When the number of games remaining in AT mode reaches 10, the transition notification flag is set, and a push order notification for transitioning to the fixed RT state may occur when a transition replay is won. This makes it possible to transition to the fixed RT state, where a number of games greater than the number of games remaining in AT mode is set as the specified number of games. This makes it possible to extend the high RT state after the end of AT mode, improving the playability of the AT mode and its associated games without increasing the advantage of AT mode too much.

Here, a transition to the fixed RT state can occur on the condition that a transition replay is won after the transition notification flag is set; setting the transition notification flag does not necessarily result in a transition to the fixed RT state. By doing this, after the transition notification flag is set, that is, at the end of the AT mode, attention is drawn to whether or not a transition replay will be won, dramatically enhancing the playability of the end of the AT mode. Moreover, because it is linked to the lottery results of each game, at the end of the AT mode, players will put more force into operating the start lever 41, making it possible to provide an intense sense of excitement.

The probability of winning Transition Replays 1 and 2 and the timing (number of games) at which the Transition Notification Flag is set are set so that Transition Replays 1 and 2 can be expected to be won at least once in the games between when the Transition Notification Flag is set and when the AT mode ends. This creates a gameplay in which, unless the player is extremely unlucky, a transition to the fixed RT state can be expected towards the end of the AT mode. In other words, the game can basically be played with the assumption that a transition to the fixed RT state will occur, and by maintaining the fixed RT state even after the AT mode ends, the sense of loss and accomplishment felt at the end of the AT mode can be alleviated, motivating players to continue playing after the AT mode ends.

Transition Replays 1 and 2 are set as overlapping roles not only with the 11th and 12th replays, which result in a transition to the fixed RT state, but also with the 2nd replay, which results in a fall to the 1st RT state. Furthermore, depending on the order of operation of stop switches 42-44 when Transition Replays 1 and 2 are won, it is possible to win the 2nd replay rather than the 11th or 12th replay. This requires more careful stop operations when Transition Replays 1 and 2 are won, which increases the attention paid to winning Transition Replays 1 and 2.

Furthermore, Transition Replays 1 and 2 are set as overlapping roles not only with the 11th replay and 12th replay, which result in a transition to the fixed RT state, but also with the 1st replay, which does not result in a transition to the RT state. Depending on the operation order of stop switches 42-44 when Transition Replays 1 and 2 are won, the 1st replay win may be achieved, rather than the 11th replay win or the 12th replay win. This makes it possible to avoid a transition to the fixed RT state if Transition Replays 1 and 2 are won before the end of the AT mode, i.e., before the transition notification flag is set.

Even if a transition to a fixed RT state occurs towards the end of AT mode, the number of remaining games in AT mode will be carried over. In other words, AT mode itself will end when the remaining number of games has been played, regardless of the type of high RT state (second RT state to fourth RT state). By doing this, if a transition to a fixed RT state is made too early after the transition notification flag is set, the benefits of AT mode will not be eroded; only the length of the extension of the high RT state will differ. This means that the enjoyment of extending the high RT state can be enjoyed more purely without compromising the fun of AT mode.

Even if the AT mode ends in the second RT state or the third RT state, the high RT state will continue until the second replay win is achieved. However, if a transition replay is won in the second RT state or the third RT state (return interval) after the end of the AT mode, it is possible to transition to the fixed RT state if the player operates stop switches 42-44 in the same order as the 11th replay win or the 12th replay win. In other words, this configuration allows for the extension of the high RT state after the end of the AT mode until the end of the high RT state. This also makes it possible to improve the playability of the AT mode and the associated games without increasing the advantage of the AT mode too much.

<Modification 1>
In this modified example, a case where a transition to the fixed RT state occurs by achieving the 11th re-game winning or the 12th re-game winning before the transition notification flag is set in the AT mode will be described. First, based on the timing charts of Figures 83 and 84, a situation where a transition to the fixed RT state occurs will be described.

Suppose that during AT mode, at time t15, when the number of remaining games in that AT mode is greater than 10, a player wins Transition Replay 1 or Transition Replay 2. In this case, because the transition notification flag is not set even during AT mode, a push order notification for transition to a fixed RT is not issued, and a push order notification for no transition to RT is issued. However, the player is free to choose the order in which to operate stop switches 42-44; it is possible to operate them without following the push order notification, and it is also possible to mistakenly operate them in an order that differs from the push order notification. For example, suppose that at time t15, even when a push order notification for no transition to RT is issued, the player operates stop switches 42-44 in the order corresponding to an 11th or 12th replay win. In this case, a transition to the fixed RT state occurs, even though the number of remaining games in the AT mode is greater than 10.

For example, Figure 83 shows a situation where the number of games that can be played in fixed RT state is greater than the number of games remaining in AT mode at timing t15.

In this case, at time t16 the number of games remaining in AT mode becomes 10 and the transition notification flag is set, and at time t17 the number of games remaining in AT mode becomes 0 and the AT mode ends, but during this time the RT state remains in the fixed RT state. And, as the number of games remaining in AT mode at the time of transition to the fixed RT state is less than the number of games that can be played in the fixed RT state as described above, the fixed RT state continues until time t18, which is later than time t17. In this case, at the very least, the AT mode can be operated in a high RT state, and the player can fully enjoy the benefits of the AT mode, such as being able to reduce the loss of medals due to the high RT state, while anticipating an increase in medals due to the push order notification of the push order bell.

On the other hand, Figure 84 shows a scene where a transition to the fixed RT state occurs at timing t19, when the number of remaining games in the AT mode is greater than the number of games that can be played in the fixed RT state.

In this case, the fixed RT state entered at time t19 ends at time t20 while the player is still in AT mode. In other words, at time t20 the game state transitions to the first RT state, a low RT state (normal RT state) with a low replay probability. Even if the player transitions to the second RT state (high RT state) at time t21 due to the push order notification when the first promotion replay 1-2 is won, at least the game from time t20 to time t21 will be consumed in the low RT state, meaning that the player will not be able to enjoy the benefits of the AT mode described above. Therefore, this modified example is configured to notify the player that such a situation has occurred.

After the transition to the high RT state at time t21, the transition notification flag is set at time t22, the AT mode ends at time t23, and the high RT state ends at time t24 with the second replay win.

Figure 85 is a flowchart showing the fixed RT status notification process in this modified example.

The processing of steps S3401 to S3413 is the same as the processing of steps S3301 to S3313 described above. When the number of games remaining in AT mode reaches 10, the transition replay notification flag is set and the first RT transition period effect is set, and when the AT mode ends, the second RT transition period effect is set. Also, if a transition to the fixed RT state occurs when the number of games remaining in AT mode is between 0 and 10, the first fixed RT start effect is set, and if a transition to the fixed RT state occurs after the AT mode ends, the second fixed RT start effect is set.

In this modified example, the processing when a transition to the fixed RT state occurs while in AT mode is different. That is, if it is determined in step S3411 that the game is in AT mode, in this modified example, the process proceeds to step S3414, where the number of games that can be played in the fixed RT state to be transitioned to this time is compared with the number of games remaining in AT mode, and it is determined whether the number of games that can be played in the fixed RT state is equal to or greater than the number of games remaining in AT mode. That is, it is determined whether the transition to the fixed RT state this time is the scene shown in Figure 83 or the scene shown in Figure 84. If it is determined that the number of games that can be played in the fixed RT state is equal to or greater than the number of games remaining in AT mode and the scene shown in Figure 83 is present, the fixed RT state notification processing ends without setting the fixed RT start effect, as in the first embodiment above.

If it is determined in step S3414 that the number of games that can be played in the fixed RT state is less than the number of games remaining in the AT mode and the situation is as shown in Figure 84, processing is performed in step S3415 to set the third fixed RT start effect. In the third fixed RT start effect, for example, as shown in Figure 86(a), the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the text "Damn...", and also displays a display suggesting that a situation may arise in which the AT mode must be exhausted in a low RT state (for example, a dejected male character display or explanatory text). In addition, in the third fixed RT start effect, control is performed so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, a panicked male voice saying "It's bad, it's bad") is emitted from the speaker 64.

After executing the processing of step S3415, the process of setting the third RT effect flag is executed in step S3416, and then this fixed RT state notification processing is terminated. For example, if the third fixed RT effect flag is set, in the above-mentioned step S2301, the effect content of the current game (e.g., the background color of the auxiliary display unit 65) is set to an effect that allows the player to understand that the AT mode will be consumed in the current or future low RT state, and is set to an effect that is sufficiently different from the effect when the first fixed RT effect flag or the second fixed RT effect flag is set to be discernible to the player. Then, for example, after the fixed RT state ends and the player transitions to the low RT state, until the first promotion replay 1 or 2 is won and the third replay win is established, it is recommended that the push order notification effect and the text "RT Returning" be displayed, as shown in FIG. 86(b). By doing this, the player can clearly understand that a disadvantage has been incurred by causing the transition to the fixed RT state before the first RT transition period presentation occurs, which can increase the player's motivation to play by trying to make up for the disadvantage in future play, and can also encourage the player to carefully check the notification content before playing to avoid suffering such disadvantages in the future.

In the above-mentioned variant 1, the configuration of the fixed RT state notification process and the presentation content were particularly described as changes to the processing and configuration from the first embodiment. However, other configurations may be modified as appropriate to match the changes to the processing and configuration described in the above-mentioned variant 1. For example, if the fixed RT state initiated by the above-mentioned third fixed RT start presentation ends and the player returns from a low RT state to a high RT state, the presentation may be different from the presentation when the player returns to a high RT state after transitioning to a low RT state due to a push order error or the like during AT mode. In this case, when the third replay win is achieved, the presentation may be configured to differ as described above depending not only on the presence or absence of the AT notification flag, but also on the presence or absence of the third fixed RT presentation flag. The same applies to the following variants and embodiments, where modifications other than those described above should be made as appropriate.

<Modification 2>
In this modified example, a modified example will be described in which the number of games that can be played in the fixed RT state is equal to or greater than the number of games remaining in the AT mode.

As already explained, it is possible to extend the high RT state by transitioning to a fixed RT state after the number of games remaining in AT mode reaches 10 and the transition replay notification flag is set. Furthermore, even in the situation shown in Figure 83, the high RT state continues at least until the end of AT mode, so the benefits of AT mode can be fully enjoyed. However, even in these situations, the degree of advantage to the player may vary depending on the number of games at which the transition to the fixed RT state occurs.

In other words, as shown in Figure 87 (b), when comparing a case in which a transition replay is won in situation (1) during AT mode, where a push order notification may occur, causing a transition to a fixed RT state, with a case in which a transition replay is won in situation (2) after (1), where a push order notification may occur, causing a transition to a fixed RT state, the high RT state continues longer in the fixed RT state (2) than in the fixed RT state (1). In other words, the extension of the high RT state is longer in case (2) than in case (1). Therefore, it can be said that it is advantageous to cause a transition to a fixed RT state later in AT mode.

On the other hand, a transition to the fixed RT state can occur by winning transition replays 1 and 2, and there may be situations where a transition replay is not won between the time the number of remaining games in AT mode reaches 10 and the time it reaches 0. For example, if a transition replay is won in scene (3) after the AT mode has ended, it is possible that a transition to the fixed RT state will be successful depending on the order in which stop switches 42-44 are operated in that game, but it is also possible that a second replay win will be made, ending the high RT state.

In this modified example, a transition replay winning game involves allowing the player to choose whether or not to transition to a fixed RT state, while taking into consideration the difference in advantageous degree depending on the number of games remaining in the AT mode at the time of such a transition replay winning. For example, as shown in FIG. 87(a), in a transition replay winning game, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the words "A fateful choice!!" and provides a notification suggesting that, depending on the order of operations, a transition to a fixed RT state may occur, or neither a transition to a fixed RT state nor a transition to a low RT state may occur. In this case, by notifying the number of games remaining in the AT mode (displayed as "8G remaining" in the figure), the player is helped to consider the difference in advantageous degree depending on the number of games remaining in the AT mode.

When a win occurs with index value IV = 13 or 14 corresponding to a transition replay, the winning combinations may be set to 1st replay, 11th replay, and 12th replay, with no 2nd replay. In other words, depending on the operation sequence when a transition replay is won, either a transition to a fixed RT state or no transition to an RT state may occur, and a transition to a low RT state may not occur. In this case, the operation sequence when a transition replay is won can be further simplified. As shown in Figure 87(a), stopping the left reel 32L first will result in a 1st replay win, and stopping the right reel 32R first will result in an 11th or 12th replay win. This makes it easy to understand by requiring the player to choose either the left or right reel, and is expected to improve the player's understanding of the game.

The specific configuration of the operation sequence corresponding to each replay when a transition replay is won is as follows, for example. If the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the order left → center → right and left → right → center, the first replay win is achieved, and if they are stopped in the order right → center → left and right → left → center, the 11th replay win or the 12th replay win is achieved. Also, if they are stopped in the order center → left → right, the first replay win is achieved, and if they are stopped in the order center → right → left, the 11th replay win or the 12th replay win is achieved.

In addition, a transition replay in which an operation sequence and winning mode that allows selection of either the left or right side is set may be provided separately from transition replays 1 and 2 in the first embodiment, and these may coexist in a configuration.

<Modification 3>
In this modified example, the transition to the fixed RT state is caused by taking into account the amount of the subsequent addition notification. First, the subsequent addition notification process will be explained using the flowchart in Figure 88. The subsequent addition notification process is a process performed in step S1502 in the winning result response process (Figure 49) by the main control device 101.

In step S3501, it is determined whether the current display mode is AT mode, VB mode, or specialized zone by determining whether the AT notification flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. If it is not one of these modes, the subsequent addition notification process is terminated. If it is AT mode, VB mode, or specialized zone mode, it is determined in step S3502 whether it is in a bonus state. If it is in either a BB state based on the first BB or second BB, or a CB state based on CB, the subsequent addition notification process is terminated. If a negative determination is made in step S3502, the process proceeds to step S3503, where a subtraction process is performed on the display remaining number counter HG. In this case, in step S3503, a command including the value after subtraction of the display remaining number counter HG is set as the output target to the display control device 81. Upon receiving this command, the display control device 81 controls the auxiliary display unit 65 to update the display of the remaining number of games display ZGP. Alternatively, the display control device 81 may be configured to have a counter or the like corresponding to the remaining number display counter HG, and the display control device 81 may perform the processing for updating the remaining number of games display ZGP.

In step S3504, as a result of the processing in step S3503, it is determined whether the display remaining number counter HG has reached a predetermined value (1), which triggers a later-addition notification. If it has not reached the predetermined value, the later-addition notification processing is terminated. If it has reached the predetermined value, it is determined in step S3505 whether the later-addition flag has been set. If the later-addition flag has not been set, the later-addition notification processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step S3505 that the add-on flag is set, the process proceeds to step S3506. In step S3506, the value of the add-on counter BG is determined. Then, in step S3507, a process is performed to set an add-on command so that an add-on notification is made according to the value of the add-on counter BG. In this case, the add-on command includes information to make an add-on notification for the game in question, as well as information that the number of games will be added according to the value of the add-on counter BG. Note that a configuration in which a portion of the add-on counter BG is added may also be used; for example, whether or not to add a portion may be determined by lottery, and if a portion is to be added, information that the portion of the number of games will be added may be set in the add-on command.

In the following step S3508, a process is performed in which a value corresponding to the number of added games set in the add-on command in step S3507 is subtracted from the add-on counter BG. Then, in step S3509, it is determined whether the add-on counter BG has reached 0 as a result of the process in step S3508. If it is not 0, the add-on notification process is terminated. If it is 0, the add-on flag is cleared in step S3510, and then the add-on notification process is terminated.

As described above, an add-on command is sent to the display control device 81 during the subsequent add-on notification process in the winning result response process. As already explained, the display control device 81 executes processing to perform the add-on notification effect during the add-on notification process in the all-stop effect setting process. As a result, in a game in which the display remaining number counter HG reaches a predetermined value, an add-on notification is executed as a subsequent add-on notification after all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped. Therefore, in a game in which the display remaining number counter HG reaches a predetermined value (1), the third reel will be stopped/OFF, with the expectation that an add-on notification (subsequent add-on notification) will be executed, regardless of the winning result of the game.

Incidentally, the timing of the add-on notification selected when an immediate add-on notification is made may differ from the timing of the third reel stop OFF operation when a later add-on notification is made. That is, the third reel stop OFF operation refers to the timing when the third reel stop OFF operation is performed. The corresponding reel may stop at that timing, or the corresponding reel may stop at a slightly delayed timing due to slippage control. Therefore, the third reel stop OFF operation may be slightly earlier than the timing when all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop. On the other hand, the execution timing of the later add-on notification set in the win result response processing for the win result response processing is the timing after the win result response processing is executed, i.e., after all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have completely stopped, and after medal payout if a minor win has occurred (after the payout determination processing of step S413 is executed). Therefore, the timing of the later-load notification may be later than the timing of the third reel stop OFF operation during the immediate-load notification.

Next, the fixed RT processing in this modified example will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 89.

In step S3601, it is determined whether the AT notification flag is set. If it is not set, the fixed RT processing is terminated. If it is set, in step S3602, the display remaining number counter HG becomes 10, and it is determined whether the display of the remaining number of games in AT mode appears to be 10 games. If the display remaining number counter HG is not 10, the fixed RT processing is terminated. If the display remaining number counter HG is 10, proceed to step S3603.

In step S3603, it is determined whether the above-mentioned later-addition flag is set. If the later-addition flag is not set, this means that the later-addition counter BG is 0 and the value of the display remaining number counter HG is equal to the actual number of remaining games in the AT mode. In this case, the transition notification flag is set in step S3604, and a transition command is output and set in step S3605, after which the fixed RT processing is terminated. As already explained, when the transition notification flag is set, a push order notification for transition to the fixed RT is generated when a transition replay is won, and when a transition command is output, the first transition period presentation is generated.

If step S3603 returns a positive judgment and the later-addition flag is set, the process proceeds to step S3606. In step S3606, a process is executed to set a pseudo-transition notification flag in the various flag storage area 106d. The pseudo-transition notification flag is a flag that the CPU 102 of the main control device 101 uses to determine that a transition replay will be performed if a later-addition notification is won in a situation where a later-addition notification could occur. After executing the process of step S3606, in step S3607, the pseudo-transition command is set as an output target to the display control device 81, and then the fixed RT process is terminated. The display control device 81, which has received the pseudo-transition command, controls the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. so that the first transition period effect occurs, in the same way as when a transition command is received.

Next, the push order role processing in this modified example will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 90.

In this variant, the processing that is performed when a transition replay is won when the transition notification flag is not set in AT mode is generally different. That is, the processing of steps S3701 to S3723 is the same as the processing of steps S1301 to S1323 described above, with the exception of the processing that is performed when a negative judgment is made in step S3721.

Specifically, if it is determined in step S3719 that a transition replay has been won, and it is determined in step S3720 that the AT notification flag has been set, but it is determined in step S3721 that the transition notification flag has not been set, in this modified example, the process proceeds to step S3728. In step S3728, it is determined whether the pseudo transition notification flag set in step S3606 above has been set. A pseudo transition notification flag being set means that the value of the display remaining number counter HG becomes 10 when the later addition flag is set, the number of games remaining in the AT mode appears to be 10, the first transition period effect occurs, and the transition replay is won. In other words, this is a case where the AT mode is not actually nearing the end, and transitioning to the fixed RT state could be detrimental to the player (see modified example 2 above).

In this case, this modified example generates a so-called freeze effect that temporarily restricts game progress. That is, if it is determined in step S3728 that the pseudo-transition notification flag is set, the process proceeds to step S3729, where the freeze timing lottery process is executed. In the freeze timing lottery process, the timing of the freeze effect is determined by lottery based on the number of AT mode games that can be notified by the later addition notification. More specifically, the later addition counter BG and a lottery counter are obtained from the various counter area 106e of RAM 106, and a freeze timing table is obtained from the various table storage area 105a of ROM 105. The freeze timing corresponding to the value of the later addition counter BG is determined by lottery. As shown in FIG. 91, the freeze timing table defines the freeze timing as the first stop ON operation, the second stop ON operation, and the third stop ON operation, and determines which operation will cause the freeze based on a distribution rate corresponding to the value of the later addition counter BG. The larger the value of the rear loading counter BG, the more likely it is that a rear operation will be selected than a front operation.

After executing the freeze timing lottery process in step S3729, in step S3730, a process is executed to set a freeze flag corresponding to the result of the lottery in step S3729 in the various flag storage area 106d. Specifically, if the result of the lottery in step S3729 is the first stop ON operation, the first stop ON freeze flag is set; if the result of the lottery is the second stop ON operation, the second stop ON freeze flag is set; and if the result of the lottery is the third stop ON operation, the third stop ON freeze flag is set.

If it is determined in step S3728 that the pseudo-transition notification flag is not set, or after executing the processing of step S3730, the process proceeds to step S3707, where the push order notification for the first replay is performed.

In this case, the button press order notification by the instruction monitor 68 when the pseudo-transition notification flag is set and the button press order notification by the instruction monitor 68 when the pseudo-transition notification flag is not set are similar in that they both notify the button press order for winning the first re-play. On the other hand, the presentation content including the push order notification effect by the auxiliary display unit 65 when the pseudo transition notification flag is set is different from the presentation content including the push order notification effect by the auxiliary display unit 65 when the pseudo transition notification flag is not set. More specifically, the presentation content including the push order notification effect by the auxiliary display unit 65 when the pseudo transition notification flag is not set is common to the presentation content for the first re-play winning, including the push order notification effect by the auxiliary display unit 65 when the transition notification flag is not set, and the presentation content including the push order notification effect by the auxiliary display unit 65 when the pseudo transition notification flag is set is common to the presentation content for the 11th re-play winning or the 12th re-play winning by the auxiliary display unit 65 when the transition notification flag is set, and only the order of the push order notification is announced as for the first re-play winning. In other words, if a transition replay is won when the pseudo transition notification flag is set, the push order notification and push order notification presentation will be the operation sequence for winning the first replay, but it will be difficult to distinguish this from a transition replay win when the transition notification flag is set based on the presentation content displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, etc.

The freeze processing in this modified example will be described with reference to Figure 92. The freeze processing is performed when it is determined in step S404 during the reel control processing (Figure 18) by the main control device 101 that a stop switch 42-44 has been operated, and before setting a stop command in step S405. Note that this freeze processing may also be configured to be performed while each stop switch 42-44 is in an inactive period.

In step S3801, it is determined whether the current stop operation was a first stop ON operation. If it was a first stop ON operation, it is determined in step S3802 whether the above-mentioned first stop ON freeze flag is set. If it is not set, the freeze processing ends. If it is set, the freeze processing is executed in step S3803. The freeze processing does not stop the rotation of the corresponding reel 32L, 32M, or 32R, and temporarily disables the operation of the other stop switches 42-44. In other words, the freeze processing temporarily restricts the progress of normal gameplay, such as stopping the corresponding reel 32L, 32M, or 32R based on the operation of the stop switch 42-44.

After executing the freeze processing in step S3803, processing is performed in step S3804 to set the special effect command as an output target to the display control device 81. The special effect command is a command for generating an effect corresponding to the freeze processing, and upon receiving the special effect command, the display control device 81 controls the special effect to be displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, speaker 64, etc. After that, processing is performed in steps S3805 to S3808 to generate a later-addition notification. That is, in step S3805, an add-on command corresponding to the later-addition counter BG is set, and in step S3806, a subtraction process is performed on the later-addition counter BG. In step S3807, it is determined whether the later-addition counter BG has reached 0, and if so, processing is performed in step S3808 to clear the later-addition flag. If it has not reached 0, the freeze processing is terminated.

If a negative judgment is made in step S3801, the process proceeds to step S3809, where it is determined whether the current stop operation was a second stop ON operation. If it was a second stop ON operation, it is determined in step S3810 whether the second stop ON freeze flag is set. If the second stop ON freeze flag is not set, the freeze processing ends. If the second stop ON freeze flag is set, the process proceeds to step S3803, where processing is performed to generate a freeze effect, a special effect, and a subsequent notification.

If a negative judgment is made in step S3809, the process proceeds to step S3811, where it is determined whether the current stop operation was a third stop ON operation. If it was a third stop ON operation, it is determined in step S3812 whether the third stop ON freeze flag is set. If a negative judgment is made in step S3811 (if the current stop operation was any of the stop OFF operations) or if the third stop ON freeze flag is not set, the freeze processing ends. If the third stop ON freeze flag is set in step S3812, the process proceeds to step S3803, where processing is performed to generate a freeze effect, a special effect, and a subsequent notification.

The freeze effect and special effects will be explained with reference to Figure 93. Figure 93 shows the freeze effect and special effects when the freeze flag is set when the second stop is ON.

As shown in Figure 93(a), for example, suppose that when the center reel 32M is stopped as the first stop reel, an attempt is made to stop the right reel 32R as the second stop reel by turning the right stop switch 44 to stop ON. In this case, because the freeze flag for second stop ON is set as described above, stop control of the right reel 32R is restricted based on the stop ON operation of the right stop switch 44. In this case, stop control of the left reel 32L based on the stop ON operation of the left stop switch 42 is also restricted, resulting in a so-called freeze effect.

A special effect occurs on the auxiliary display unit 65 and speaker 64 in response to the freeze effect. In the special effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 93(b), a male character engulfed in flames is displayed, and a deep male voice utters the words "What you saw was nothing but an illusion!" from the speaker 64, explaining that the previous displays, i.e., the first transition period display and the push order notification to transition to the fixed RT state, were pseudo-displays. It is more preferable that the words are also displayed in text on the auxiliary display unit 65. The special effect is executed during the freeze effect period, i.e., the period during which stop control of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R based on the stop operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is limited. When stop control of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R based on the stop operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is resumed, the special effect ends and the above-mentioned subsequent bonus notification occurs (the bonus notification effect occurs). The player can understand that the special effect is occurring through the restriction on stop control of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R. Furthermore, this special effect allows the player to understand that although a transition to the fixed RT state was attempted based on a transition replay win, the situation does not warrant a transition to the fixed RT state, i.e., the AT mode is still ongoing. Furthermore, rather than transitioning to the fixed RT state by achieving an 11th replay win or a 12th replay win, it becomes possible to achieve the first replay win and maintain the infinite RT state. Moreover, at the same time, an additional charge (later charge) for AT mode occurs.

In this way, this modified example utilizes a configuration for transitioning to a fixed RT state just before the end of AT mode, while also allowing the above-mentioned special effects to occur in conjunction with the subsequent bonus notification. This changes the disappointment of the AT mode ending into joy at the continuation of the AT mode, and further provides an intense sense of excitement as the number of times the AT mode will continue is notified.

<Modification 4>
In this modified example, the number of games that can be played in the fixed RT state (fourth RT state) is determined by lottery. Figure 94(a) is a flowchart showing the fixed RT game number setting process in this modified example.

In step S3901, the fixed RT game count table stored in the various table storage area 105a of ROM 105 is retrieved. As shown in FIG. 94(b), the fixed RT game count table is set so that the number of games that can be played in the fixed RT state varies depending on the setting value that changes the rate and manner of increase/decrease of gaming media. More specifically, for six different setting values, the selection rates are set so that one of several game types (50 games, 100 games, or 200 games) is selected. For example, 200 games can be selected in settings 1, 3, 5, and 6, but 200 games are not selected in settings 2 and 4. The selection rates for each game type are set so that settings 1 and 3 have the highest selection rate for 50 games, while settings 2 and 4 have the highest selection rate for 100 games. The higher the setting value, the more likely it is that several games with a larger number of games will be selected, such as setting 2 being more likely to be selected than setting 1, setting 3 being more likely to be selected than setting 2, and so on.

After obtaining the fixed RT game number table in step S3901, a game number lottery process is executed based on the game number table in step S3902. Then, in step S3903, a process is executed to input the number of games according to the lottery result into the fixed RT game number counter, and then the fixed RT game number setting process is terminated.

As described above, by allowing the number of games in RT state after the end of AT mode to vary depending on the setting value, it is possible to realize differences in the rate and pattern of increase/decrease of gaming media depending on the setting value within a range unrelated to the AT mode continuation rate, etc. Therefore, it is possible to reduce or eliminate setting differences in the gameplay of aiming to win medals through the AT mode push order notification, while skillfully adjusting the balance between this gameplay and the gameplay of aiming to win medals through bonuses such as the first BB and second BB.

<Modification 5>
In this modified example, when a transition is made to the AT mode during the fixed RT mode, the number of continuations in the AT mode is changed. Figure 95 is a flowchart showing the count start process for the number of continuations in the AT mode in this modified example. This count start process is performed in step S1508 when a third re-game win is achieved under the circumstances where the AT notification flag is set in the winning result corresponding process (Figure 49). Incidentally, in the first embodiment, a uniform initial value (50) is input to the AT mode continuation counter provided in the various counter area 106e, and the count is started with the number of continuations in the AT mode being 50 games.

In this modified example, in step S4001, an initial number of games lottery process is executed. In the initial number of games lottery process, an AT mode game number table is obtained from the various table storage area 105a in ROM 105, and a lottery counter is obtained from the various counter area 106e in RAM 106. One game number is selected from multiple game number options and set as the initial value for the number of continuations of the AT mode to be started this time. For example, 50 games and 100 games are set as the multiple game number options, and 50 games are selected 90% of the time, and 100 games is selected 10% of the time. In this case, it is preferable that the selection rate be set so that there is no difference depending on the setting value. After executing the initial number of games lottery process, in step S4002, a process is executed to input a value corresponding to the lottery result into the AT mode continuation counter.

In step S4003, it is determined whether the current game state is a fixed RT state, such as the fourth RT state. If it is not a fixed RT state, the count start process ends. In this case, the AT mode is started, with the number of games corresponding to the value entered in step S4002 above as the initial number of games.

If it is determined in step S4003 that the fixed RT state is in progress, the process proceeds to step S4004. In step S4004, a process is executed to determine the number of games remaining in the fixed RT state from the fixed RT game number counter. Then, in step S4005, a value corresponding to the number of games remaining in the fixed RT state is added to the AT mode continuation counter, and the count start process is terminated. In this case, the AT mode is started, with the initial number of games being the number of games obtained by adding the number of games remaining in the fixed RT state to the value input in step S4002.

As described above, in this modified example, if the lottery for transitioning to AT mode is won while in the fixed RT state, the initial number of games in AT mode is set taking into account the number of games remaining in the fixed RT state. This means that the benefits of the fixed RT state can be fully enjoyed regardless of the timing of the winning of the lottery for transitioning to AT mode, improving playability in the fixed RT state. In other words, for example, if the number of games remaining in the fixed RT state were not taken into account in the AT mode, if the lottery for transitioning to AT mode was won immediately after transitioning to the fixed RT state, the benefits of the number of games remaining in the fixed RT state would not be enjoyed, and some players may feel that they have missed out despite having won the lottery for transitioning to AT mode. In this regard, by doing as described above, it is possible to fully enjoy the AT mode lottery during the fixed RT state, and the consecutive win nature of the AT mode via the fixed RT state can be optimally realized.

<Modification 6>
In this modified example, the transition route to the fixed RT state is different from that in the first embodiment. Figure 96 is a diagram for explaining the transition route of the gaming state in this modified example.

In this modified example, the fourth RT state, which is a fixed RT state, can be transitioned to from the third RT state, but cannot be transitioned to from the first RT state, second RT state, or normal game state. In other words, while the first embodiment above was configured to allow transition to the fourth RT state from the second RT state and third RT state, in this modified example, transition from the second RT state is not possible.

Figure 97 shows an example of a lottery table for the second RT state in this modified example. Compared to the lottery table in the first embodiment, the point value PV for index values IV = 13 and 14 is set to 0, and transition replays 1 and 2 are not won in the second RT state. Note that the point values for index values IV = 13 and 14 are added to index values IV = 6 to 10, respectively, and the total replay probability in the second RT state is the same as that in the first embodiment.

The lottery table for the third RT state in this modified example is the same as that in the first embodiment described above, and if a win occurs when index value IV = 13 or 14, and the operation sequence of stop switches 42 to 44 corresponds to an 11th or 12th replay win, the game state transitions to the fourth RT state.

In other words, in this modified example, although a transition to the second RT state occurs when the AT mode is entered, if the AT mode ends in the second RT state, a transition to the fixed RT state does not occur. Furthermore, if a transition from the second RT state to the third RT state occurs in the AT mode and the AT mode ends in the third RT state, a transition to the fixed RT state can occur. In the first embodiment above, the display mode that causes a transition to the third RT state was described as VB mode, but in this modified example, the mode that allows a transition to the fixed RT state will be described as transition mode. In other words, winning the transition lottery to the transition mode causes a transition to the third RT state. More specifically, winning the transition lottery to the transition mode will cause a push order notification corresponding to the fourth replay win or the fifth replay win to be made when the second promotion replay 1 or 2 is won.

Figure 98 is a flowchart showing the second specific combination processing in this modified example. As already explained, the second specific combination processing is primarily performed based on the lottery results of each game during the AT mode in the second RT state or the fourth RT state (Figure 32, step S707).

In this modified example, step S4101 determines the number of games remaining in AT mode. As previously explained, the number of games remaining in AT mode can be determined from the AT mode continuation counter. Step S4102 obtains a transition mode lottery table from the various table storage area 105a in ROM 105. The transition mode lottery table is set so that the probability of transitioning to transition mode varies depending on the number of games remaining in AT mode. More specifically, the fewer games remaining in AT mode, the higher the probability of transitioning to transition mode. For example, the transition mode lottery table is set so that when there are 50 or more games remaining, there is a 0% probability of transitioning to transition mode (the lottery for transitioning to transition mode is not won), when there are 49 to 30 games remaining, there is a 5% probability of transitioning to transition mode, when there are 29 to 10 games remaining, there is a 10% probability of transitioning to transition mode, and when there are less than 10 games remaining, there is a 30% probability of transitioning to transition mode.

In step S4103, a transition mode lottery process is executed to determine whether or not to transition to transition mode based on the number of remaining games in the AT mode determined in step S4101 and the transition mode lottery table obtained in step S4102. In step S4104, it is determined whether the lottery result of step S4103 is a winning result that will result in a transition to transition mode. If it is a winning result, in step S4105, a process is executed to set a transition mode flag in the various flag storage area 106d, and then the second specific role processing is terminated. The transition mode flag is a flag that allows the CPU 102 to determine that a situation is present in which a transition to transition mode can occur. Then, if the transition mode flag is set and the second promotion replay 1 or 2 is won, a positive determination is made in step S1311 in the push order role processing (Figure 48), and in step S1312, a push order notification process corresponding to the fourth replay win or the fifth replay win is executed.

If step S4104 determines that the result is not a winning result, proceed to step S4106. The processing of steps S4106 to S4121 is the same as the processing of steps S914 to S929 above, and involves processing for AT mode top-ups, processing for specialized zones, and processing for pseudo-top-up notifications.

The winning result response processing in this modified example will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 99. In this modified example, the processing when the fourth or fifth replay win is achieved and the game state transitions to the third RT state generally differs from that in the first embodiment described above.

In other words, the game count management process, subsequent bonus notification process, and process based on the third replay win in steps S4201 to S4210 are the same as the process in steps S1501 to S1510 above. If it is determined in step S4203 that the winning result of the current game is not the third replay win, proceed to step S4211 to determine whether the winning result of the current game is the fourth replay win or the fifth replay win. If it is the fourth replay win or the fifth replay win, proceed to step S4212 to determine whether the transition mode flag is set. If the transition mode flag is not set, this means that the fourth replay win or the fifth replay win has occurred without winning the transition mode lottery (step S4103), and the game has transitioned to the third RT state. In this case, the winning result response process ends. If the transition mode flag is set, proceed to step S4213.

In step S4213, it is determined whether the transition notification flag is set. As described above, the transition notification flag is a flag that generates a push order notification corresponding to the 11th replay win or the 12th replay win when transition replay 1 or 2 is won. If the transition notification flag is set, the winning result response processing ends. If it is not set, proceed to step S4214.

In step S4214, a process is executed to set the transition notification flag. Then, in step S4215, a process is executed to set the transition command as an output target to the display control device 81, and then the winning result response process is terminated. In other words, the processes of steps S4214 and S4215 correspond to the processes of steps S3203 and S3204 that are executed when the number of remaining games in the AT mode of the fixed RT process (Figure 76) in the first embodiment described above reaches 10. In this modified example, the fixed RT process is not executed.

In other words, in this modified example, if the transition lottery to transition to transition mode is won and the player transitions to the third RT state, the transition notification flag is set, and if transition replays 1 and 2 are won, a push order notification corresponding to the 11th replay win or the 12th replay win will be generated. If the transition lottery to transition mode is not won or the transition to the third RT state does not occur, the transition notification flag will not be set even if the number of games remaining in the AT mode reaches 10, and the high RT state (second RT state or third RT state) will end without transitioning to the fixed RT state.

If the determination in step S4211 is negative, the processing in steps S4216 to S4220 is the same as the processing in steps S1517 to S1521 above.

The transition of the RT state in this modified example will be explained with reference to the timing chart in Figure 100.

In the transition mode lottery process (step S4103), the transition mode lottery will be won after timing t25, when the number of games remaining in AT mode is less than 50. For example, if the transition mode lottery is won at timing t26, when the number of games remaining in AT mode is less than 50, when the second promotion replay 1 or 2 is won, a push order notification for the fourth replay win or the fifth replay win will be generated.

If the second promotion replay 1 or 2 is won at time t27 and the game state transitions to the third RT state by performing a stop operation in accordance with the push order notification, it becomes possible to win transition replays 1 and 2. Furthermore, if the fourth replay win or the fifth replay win is achieved at time t27, the transition notification flag is set. As a result, if transition replays 1 or 2 are won in the third RT state, a push order notification corresponding to the eleventh replay win or the twelfth replay win is generated (time t28), and by operating stop switches 42-44 in accordance with this push order notification, it becomes possible to transition to a fixed RT state in which a high replay probability state is maintained until a predetermined number of games have been played, which is after the AT mode ends at time t29. Although it is possible to win the second promotion replays 1 and 2 even before the transition mode lottery is won at time t26, the push order notification at the time of such a win will be the operation sequence corresponding to the first replay win, and even if you successfully achieve the fourth or fifth replay win by stopping the machine using an operation sequence different from the push order notification, the transition notification flag will not be set. Therefore, even if you happen to succeed in transitioning to the third RT state while in the second RT state, it will be difficult to subsequently transition to the fixed RT state.

As described above, in AT mode, rather than transitioning directly from the second RT state to the fixed RT state, by transitioning to the fixed RT state through a state in which there is a chance of winning the lottery to transition to the fixed RT state, such as a transition mode (third RT state), it is possible to reduce the occurrence of events in which a transition to the fixed RT state occurs by chance.

Furthermore, when comparing the second RT state and the third RT state in terms of the ease of transition to the fixed RT state, the third RT state is a state in which transition to the fixed RT state is easier than the second RT state; the second RT state can also be referred to as a low-probability state and the third RT state as a high-probability state. In this case, as described above, not only is improved playability expected due to the rate of transition to the fixed RT state during AT mode, but also gameplay is realized in that even if the AT mode ends without transitioning to the fixed RT state in the third RT state, transition to the fixed RT state is more likely to occur during the recovery period after the end of AT mode until the end of the high RT state than if the AT mode ended in the low-probability state of the second RT state. In other words, depending on whether or not a transition to the third RT state occurs at the end of the AT mode, a transition to the fixed RT state during the recovery period becomes more likely or less likely. In this way, by switching to the high probability state or low probability state during AT mode, it is possible to expect a significant improvement in gameplay, including the return period, and to realize innovative gameplay that moves away from gameplay where players simply aim to win medals through the push order notification in AT mode.

<Modification 7>
In this modified example, the transition to the 4th RT state as a fixed RT state occurs only during the normal game state. As already explained, the transition to the 1st RT state occurs when the transition result stops according to the operation sequence when the push order bell is won, while the transition to the normal game state only occurs when the power is turned on, after the BB state ends, or after the 4th RT state ends. In this way, when comparing the normal game state and the 1st RT state, which are states that can be frequently stayed in during normal times, the proportion of time spent in the 1st RT state is overwhelmingly higher than the proportion of time spent in the normal game state.

Figure 101 shows an example of a lottery table for normal game mode in this modified example. In this modified example, the point value PV for a normal replay with index value IV = 1 is allocated to transition replays 1 and 2 with IV = 13 and 14. In other words, in normal game mode, a normal replay cannot be won, but transition replays 1 and 2 can be won.

As shown in Figure 102, when an 11th or 12th replay win is achieved in the normal game state based on a win on Transition Replay 1 or 2, the game transitions to the 4th RT state, and a predetermined number of games can be played in the high RT state. As described above, the normal game state and the 1st RT state have an overwhelmingly high proportion of players staying in the 1st RT state, and the normal game state in which a transition to the 4th RT state is possible is mainly limited to the early morning state (immediately after power-on) or after the end of the BB state. This allows for gameplay that allows for the transition to the 4th RT state to be determined under limited circumstances, such as the early morning state or after the end of the BB state.

When Transition Replay 1 or 2 is won, the 11th or 12th replay win is achieved by operating stop switches 42-44 in the operating sequence corresponding to the 11th or 12th replay win. Therefore, if the state after the morning state or BB state ends is normal mode, no push order notification is generated, so whether or not the 11th or 12th replay win is achieved depends on the player's intuition. In other words, the probability of transitioning to the 4th RT state occurring under normal play mode is lower.

In contrast, if the BB state ends under circumstances where a push order notification may occur, such as in AT mode, the normal game state can be played under circumstances where a push order notification may occur. This makes it possible to achieve the 11th replay win or the 12th replay win when transition replays 1 and 2 are won, allowing for an easy transition to the 4th RT state. Furthermore, in the normal game state during AT mode, a push order notification occurs even when the push order bell is won, so transition results that result in missed numbers for the push order bell will not generally stop except in cases where a transition to the 1st RT state is to occur. This increases the likelihood of transition replays 1 and 2 being won before transitioning to the 1st RT state, where transition replays 1 and 2 are not won.

Figure 103 is a flowchart showing the fixed RT processing in this modified example.

In step S4301, it is determined whether the AT notification flag is set. If the AT notification flag is set, in step S4302, it is determined whether various RT setting flags, etc. are set, thereby determining whether the current gaming state is a normal gaming state. If it is a normal gaming state, in step S4303 it is determined whether the number of games remaining in the AT mode is 10 or less. If a negative determination is made in any of steps S4301 to S4303, the fixed RT processing is terminated.

Here, even in this modified example, the initial number of games at the start of the AT mode is greater than 10, and the number of games remaining in step S4303 is 10 or less when the game state transitions to the second RT state, the AT mode is initiated, and then the game state transitions to the normal game state. More specifically, this is when a bonus is won during the AT mode, and the number of games remaining in the AT mode after the BB state ends is 10 or less. In this case, the transition notification flag is set in step S4304, and the transition command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S4305, after which the fixed RT processing ends. In this case, if transition replays 1 and 2 are won, a push order notification is generated to establish an 11th replay win or a 12th replay win.

In this way, in this modified example, if a bonus is won during AT mode and the BB state ends, a transition to the fixed RT state is permitted during the return interval for returning to the high RT state (second RT state). By doing this, it becomes more difficult to transition to the fixed RT state, and the rarity of the fixed RT state is increased.

Furthermore, because transition to the normal game state occurs via a bonus win, and transition to the fixed RT state is permitted only during the normal game state, it is less likely that an unintended transition to that transition state will occur due to a coincidence of the operation sequence, compared to a configuration in which a transition to the fixed RT state can occur based on the operation sequence of the stop switches 42-44 when a push order replay is won (in the first embodiment, the second RT state, third RT state, or transition state). This makes it possible to prevent unintended transitions to the fixed RT state, strengthen the impression that the transition to that transition state was won by lottery, and improve gameplay.

<Modification 8>
In this modified example, the AT mode is basically configured to be played in the third RT state, and the second RT state is a preparation state before transitioning to the AT mode. That is, as shown in Figure 104, the start of counting in the AT mode is based on the fourth re-game winning or the fifth re-game winning, and by setting the AT notification flag in the normal game state or the first RT state, the third re-game winning causes a transition to the second RT state as the preparation state, and by establishing the fourth re-game winning or the fifth re-game winning during the second RT state, the transition to the third RT state occurs and the AT mode is started.

In the fixed RT processing of this modified example, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 105, step S4401 determines whether the AT notification flag is set, and if it is set, step S4402 determines whether the second RT state is in effect. If the second RT state is in effect, step S4403 determines whether the number of remaining games in the AT mode is 10 or less. If a negative determination is made in any of steps S4401 to S4403, the fixed RT processing is terminated. If a positive determination is made in step S4403, a transition notification flag is set in step S4404, and a transition command is set in step S4405, after which the fixed RT processing is terminated.

In this case, since the AT mode is basically configured to be implemented in the third RT state, a positive judgment will be made in step S4402 if: (1) a bonus is won in the AT mode and the period before the return to the third RT state occurs after the BB state; or (2) in the third RT state, the stop switches 42-44 are operated in an order different from the push order notification when a push order role is won, and the period before the return to the third RT state occurs. If such a situation occurs toward the end of the AT mode, and the configuration allows for a transition to the fixed RT state, not only can it be effective through a bonus win, but it can also provide relief in the event of an unintentional transition to a low RT state. Furthermore, it also enables gameplay features such as deliberately transitioning to a low RT state and winning the transition to the fixed RT state, greatly diversifying the ways in which the game can be enjoyed.

Second Embodiment
In this embodiment, a configuration for transitioning to a fixed RT state will be described in relation to the upper limit of the number of games in the advantageous zone. As already explained, the upper limit of the number of games in the advantageous zone in AT mode, including CZ mode, is predetermined, and the slot machine 10 is configured to forcibly terminate the advantageous zone at an upper limit of 1,500 games (see FIG. 54). Here, the relationship between the addition of the number of games performed based on the winning of a specific role in AT mode and the above upper limit of the number of games will be described with reference to FIG. 106. FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing the process of adding the number of games in the AT mode. This process is performed, for example, in step S918 of FIG. 34. Note that this embodiment will be described based on the configuration in the first embodiment in which transition to a fixed RT state is possible from the second RT state or the third RT state (a configuration in which a transition replay can be won in the lottery table for the second RT state or the lottery table for the third RT state).

In step S4501, a process is performed to determine the number of additional games to be added this time. In step S4502, a determination is made as to whether an excess flag has been set in the various flag storage area 106d. The excess flag is a flag that is set when the number of remaining games FG that can be added becomes 0 (step S2011) in the remaining game number management process (step S1903, Figure 55) in the second section display process (Figure 54), based on the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section, the number of games currently played in the advantageous section, and the number of games in the advantageous section to be played. If the excess flag has not been set, proceed to step S4503.

In step S4503, the number of games added this time and the current number of available games FG are used to determine whether the number of available games FG will be reduced to 0 or less as a result of the current addition, causing the excess flag to be set. If the excess flag is not set even after the current addition, the process proceeds to step S4504, where the number of games added this time is added to the number of remaining games in the AT mode, and the addition process is then terminated.

If it is determined in step S4502 that the excess flag is set, the process proceeds to step S4505. In step S4505, a value corresponding to the current number of added games is added to the excess counter provided in the various counter area 106e, and then the add-on process ends. In other words, when the excess flag is set, no additional play actually occurs; the excess amount is simply added to the excess counter.

If it is determined in step S4503 that the excess flag will be set due to this addition, the process proceeds to step S4506. In step S4506, the excess is determined by subtracting the current number of available games FG from the current number of added games. Then, in step S4507, the process adds the number of games remaining in the AT mode minus the excess. Thereafter, in step S4508, the process adds the excess to the excess counter, and then the addition process ends.

As described above, the game number addition process in AT mode is configured to prevent an addition that exceeds the upper limit of the number of games in the advantageous zone from occurring, while storing the number of games exceeding the upper limit of the number of games in the excess counter.

Figure 107 is a flowchart showing the fixed RT processing in this embodiment.

If it is determined in step S4601 that the AT notification flag is set, in this embodiment, it is determined in step S4602 whether the excess flag is set. If the excess flag is set, it is determined in step S4603 whether there are 50 games remaining until the upper limit number of games (1,500) of the advantageous zone. If a negative determination is made in any of steps S4601 to S4603, the fixed RT processing is terminated, and by making a positive determination in all of steps S4601 to S4603, the process proceeds to step S4604 and subsequent processing to allow transition to the fixed RT state.

In other words, in this embodiment, if the number of free games FG that can be added in the advantageous zone is 0, and it has already been confirmed that the AT mode will continue up to the upper limit of the advantageous zone, and the number of games remaining up to the upper limit of the advantageous zone reaches a predetermined number of 50 games, processing is performed to allow a transition to the fixed RT state.

More specifically, in step S4604, a process is executed to determine the excess amount of the added bonus that has occurred so far based on the above-mentioned excess counter. Then, in step S4605, a fixed RT game number lottery process is executed. In the fixed RT game number lottery process, a fixed RT game number table is obtained from the various table storage area 105a of ROM 105, and the number of games in the fixed RT state that will be allowed this time is drawn by lottery based on the value of the excess counter determined in step S4604 above.

In the fixed RT game count table of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 108, the number of games played in each of the multiple types of fixed RT states is allocated according to the value of the excess counter, with the larger the excess counter value, the more likely a fixed RT state with a longer number of games is selected. More specifically, for example, if the excess counter value is 50 or less, 50 games are selected; if the excess counter value is 51 to 75, 50 games and 100 games are selected at a rate of 70% and 30%, respectively. If the excess counter value is 76 to 100, 50 games are selected 30% of the time, 100 games are selected 60%, and 200 games are selected 10 times. If the excess counter value is 101 to 199, 100 games are selected 60% of the time, 200 games are selected 40 times, and if the excess counter value is 200 or greater, 200 games are always selected. In other words, the fixed RT game count table is set so that the number of games in the fixed RT state that is as close as possible to the value of the excess counter is selected.

In step S4606, it is determined whether the result of the lottery process in step S4605 above was 50 games. If it was 50 games, in step S4607, a process is executed to set the first transition notification flag in the various flags storage area 106d. Then, in step S4608, a process is executed to set the transition command as an output target to the display control device 81, and then the fixed RT process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S4606 that the number of games has not been 50, then in step S4609 it is determined whether the number of games has been 100. If the number of games has been 100, then the process proceeds to step S4610, where a process is executed to set a second transition notification flag in the various flags storage area 106d. Then, in step S4608, a transition command is set, and the fixed RT process is terminated.

If a negative judgment is made in step S4609, this means that the lottery result in step S4606 was 200 games. In this case, in step S4611, a process is executed to set a third transition notification flag in the various flag storage area 106d. Then, in step S4608, a transition command is set, and the fixed RT process is terminated.

The first transition notification flag, second transition notification flag, and third transition notification flag are each flags that allow transition to different fixed RT states. That is, as shown in FIG. 109(a), in this embodiment, in addition to the 11th and 12th replays, a 13th replay is provided as a replay for transition to a fixed RT state. The winning mode for the 13th replay is set so that a win is achieved when the "1st replay" or "2nd replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "1st replay" or "2nd replay" symbol on the center reel 32M, and the "black BAR" or "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on an active line.

In this embodiment, when the 11th replay win is achieved, the game transitions to the 4th RT state, which is a fixed RT state of 50 games; when the 12th replay win is achieved, the game transitions to the 5th RT state, which is a fixed RT state of 100 games; and when the 13th replay win is achieved, the game transitions to the 6th RT state, which is a fixed RT state of 200 games.

In this embodiment, the lottery tables for the fourth RT state through the sixth RT state all use the lottery table for the fourth RT state in the first embodiment. In other words, the advantage per game is the same in the fourth RT state through the sixth RT state. Unless otherwise specified, the fact that the lottery tables are common in each of these fixed RT states also applies to other embodiments and modified examples.

Figure 109(b) shows a portion of the lottery table for the second RT state and the lottery table for the third RT state in this embodiment.

In this embodiment, the winning roles when an index value IV = 13 is selected are set to 1st replay, 2nd replay, and 11th replay; the winning roles when an index value IV = 14 is selected are set to 1st replay, 2nd replay, and 12th replay; and the winning roles when an index value IV = 57 is selected are set to 1st replay, 2nd replay, and 13th replay.

Figure 110 is a flowchart showing the fixed RT game number setting process in this embodiment. Note that in the RT state processing (Figure 21) in this embodiment, a positive judgment is made in step S516 even if a 13th replay win is achieved in addition to the 11th and 12th replay wins. Then, in step S517, the RT setting flag that has already been set is cleared, and in step S518, the RT setting flag corresponding to the replay that has achieved a win is set, and then the process proceeds to the fixed RT game number setting process in step S519. More specifically, for step S518, if an 11th replay win is achieved, the 4th RT setting flag is set; if a 12th replay win is achieved, the 5th RT setting flag is set; and if a 13th replay win is achieved, the 6th RT setting flag is set.

In the fixed RT game number setting process in this embodiment, first, in step S4701, it is determined whether an 11th re-play win has been achieved. If an 11th re-play win has been achieved, in step S4702, 50 is entered into the fixed RT game number counter, and the number of games in the current fixed RT state is set to 50. If a negative determination is made in step S4701, it is determined in step S4703 whether a 12th re-play win has been achieved. If a 12th re-play win has been achieved, in step S4703, 100 is entered into the fixed RT game number counter, and the number of games in the current fixed RT state is set to 100. If a negative determination is made in step S4703, this means that a 13th re-play win has been achieved. In this case, in step S4705, 200 is entered into the fixed RT game number counter, and the number of games in the current fixed RT state is set to 200. After executing any of step S4702, step S4704, and step S4705, the fixed RT game count setting process ends.

Figure 111 is a flowchart showing part of the push order role processing in this modified example.

In this embodiment, if it is determined in step S1314 that a BAR replay has not been won, the process proceeds to step S4801. In step S4801, it is determined whether or not a transition replay 1 has been won. If a transition replay 1 has been won, in step S4802, it is determined whether or not the AT notification flag is set. If it is not set, the push order notification is not generated and the push order role processing is terminated. If the AT notification flag is set, in step S4803, it is determined whether or not the first transition notification flag is set. In other words, it is determined whether or not a transition to the fourth RT state, which has 50 games as the specified number of games, is permitted. If the first transition notification flag is set, the process proceeds to step S4804. In step S4804, the instruction monitor 68 is controlled to issue a push order notification of the stop order corresponding to the 11th replay win. Then, in step S4805, a push order notification command including information on the operation order corresponding to the 11th replay win is set, and then the push order role processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step S4803 that the first transition notification flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S4806, where processing is executed to notify the push order for the first replay win, and then in step S4807, a push order notification command containing information on the operation sequence corresponding to the first replay win is set, and then this push order win processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step S4801 that Transition Replay 1 was not a win, the process proceeds to step S4808. In step S4808, it is determined whether Transition Replay 2 was a win. If Transition Replay 2 was a win, in step S4809, it is determined whether the AT notification flag is set. If it is not set, the push order notification is not generated and the push order role processing is terminated. If the AT notification flag is set, in step S4810, it is determined whether the second transition notification flag is set. In other words, it is determined whether a transition to the fifth RT state, which has 100 games as the specified game, is permitted. If the second transition notification flag is set, the process proceeds to step S4811. In step S4811, the instruction monitor 68 is controlled to perform a push order notification of the stop order corresponding to the 12th replay win. Then, in step S4812, a push order notification command including information on the operation order corresponding to the 12th replay win is set, and then the push order role processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step S4810 that the second transition notification flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S4806, where processing is executed to notify the push order for the first replay win, and then in step S4807, a push order notification command containing information on the operation sequence corresponding to the first replay win is set, and then this push order win processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step S4808 that Transition Replay 2 was not a win, proceed to step S4813. In step S4813, it is determined whether Transition Replay 3 was a win. If Transition Replay 3 was a win, in step S4814, it is determined whether the AT notification flag is set. If it is not set, the push order notification is not generated and the push order role processing is terminated. If the AT notification flag is set, in step S4815, it is determined whether the third transition notification flag is set. In other words, it is determined whether a transition to the sixth RT state, which has 200 games as the specified number of games, is permitted. If the third transition notification flag is set, proceed to step S4816. In step S4816, the instruction monitor 68 is controlled to perform a push order notification of the stop order corresponding to the 13th replay win. Then, in step S4817, a push order notification command including information on the operation order corresponding to the 13th replay win is set, and then this push order role processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step S4815 that the third transition notification flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S4806, where processing is executed to notify the push order for the first replay win, and then in step S4807, a push order notification command containing information on the operation sequence corresponding to the first replay win is set, and then this push order role processing is terminated. Also, if it is determined in step S4813 that transition replay 3 has not been won, the process proceeds to step S1324, where processing for the push order bell is executed.

In the winning result response processing of this embodiment (Figure 49), step S1522 determines whether any of the 11th replay winning, 12th replay winning, and 13th replay winning has occurred. If any of these winnings has occurred, step S1523 performs processing to change the presentation at the start of the fixed RT state depending on the presence or absence of each transition notification flag. In other words, if any of the transition notification flags is set, the first fixed RT start command is set, and if none of the transition notification flags is set, the second fixed RT start command is set.

As described above, in this embodiment, if an additional bonus occurs that exceeds the upper limit of the number of games in the advantageous zone, a transition to a fixed RT state that takes that number of games into account is permitted. By doing this, it is possible to alleviate the disappointment of having a large bonus bonus lost due to the upper limit of the number of games, by transitioning to a high RT state.

By providing multiple fixed RT states with different executable specified game numbers and then selecting the fixed RT state closest to the excess, the number of different fixed RT states provided is significantly reduced compared to a configuration in which a transition to a fixed RT state occurs for a number of games equal to the excess itself (the excess). This prevents the gaming machine's limited memory capacity from being consumed by information for fixed RT states, and allows for the storage of more information, thereby diversifying and enhancing gameplay.

The transition notification flag is set earlier than in the first embodiment above, so that the transition to the fixed RT state occurs before the upper limit of the favorable zone is reached. This makes it possible to more effectively avoid situations where the upper limit of the favorable zone is reached without a transition to the fixed RT state.

<Modification 1>
In the second embodiment, there is one type of fixed RT state that can be transitioned to for one transition replay, but in this modified example, multiple types of fixed RT states that can be transitioned to for one transition replay are set. Figure 112(a) is a part of the lottery table for the second RT state and the lottery table for the third RT state in this modified example. Also, Figure 112(b) is a diagram showing the relationship between the winning results when transition replays 1 and 2 are won in this modified example and the operation modes of stop switches 42 to 44.

In this modified example, the winning roles when an index value IV = 13 is selected are set to 1st replay, 2nd replay, 11th replay, and 12th replay. Furthermore, the winning roles when an index value IV = 14 is selected are set to 1st replay, 2nd replay, 12th replay, and 13th replay. When Transition Replay 1 with index value IV = 13 is selected, an 11th replay win is achieved by operating the stop switches 42 to 44 in the first operating mode (center → right → left), and a 12th replay win is achieved by operating the stop switches in the second operating mode (right → center → left), which is different from the first operating mode. Additionally, if Transition Replay 2 with index value IV = 14 is won, a 12th replay win will be achieved if the stop switches 42-44 are operated in a third operation mode (center → left → right) that is different from the first and second operation modes, and a 13th replay win will be achieved if the stop switches are operated in a fourth operation mode (right → left → center) that is different from the first to third operation modes.

As mentioned above, if the 11th replay win is made, the game will transition to the 4th RT state of 50 games, if the 12th replay win is made, the game will transition to the 5th RT state of 100 games, and if the 13th replay win is made, the game will transition to the 6th RT state of 200 games.

Incidentally, the third and fourth operation modes of Transition Replay 1 are associated with the second replay win, and the first and second operation modes of Transition Replay 2 are associated with the second replay win. When Transition Replay 1 and Transition Replay 2 are won, it is impossible to tell which Transition Replay was won before the replay stopped. Therefore, it is advantageous for the player to operate in accordance with the push order notification, as the first replay win and any of the 11th to 13th replay wins are possible, maintaining a high RT state.

In the push order role processing, if Transition Replay 1 is won and the AT notification flag and the first transition notification flag are set, push order notification processing for the first operation mode, which allows for the 11th replay win, is performed. On the other hand, if Transition Replay 1 is won and the AT notification flag and the second transition notification flag are set, push order notification processing for the second operation mode, which allows for the 12th replay win, is performed. Furthermore, if Transition Replay 1 is won and the AT notification flag is set but neither the first transition notification flag nor the second transition notification flag is set, push order notification processing for the operation mode corresponding to the 1st replay win is performed. The same is true for Transition Replay 2, where if the AT notification flag and the second transition notification flag are set, push order notification processing for the third operation mode, which allows for the 12th replay win, is performed. On the other hand, if Transition Replay 2 is won and the AT notification flag and the third transition notification flag are set, processing for the push order notification of the fourth operation mode, which enables the 13th replay win, is performed. If Transition Replay 2 is won and the AT notification flag is set but neither the second transition notification flag nor the third transition notification flag is set, processing for the push order notification of the operation mode corresponding to the first replay win is performed.

In this way, by setting multiple transition roles to fixed RT states for one transition replay, the RT state to which it transitions can be adjusted by the push order notification and operation sequence. This simplifies the lottery table and reduces the occurrence of situations where, even if a transition replay is won, the RT state transition cannot occur because the transition replay is different from the RT state to which it should be transitioned. In other words, it becomes possible to more reliably transition to the desired RT state.

<Modification 2>
In the second embodiment, the excess amount exceeding the upper limit game number of the advantageous zone was assumed to be compensated for by a high RT state due to a fixed RT state, but in this modified example, a configuration will be described in which the excess amount is compensated for by a high RT state due to an infinite RT state. Figure 113 shows a part of the lottery table for the 7th RT state to the 9th RT state that can be transitioned to in this modified example.

In this modified example, if the 11th replay win is achieved, the state transitions to the 7th RT state; if the 12th replay win is achieved, the state transitions to the 8th RT state; and if the 13th replay win is achieved, the state transitions to the 9th RT state. As described above, the 7th RT state to the 9th RT state are infinite RT states, and are high RT states in which the replay probability is higher than the low RT state of the normal play state and the 1st RT state. In the 7th RT state to the 9th RT state, in addition to the normal replay with index value IV = 1, fall replays 1 to 3 with index values IV = 7 to 9 can be won; other push order replays (IV = 2 to 6, 10 to 14) do not win.

In the seventh RT state, the probability of winning any of the fall replays 1-3 with index values IV = 7-9 is approximately 1 in 33.1. In fall replays 1-3, the operation sequence corresponding to the second replay win that results in a transition to the first RT state is set to four of the six possible operation sequences (Figure 23), so the probability of a second replay win occurring when fall replays 1-3 are won is 4 in 6. Therefore, in the seventh RT state, the probability of a second replay win occurring per game (hereinafter also referred to as the fall probability) is approximately 1 in 50. In other words, when transitioning to the seventh RT state, the number of games in which the high RT state is maintained may vary, but the average number of continuing games is approximately 50 games.

In the 8th RT state, the probability of winning a fall replay 1-3 with an index value IV of 7-9 is approximately 1 in 66.2. Furthermore, the probability of a second replay winning when a fall replay 1-3 is won is 4 in 6. Therefore, in the 8th RT state, the probability of a fall per game is approximately 1 in 100. In other words, when transitioning to the 8th RT state, the number of games in which the high RT state is maintained may vary, but the average number of continuing games is approximately 100.

In the 9th RT state, the probability of winning a fall replay 1-3 with an index value IV of 7-9 is approximately 1 in 132.4. Furthermore, the probability of a second replay winning when a fall replay 1-3 is won is 4 in 6. Therefore, in the 9th RT state, the probability of a fall per game is approximately 1 in 200. In other words, when transitioning to the 9th RT state, the number of games in which the high RT state is maintained may vary, but the average number of continuing games is approximately 200.

If the 7th RT state to the 9th RT state described above can be transitioned to in accordance with the excess amount of the advantageous zone, it will be possible to compensate for the excess amount by using an infinite RT state instead of a fixed RT state.

In this case, although a transition from a fixed RT state to an infinite RT state cannot occur, a transition from an infinite RT state to an infinite RT state, or a transition from an infinite RT state to a fixed RT state, can occur (Figure 26). Therefore, using the 7th to 9th RT states as the infinite RT states described above would overwhelmingly increase the expandability of the game configuration. On the other hand, in the infinite RT state, the number of continuing games is dependent on luck, and from the perspective of more reliably compensating for excess games, it is preferable to use the fixed RT state described above.

Third Embodiment
In the above first and second embodiments, the invention was mainly described as making it possible to extend the high RT state after the end of AT mode by transitioning to a fixed RT state, but in this embodiment, by transitioning to a fixed RT state just before the end of AT mode, it becomes easier for the high RT state to end in the AT mode ending game.

In this embodiment, the 11th to 15th replays are set as the transition roles to the fixed RT state. The symbol combinations that result in the 11th replay winning, 12th replay winning, and 13th replay winning are as described above, and the symbol combination that results in the 14th replay winning is associated with the "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "first replay" symbol or "second replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "black BAR" symbol or "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R, as shown in Figure 114(a). Additionally, the symbol combination that results in the 15th replay winning is the "First Replay" symbol or "Second Replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Watermelon" symbol, the "Black BAR" symbol or the "Cherry" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Red Bell" symbol or the "White Bell" symbol on the right reel 32R.

When the 11th replay win is made, a transition to the 10th RT state occurs, which is a fixed RT state for one game. When the 12th replay win is made, a transition to the 11th RT state occurs, which is a fixed RT state for two games. When the 13th replay win is made, a transition to the 12th RT state occurs, which is a fixed RT state for three games. When the 14th replay win is made, a transition to the 13th RT state occurs, which is a fixed RT state for four games. When the 15th replay win is made, a transition to the 14th RT state occurs, which is a fixed RT state for five games.

In the lottery table for the second RT state and the lottery table for the third RT state, as shown in FIG. 114(b), index values IV13, 14, and 57-60 are associated with transition replays 1-6. When index values IV=13, 14, and 57-59 are selected, winning roles include 1st replay and 2nd replay, as well as 11th replay through 14th replay for IV=13, 12th replay through 15th replay for IV=14, 11th replay and 13th replay through 15th replay for IV=57, 11th replay and 13th replay through 15th replay for IV=58, and 11th replay, 12th replay, 14th replay, and 15th replay for IV=59. When an index value IV = 60 is won, the winning combinations associated with the 1st replay and the 11th to 15th replays are selected.

Figure 115 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the operation order of stop switches 42-44 when Transition Replays 1-6 are won and the winning patterns that are achieved.

For Transition Replays 1 to 5, four of the six possible operation sequences are associated with a transition role to the fixed RT state (any of the 11th replay to the 15th replay), and the other operation sequences are associated with the first replay and the second replay. For Transition Replay 6, five of the six possible operation sequences are associated with a transition role to the fixed RT state, and one operation sequence is associated with the first replay.

In the RT state processing of this embodiment (FIG. 21), a positive judgment is made in step S516 if the 13th through 15th replay wins are achieved in addition to the 11th and 12th replay wins. Then, in step S517, the RT setting flag that has already been set is cleared, and in step S518, the RT setting flag corresponding to the replay that resulted in the win is set, and then the process proceeds to the fixed RT game number setting process in step S519. More specifically, regarding step S518, if the 11th replay win is achieved, the 10th RT setting flag is set; if the 12th replay win is achieved, the 11th RT setting flag is set; if the 13th replay win is achieved, the 12th RT setting flag is set; if the 14th replay win is achieved, the 13th RT setting flag is set; and if the 15th replay win is achieved, the 14th RT setting flag is set.

In the fixed RT game number setting process in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 116, in step S4901, it is determined whether an 11th re-play win has been achieved. If an 11th re-play win has been achieved, in step S4902, 1 is entered into the fixed RT game number counter, and the number of games in the current fixed RT state is set to 1. If a negative determination is made in step S4901, it is determined in step S4903 whether a 12th re-play win has been achieved. If a 12th re-play win has been achieved, in step S4904, 2 is entered into the fixed RT game number counter, and the number of games in the current fixed RT state is set to 2. If a negative determination is made in step S4903, it is determined in step S4905 whether a 13th re-play win has been achieved. If a 13th re-play win has been achieved, in step S4906, 3 is entered into the fixed RT game number counter, and the number of games in the current fixed RT state is set to 3. If a negative judgment is made in step S4905, a judgment is made in step S4907 as to whether a 14th re-play win has been made. If a 14th re-play win has been made, 4 is input into the fixed RT game number counter in step S4908, and the number of games in the current fixed RT state is set to 4. If a negative judgment is made in step S4907, this means that a 15th re-play win has been made, and in this case, 5 is input into the fixed RT game number counter in step S4909, and the number of games in the current fixed RT state is set to 5. After executing any of the processes in steps S4902, S4904, S4906, S4908, and S4909, the fixed RT game number setting process is terminated.

The push order role processing in this embodiment will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 117.

If it is determined in step S1314 during the push order role processing (Figure 48) that the BAR replay has not been won, the process proceeds to step S5001. In step S5001, it is determined whether the lottery result for this game is a win for any of Transition Replays 1 to 6. If none of Transition Replays 1 to 6 have been won, the process proceeds to the push order bell processing in step S1324. If any of Transition Replays 1 to 6 have been won, the process proceeds to step S5002, where it is determined whether the AT notification flag has been set. If it has not been set, the push order role processing ends.

If the AT notification flag is set, proceed to step S5003, where a process is executed to determine the number of games remaining in AT mode. Then, in step S5004, a determination is made as to whether the number of games remaining is six or more, based on the processing result of step S5003 above. If it is six or more, proceed to step S5005, where the instruction monitor 68 is controlled to issue a push order notification corresponding to the first replay win, and in step S5006 a push order notification command is set, after which the push order role processing is terminated. In this case, no transition to the RT state occurs, and the second RT state or third RT state is basically maintained.

If it is determined in step S5004 that there are fewer than six games remaining in the AT mode, the process proceeds to step S5007. In step S5007, it is determined whether there is one game remaining. If there is one game remaining, the process proceeds to step S5008, where it is determined whether the lottery result for this game is Transition Replay 2 out of Transition Replays 1 to 6. If Transition Replay 2 is not a win, but one of Transition Replays 1, 3, or 6, the process proceeds to step S5009, where the instruction monitor 68 is controlled to issue a push order notification corresponding to an 11th replay win, which is a transition to the 10th RT state, for which the specified number of games is set to one. Then, in step S5006, a process is performed to set a push order notification command, and the push order role processing is terminated. In this case, performing operations in accordance with the push order notification will result in a transition to the 10th RT state, which ends in one game.

If Transition Replay 2 is won in step S5008, the 11th replay is not associated as a transition to the 10th RT state, where the specified number of games is set to 1 game, so proceed to step S5005 and perform processing to notify the push order corresponding to the 1st replay win.

If it is determined in step S5007 that the number of games remaining in the AT mode is not one, the process proceeds to step S5010. In step S5010, it is determined whether there are two games remaining. If there are two games remaining, the process proceeds to step S5011, where it is determined whether the lottery result for this game is Transition Replay 3 out of Transition Replays 1 to 6. If Transition Replay 3 is not a win, but one of Transition Replays 1, 2, or 4 to 6, the process proceeds to step S5012, where the instruction monitor 68 is controlled to issue a push order notification corresponding to a 12th replay win, which is a transition to the 11th RT state, where the specified number of games is set to two. Then, in step S5006, a process is performed to set a push order notification command, and the push order role processing is terminated. In this case, performing operations in accordance with the push order notification will result in a transition to the 11th RT state, which ends after two games.

If Transition Replay 3 is won in step S5013, the 12th replay is not associated as a transition to the 11th RT state, where the specified number of games is set to 2, so proceed to step S5005 and perform processing to notify the push order corresponding to the 1st replay win.

If it is determined in step S5010 that the number of games remaining in the AT mode is not two, the process proceeds to step S5013. In step S5013, it is determined whether or not there are three games remaining. If there are three games remaining, the process proceeds to step S5014, where it is determined whether the lottery result for this game is Transition Replay 4 out of Transition Replays 1 to 6. If Transition Replay 4 is not a win, but one of Transition Replays 1 to 3 or 5 to 6, the process proceeds to step S5015, where the instruction monitor 68 is controlled to issue a push order notification corresponding to a 13th replay win, which is a transition to the 12th RT state, for which the specified number of games is set to three. Then, in step S5006, a process is performed to set a push order notification command, and the push order role processing is terminated. In this case, performing operations in accordance with the push order notification will result in a transition to the 12th RT state, which ends after three games.

If Transition Replay 4 is won in step S5014, the 13th replay is not associated as a transition to the 12th RT state, where the specified number of games is set to 3, so proceed to step S5005 and perform processing to notify the push order corresponding to the 1st replay win.

If step S5013 determines that the number of games remaining in the AT mode is not three, the process proceeds to step S5016. In step S5016, it is determined whether or not there are four games remaining. If there are four games remaining, the process proceeds to step S5017, where it is determined whether the lottery result for this game is Transition Replay 5 out of Transition Replays 1 to 6. If Transition Replay 5 is not a win, but one of Transition Replays 1 to 4 or 6, the process proceeds to step S5018, where the instruction monitor 68 is controlled to issue a push order notification corresponding to a 14th replay win, which is a transition to the 13th RT state, where the specified number of games is set to four. Then, in step S5006, a process is performed to set a push order notification command, and the push order role processing is terminated. In this case, performing operations in accordance with the push order notification will result in a transition to the 13th RT state, which ends after four games.

If Transition Replay 5 is won in step S5017, the 14th replay is not associated as a transition to the 13th RT state, where the specified number of games is set to 4, so proceed to step S5005 and perform processing to notify the push order corresponding to the 1st replay win.

If it is determined in step S5016 that the number of games remaining in AT mode is not four, this means that there are five games remaining. In this case, proceed to step S5019, where it is determined whether the lottery result for this game is Transition Replay 1 of Transition Replays 1 to 6. If Transition Replay 1 is not a win, but one of Transition Replays 2 to 6, proceed to step S5020, where the instruction monitor 68 is controlled to issue a push order notification corresponding to a 15th replay win, which is a transition to the 14th RT state, where the specified number of games is set to five. Then, in step S5006, a process is performed to set the push order notification command, and the push order role processing is terminated. In this case, performing operations in accordance with the push order notification will result in a transition to the 14th RT state, which ends after five games.

If Transition Replay 1 is won in step S5019, the 15th replay is not associated as a transition to the 14th RT state, where the specified number of games is set to 5, so proceed to step S5005 and perform processing to notify the push order corresponding to the 1st replay win.

The transition to fixed RT state just before the end of AT mode is explained with reference to Figure 118.

If one of Transition Replays 1-6 is won at time t30 when there are five games remaining in AT mode, more specifically, if one of Transition Replays 2-6 excluding Transition Replay 1 is won, a push order notification will be generated corresponding to the 15th replay win, which transitions to the 14th RT state, which is a fixed RT state of five games. In this case, as shown in FIG. 118(a), at time t32 when the number of games remaining in AT mode becomes 0, the number of games remaining in the fixed RT state as the 14th RT state (fixed RT game number counter) will become 0, and the high RT state will also end with the final game of AT mode, and the game will transition to the low RT state.

If one of Transition Replays 1-6 is won at time t31 when there is one game remaining in AT mode, more specifically, if one of Transition Replays 1, 3-6 (excluding Transition Replay 2) is won, a push order notification will be generated corresponding to the 11th replay win, which transitions to the 10th RT state, which is a fixed RT state of one game. In this case, as shown in Figure 118(b), at time t32 when the number of games remaining in AT mode becomes 0, the number of games remaining in the fixed RT state as the 10th RT state (fixed RT game number counter) will become 0, and the high RT state will end with the final game of AT mode, and the player will transition to the low RT state.

As described above, by utilizing a configuration that causes a transition to a fixed RT state at the end of AT mode, the high RT state can be ended in the ending game of AT mode. This eliminates advantages and disadvantages between players who, for example, quit playing when AT mode ends without knowing that the high RT state will continue even though AT mode has ended, and players who continue playing knowing that the high RT state will continue, or players who sit down after quitting playing when AT mode ends, thereby increasing fairness in play. Furthermore, by using the above configuration, the distinction between AT mode and normal mode can be made even clearer.

<Modification 1>
By doing as in the third embodiment, the high RT state ends in the AT mode ending game, but as already explained, if a transition to a fixed RT state occurs at the end of the AT mode, it is confirmed that a subsequent bonus notification will not occur. Therefore, in this modified example, a transition to the fixed RT state is made to be advantageous for the player, and more specifically, the bonus winning rate is changed. Figure 119 is a diagram showing a bonus lottery table in this modified example.

As already explained, the bonus lottery table is set so that the probability of winning a bonus varies depending on the type of specific role, and the bonus winning rate also differs depending on the display mode in which the player is playing, such as AT mode, VB mode, or specialized zone. In this modified example, the bonus winning rate also differs depending on whether the game state is an infinite RT state or a fixed RT state, and is set so that the bonus winning rate in a fixed RT state is higher than the bonus winning rate in an infinite RT state. Specifically, in a fixed RT state, the bonus winning rate is set to be 100% for any specific role.

In other words, when the AT mode transitions to a fixed RT state at the end of the mode, it is known in advance that the AT mode will end with just a few games remaining, but the rate of winning additional prizes during those remaining AT mode games is set to be overwhelmingly higher than before. Therefore, the AT mode with a fixed RT state that transitions towards the end of the AT mode constitutes a type of specialized zone.

An example of the display effect by the auxiliary display unit 65 during the fixed RT state will be explained with reference to Figure 120.

Figure 120(a) shows an example of a display effect when the 13th RT state transitions to a fixed RT state. For example, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays three of the numbers 1 through 9 as multiple identifiers. During each game in the fixed RT state, these identifiers are displayed in a variable manner and stopped in a manner corresponding to the result of the additional lottery. If the additional lottery is won, the combination of these identifiers will be a predetermined manner (for example, a matching number such as 333), and if the additional lottery is not won, the combination will be a different manner (for example, a random number such as 334). In the auxiliary display unit 65, characters corresponding to the fixed RT game number (images resembling bullets in the illustration) are displayed in accordance with the number of games played in the fixed RT state, and each character corresponding to the fixed RT game number is eliminated one by one (for example, one by one from the right) for each game played in the fixed RT state.

In other words, it is possible to play a fixed RT state game for as many characters as there are fixed RT game number characters displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, and these characters correspond to the number of games that can be played with a high probability of winning an additional lottery. Then, with each game, the characters corresponding to the fixed RT game number are consumed, and the results of the additional lottery are announced by the stopping result of the identification information.

Figure 120(b) shows an example of the display effect when the 11th RT state transitions to a fixed RT state. Compared to the 13th RT state in Figure 120(a) above, the number of characters displayed corresponding to the fixed RT game number is different; in the 13th RT state there are four characters corresponding to four games, while in the 11th RT state there are two characters corresponding to two games. In other words, the player can understand the number of chances they have based on the number of characters corresponding to the fixed RT game number.

By doing so, it is possible to significantly improve the playability in the fixed RT state in a configuration in which the end of the AT mode is detected in advance by transitioning to the fixed RT state. In other words, when transitioning to a fixed RT state with a relatively large number of games, such as the 13th RT state in Figure 120(a), the end of the AT mode is detected at an earlier stage than when transitioning to a fixed RT state with a small number of games, such as the 11th RT state in Figure 120(b), from the perspective of detecting the end of the AT mode in advance. This is a disappointing result for players hoping for a later bonus notification. On the other hand, as mentioned above, the more games that can be played in the fixed RT state, the greater the chance of winning a bonus. Therefore, from the perspective of hoping for a bonus, transitioning to a fixed RT state with a large number of games is a preferable result. In this way, by configuring the number of games in the specialized zone (fixed RT state) to increase the earlier the end of the AT mode is detected, it is possible to realize innovative playability that allows players to enjoy the AT mode until the end.

<Modification 2>
In this modified example, we will explain the transition of the game state when an additional bonus occurs during the fixed RT state as in the above modified example 1.

As shown in FIG. 121(a), for example, if it is determined in step S915 during the second specific role processing that the AT mode add-on lottery has been won, step S5101 determines whether the current game state is a fixed RT state. If it is not a fixed RT state, proceed to step S916 and perform processing for the AT mode add-on. If the add-on is won during the fixed RT state, proceed to step S5102, determine the number of add-on games this time, and perform processing to add the determined number of add-on games to the latent counter provided in the various counter area 106e. Then, in step S5103, a latent flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d, and the second specific role processing ends. In other words, even if an AT mode add-on is won during the fixed RT state, the process of adding it to the remaining number of games in the AT mode is not immediately performed; instead, the number is temporarily added to the latent counter and the AT mode add-on is carried over.

Also, as shown in FIG. 121(b), in the number of games played management process, if the number of consecutive AT mode games played reaches 0 in step S1614, step S5111 determines whether the above-mentioned latent flag is set. If the latent flag is not set, processing proceeds to step S1615, where processing for AT mode termination is performed. On the other hand, if the latent flag is set, processing proceeds to step S5112, where the latent flag is cleared, and processing is performed in step S5113 to set the latent command as an output target to the display control device 81, and then the number of games played management process terminates. Upon receiving the latent command, the display control device 81 displays the auxiliary display unit 65 in a different display from the normal display after the end of AT mode, with regard to the display effect after the AT mode termination effect. For example, if the normal display after the end of AT mode is an evening background image, then when a latent command is received, a night background image is displayed. Furthermore, if the normal display after the end of AT mode is a background image with a mountain in the background, then when a latent command is received, a background image with a temple in the background is displayed.

As mentioned above, if the latent flag is set, the AT notification flag is not cleared, and the AT mode flag is not cleared either. Therefore, if the first promotion replay 1-4 is won after the fixed RT state ends, a push order notification occurs, allowing the player to return to the second RT state, which is a high RT state. Detailed explanation using diagrams is omitted, but in the winning result response processing, when a third replay win is achieved and the player returns to the second RT state, a positive judgment is made in steps S1503 to S1505. Then, after step S1505, the presence or absence of the latent flag is determined. If the latent flag is set, the flag is cleared, and the value corresponding to the latent counter is added to the AT mode continuation count, after which the winning result response processing ends. In other words, the high RT state is resumed without consuming the additional games that occurred during the fixed RT state.

Using Figure 121(c), we will explain again how the game state changes.

If an add-on occurs at t33 during AT mode in the infinite RT state, the add-on is added to the AT mode continuation count, and a notification of the number of games (add-on notification) is also generated. On the other hand, if an add-on occurs at t35 after transitioning to the fixed RT state at the end of the AT mode at t34, the number of games added is not added to the AT mode continuation count. As a result, the AT mode then ends at t36 with the end of the fixed RT state. After the fixed RT state ends, the game enters the normal RT state (normal play state, low RT state), but because a push order notification can occur, it is possible to quickly achieve a third replay win if the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won, and a transition to the second RT state occurs, for example, at t37. In this case, the add-on generated at t35 is stored as a latent counter, and the value of the latent counter is added to the AT mode continuation count at t37.

By doing so, if an additional bonus occurs during a fixed RT state, it is possible to effectively avoid a situation in which the number of games in the AT mode is reduced by the number of games played during the low RT state from the end of the fixed RT state until the transition to the high RT state (infinite RT state). Incidentally, even if the subtraction of the remaining number of games in the AT mode is stopped during the low RT state from the end of the fixed RT state until the transition to the high RT state, the aforementioned situation in which the number of games in the AT mode is reduced can be avoided. However, if an additional bonus notification is made during the fixed RT state, it will result in an unnatural presentation in which the additional bonus notification is made even though the subtraction of the number of games will definitely be stopped. Furthermore, if an additional bonus notification is made even though it is certain that the high RT state will be interrupted immediately thereafter, i.e., if an additional bonus notification is made before the high RT state is interrupted, the player will play in the interrupted state (low RT state) assuming the additional bonus notification, which will likely cause frustration at not being in the high RT state. In this regard, by configuring the system as described above to transition to a low RT state and then provide an additional notification (enter the value of the latent counter) when the system returns to the high RT state, the player can enjoy the high RT state and AT mode after returning with a fresh feeling, and because the value of the latent counter is not notified in the suspended state, the player can play while looking forward to the notification of the latent counter value after returning, rather than becoming irritated by the low RT state. As a result of the above, in the high RT state and AT mode, the inconvenience of a low RT state occurring due to the intervention of a fixed RT state can be countered by a configuration that can be expected to have a dramatic effect, making it possible to appropriately increase attention to the game.

<Modification 3>
In this modified example, the above configuration is utilized in relation to the upper limit of the advantageous zone. While detailed explanation using figures is omitted, the push order processing in this modified example involves determining the number of games remaining up to the upper limit of the advantageous zone (1500) in step S5003 of the flowchart in FIG. 117. If the number of games remaining in the advantageous zone is six or more, a push order notification for the first replay win is issued (step S5005). If the number of games remaining is five or fewer, a push order notification for transitioning to a fixed RT state with that number of games as the specified number is issued (steps S5007 to S5020). This configuration, which forcibly terminates an AT mode or the like at the upper limit game of the advantageous zone, makes it possible to terminate the high RT state in conjunction with the forcible termination of the AT mode. Therefore, it is possible to more strictly observe the significance of forcibly terminating at the upper limit game.

<Fourth embodiment>
In this embodiment, the configuration of transitioning to a fixed RT state just before the end of the AT mode is utilized in relation to the effects during the AT mode. Figure 122 is a flowchart showing a part of the push order notification process in this embodiment.

That is, if it is determined in step S2409 that the lottery result for this game is not a BAR replay win, then in step S2412 it is determined whether or not a transition replay win has occurred. If a transition replay win has not occurred, then in step S2415 the process proceeds to the push order bell process. If a transition replay win has occurred, then in step S2413 it is determined whether or not the transition replay notification flag has been set. As explained in the first embodiment above, this transition replay notification flag is a flag that is set at the end of the AT mode and enables a transition to a fixed RT state. If it is not set, then the process proceeds to step S2405 and a push order notification effect for the first replay win is generated.

If it is determined in step S2413 that the transition replay notification flag is set, in this embodiment, processing is performed in step S5201 to determine the effect currently being executed. Here, music (specific effect) for AT mode will be used as an example of the effect currently being executed (specific effect). Music for AT mode is an effect that continues for a predetermined period of time, and this predetermined period constitutes one set and is played repeatedly in AT mode. Furthermore, if multiple types of music are set for AT mode, the length of the predetermined period will differ depending on the music, and step S5201 above can also be considered processing to determine the type of music currently being executed (played) and the corresponding length of the predetermined period.

In the following step S5202, a process is executed to determine the period until the end of the current set (period until the end) from the type of music and the length of the predetermined period determined in step S5201. For example, if music with a predetermined period of 60 seconds is being played and the processing timing of step S5202 (timing of operating the start lever 41) is 15 seconds after the start of one set of that music, in step S5202 the remaining period is determined to be 60 seconds - 15 seconds, or 45 seconds.

Then, in step S5203, a process is performed to determine the number of games that can be played during the period determined in step S5202. In this case, for example, the calculation is performed assuming that it takes approximately 5 seconds to complete one game, and in the above example (if the remaining period is 45 seconds), in step S5203, it is calculated that 9 games will be required, which is 45 seconds divided by 5 seconds.

In the following step S5204, it is determined whether the calculated number of games is greater than the number of games remaining in AT mode. If the calculated number of games is less than or equal to the number of games remaining in AT mode, the process proceeds to step S2405, where processing is performed to generate the push order notification effect for the first replay win.

If the calculated number of games is greater than the number of games remaining in AT mode, proceed to step S5205. In step S5205, a push order notification effect is generated to transition to a fixed RT state that allows the number of games corresponding to the calculated number of games to be played, and then the push order notification processing is terminated. Note that in step S5205, as in the third embodiment above, a transition replay can be created in which transition roles to multiple types of fixed RT states are treated as overlapping roles, and which transition role will be awarded can be determined based on the number of games played in the corresponding fixed RT state.

We will now provide additional information on setting the AT mode termination effect in this embodiment. Figure 123 is a flowchart showing part of the complete stop effect setting process in this embodiment.

That is, if it is determined in step S2703 that an AT mode start command has not been received, it is determined in step S2705 whether an AT mode end command has been received. If the AT mode end command has been received and the AT mode will end in this game, the process proceeds to step S5301. In step S5301, it is determined whether or not the game is in a fixed RT state. If the game is not in a fixed RT state, step S5302 is set so that an AT mode end effect is performed. In the AT mode end effect, the number of medals won in this AT mode and the number of games to continue are announced, etc.

When the fixed RT state is reached in step S5301, this means that the transition to the fixed RT state has been made in relation to the music (specific effects) in AT mode, as described above. In this case, in step S5303, a process is executed to set an ending postponement flag in the various flag storage area 183a. The ending postponement flag is a flag for executing the AT mode end effect in a game after the AT mode end game. In this case, since the AT mode end effect will not be executed in the current game, it is a good idea to store information on the number of medals won during the AT mode and the number of games to be continued in a temporary storage area of RAM 183, etc.

Note that if the ending postponement flag is set, the effects during AT mode will also continue to be implemented. More specifically, in the display mode setting process for each game in this embodiment (step S2301), even if the AT mode flag is not set, if the ending postponement flag is set, the effects of the game are set so that the effects during AT mode will be implemented.

After executing step S5302 or step S5303, the process proceeds to step S2717, where processing for additional notification when all the balls are stopped is performed. Then, in step S2718, processing for notifying the fixed RT state is performed.

After executing the processing of step S2718, the process proceeds to step S5304. In step S5304, it is determined whether the current game is the end game in the fixed RT state. If it is the end game, the process proceeds to step S5305, where it is determined whether the above-mentioned ending postponement flag is set. If it is set, the postponement flag is cleared in step S5306, and the AT mode end effect is set to be performed using the content temporarily stored as described above in step S5307. If a negative determination is made in step S5304 or step S5405, or after executing the processing of step S5307, the process proceeds to step S2719, where other stop effect effects are set, and the all stop effect setting process ends.

In other words, if the transition to the fixed RT state coincides with the end of a specific effect during AT mode, the AT mode end effect will be postponed until the fixed RT state ends, and the AT mode end effect will occur when the fixed RT state ends.

The transition to a fixed RT state in relation to specific effects during AT mode will be explained with reference to the timing chart in Figure 124.

As a specific effect during AT mode, for example, in Figure 124 (a), music is played for a set of predetermined periods from timing t40 to timing t42. When a transition replay is won at timing t41, the period up to timing t42, which is the division of the currently regenerated music, is determined. Then, the number of games that can be played in the period from timing t41 to timing t42 is calculated, and this number is compared with the number of games remaining in AT mode. In this case, since the number of games remaining in AT mode is greater, the transition replay won at timing t41 will result in the execution of a push order notification effect, which results in the first replay winning.

If a transition replay is won at t44, just as in the case of t41 above, the period up to t46, which is the division of the music being played, is determined, and the number of games that can be played during that period is calculated and compared with the number of games remaining in AT mode. At t44, the number of games that can be played up to t46 is greater, in which case a push order notification effect for transitioning to the fixed RT state corresponding to that number of games that can be played is generated. Then, although the AT mode ends at t45, music continues to play until the division at t46. When the fixed RT state ends at t46 and transitions to the normal RT state, an AT mode end effect is generated.

Similarly, as shown in Figure 124 (b), if the specific effect that is recognized when a transition replay is won at t44 started at t43 and the dividing line is t47, the period from t44 to t47 is recognized, the number of games that can be played during that period is calculated, and this is compared with the number of games remaining in AT mode. In this case, too, the number of games that can be played is greater, and a push order notification effect for transitioning to the fixed RT state corresponding to that number of games that can be played is generated. In this case, although the AT mode ends at t45, music continues to play until the dividing line at t47. When the fixed RT state ends at t47 and transitions to the normal RT state, an AT mode end effect is generated.

In other words, even if you win the transition replay at time t44, which is the same number of games remaining, the type of fixed RT state (number of games) to transition to will differ depending on the status of the specific effect currently being executed, and as a result, the timing of the AT mode end effect will also differ.

By doing the above, the high RT state will continue until the timing of the predetermined period of music in AT mode. This will prevent the music from ending at the most exciting time (such as the chorus), allowing players to enjoy the game to the fullest.

In this case, even if a transition to a fixed RT state occurs, the AT mode itself ends first, so no push order notification is generated for the extended period, which does not lead to an excessively high advantage, and there is not much difference in the advantage between players who use this to adjust their game progress and those who do not. However, because the high RT state continues, it can provide an incentive to enjoy the presentation to the end, compared to a configuration in which only the presentation is postponed.

When the fixed RT state is used to extend the high RT state until a musical break in AT mode, the AT mode end effect is also postponed. This means that players who want to see the AT mode end effect (such as players who want to know the number of medals they have won) will find it worthwhile to continue playing until the musical break in AT mode, and it is also expected to have the effect of making it seem as if the AT mode itself has been extended.

In the above configuration, in order to explain the relationship with music in AT mode, the display control device 81 is configured to allow transition to a fixed RT state through processing, but as in the other embodiments above, it may also be configured to allow transition to a fixed RT state through processing on the main control device 101 side, and in this case, it is preferable that the main control device 101 side be configured to be able to grasp the execution status of the specific effect.

<Modification>
In this modified example, we will explain the case where the above embodiment is applied to a gaming machine in which the ending effect is performed over a specific number of games at the end of the AT mode. The ending effect notifies the end of the AT mode, and in some cases, if the AT mode has continued for a long time, an effect is set to celebrate the long continuation of the AT mode. Here, we will explain an example in which, when the upper limit of the advantageous zone is reached, the ending effect is performed several games before the upper limit game of the advantageous zone.

As shown in Figure 125, the ending presentation that is implemented at the end of AT mode begins at timing t50. In this case, the ending presentation is implemented over a specific number of games, 10 games. In other words, the ending presentation in this case begins 10 games before the upper limit of the advantageous zone, 1500 games, and timing t50 indicates when the number of games in the advantageous zone reaches 1490.

The display effects in the ending effects are clearly delimited by frames or other divisions for each game in accordance with the progress of the game. More specifically, they are set up so that at the start of each game, the previous frame is updated to the next frame (based on the operation of the start lever 41). In other words, they are set up so that the effect ends 10 games from the start, regardless of the speed at which the game progresses.

If a transition replay is won at time t51 after the beginning of the ending effect, the currently running ending effect is treated as a specific effect, and the specified period of 10 games for that specific effect is determined. The number of games remaining out of those 10 games is then determined, and a transition to a fixed RT state occurs according to the number of remaining games. In other words, at time t51, the number of games remaining in the ending effect is 5, and a transition to a fixed RT state with 5 games as the specified number occurs.

At time t52, the upper limit of 1,500 games in the advantageous zone is reached, and the AT mode ends. In this case, the ending presentation also ends with the game at time t52. As mentioned above, the number of remaining games in the fixed RT state to which the transition was made also becomes 0 at time t52, and the transition from the high RT state to the low RT state also occurs at time t52. In other words, in the game that forces the end of the advantageous zone, the end of the AT mode, the end of the ending presentation, and the end of the high RT state coincide.

<Other embodiments>
The present invention is not limited to the description of the above-described embodiments and modifications, and may be implemented, for example, as follows. The following configurations may be applied individually to the above-described embodiments and modifications, or may be applied in combination with some or all of them to the above-described embodiments and modifications. It is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or some of the various configurations shown in the above-described embodiments and modifications. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects to be achieved) of each configuration to be combined is ensured. The following configurations may be applied individually to a new configuration formed by combining the embodiments and modifications, or may be applied in combination with some or all of them.

(1) The transition notification flag is configured to be set when the number of games remaining in the AT mode reaches 10, but it may also be configured to be set when a greater or lesser number of games remain. When the transition notification flag is set, a transition to the fixed RT state is permitted. It is preferable that this transition be permitted when the number of games remaining is less than the specified number of games for the fixed RT state. Furthermore, in the first embodiment, when the transition notification flag is set, a transition to either a 50-game fixed RT state or a 200-game fixed RT state is permitted. However, the types of fixed RT states permitted may be limited depending on the games permitted for transition (the permitted states differ depending on the notification flag that is set). For example, when a predetermined transition notification flag is set at a predetermined number of games, a transition to one fixed RT state (200 games) is permitted, but a transition to the other fixed RT state (50 games) is not permitted. Furthermore, in a configuration that aims to extend the RT state by allowing a transition to an infinite RT state rather than a fixed RT state, as in Variation 2 of the second embodiment, the transition notification flag may be set when the number of games remaining in the AT mode is equal to or less than the denominator of the winning probability of the fall replay in the infinite RT state to which the transition is to be made. That is, for example, if the winning probability of the fall replay in the infinite RT state to which the transition is to be made is 1 in 50, the infinite RT state will continue for an average of 50 games even if a push order notification is not generated. However, as described above, if the configuration allows a transition to the infinite RT state when the number of games remaining in the AT mode is 10, which is less than the denominator of the winning probability (1 in 50), it is possible to extend the RT state rather than ending the AT mode in the infinite RT state before the transition.

(2) In the first embodiment, when Transition Replay 1 is won, an 11th replay win occurs, causing a transition to a fixed RT state of 50 games, and when Transition Replay 2 is won, a 12th replay win occurs, causing a transition to a fixed RT state of 200 games. The winning probabilities for Transition Replay 1 and Transition Replay 2 are differentiated to ensure a balance with the degree of advantage (the number of games to which the fixed RT state is transitioned). However, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which the 11th replay and the 12th replay are overlappingly won in the same Transition Replay, and the likelihood of achieving an 11th replay win and a 12th replay win differs depending on the occurrence rate and selection rate of push order notifications, etc., thereby ensuring a balance with the degree of advantage (the number of games to which the fixed RT state is transitioned).

(3) If a transition role (such as an 11th replay) that results in a transition to a fixed RT state is won even though no push order notification is issued when a transition replay is won, the system may be configured not to transition to the fixed RT state. Furthermore, if a transition role (such as an 11th replay) that results in a transition to a fixed RT state is won even though no push order notification is issued when a transition replay is won, the system may be configured to impose a penalty. Examples of penalties include limiting the implementation of AT mode or CZ mode transition lotteries or additional lotteries for a predetermined number of games, lowering the probability of winning, or reducing the benefits of winning (number of additional games or mode to transition to).

(4) The degree of advantage during the carryover state in which a bonus win is carried over may be different between when a bonus win is won during a fixed RT state and when a bonus win is won during an infinite RT state. For example, the replay probability may be different. A configuration may be adopted in which the degree of advantage is higher when a bonus win is won during a fixed RT state than when a bonus win is won during an infinite RT state, increasing the replay probability.

(5) The degree of advantage during the carryover state in which a bonus win is carried over may be different between when a bonus is won during a high RT state and when a bonus is won during a low RT state. For example, the replay probability may be different. A configuration may be adopted in which the degree of advantage is higher when a bonus is won during a high RT state than when a bonus is won during a low RT state, increasing the replay probability.

(6) Depending on the type of fixed RT state, the degree of advantage during the carryover state in which a bonus win is carried over may be different between when a bonus is won during a specified fixed RT state and when a bonus is won during another fixed RT state. For example, the replay probability may be different. A configuration may be adopted in which the degree of advantage is higher when a bonus is won during a specified fixed RT state than when a bonus is won during another fixed RT state, increasing the replay probability.

(7) When a transition replay is won, in addition to the 11th replay as a transition to the fixed RT state, the first replay as a maintenance role that does not result in a transition to the RT state, and the second replay as a role that causes a fall to the first RT state can be won multiple times. However, the configuration may not include either of these maintenance roles or fall roles, or it may be a configuration that does not include either one of them.

(8) The winning probability of a transition replay may be other than that described in the above embodiments and variations. For example, in the first embodiment, the winning probability was set to a level where it was expected that a win would occur once between the time the transition notification flag was set and the time the AT mode ended. However, the winning probability may be set to a level where it is unlikely or almost impossible between the time the transition notification flag was set and the time the AT mode ended. More specifically, for example, the winning probability of a transition replay may be set to approximately 1 in 100, so that it is expected that a win will occur approximately once in 10 times during the 10 games between the time the transition notification flag was set and the time the AT mode ended.

(9) The transition notification flag is set depending on the number of games remaining in the AT mode (when there are 10 games remaining), but it may also be set through a lottery or the like. For example, when there are 10 games remaining, a lottery may be held to determine whether or not to set the transition notification flag, i.e., whether or not to allow a transition to the fixed RT state, and if the lottery is won, the transition notification flag may be set.

(10) The transition notification flag may be configured to be set depending on the game status in AT mode. For example, if the number of AT mode executions (continuations) is less than a predetermined number of games (100 games), the transition notification flag may be set or easily set when there are 10 games remaining. Conversely, if the number of AT mode executions (continuations) is equal to or greater than a predetermined number of games, the transition notification flag may not be set or may be difficult to set when there are 10 games remaining. Also, if the number of medals acquired or paid out in AT mode is large, the transition notification flag may be difficult to set or not set, and if the number of medals acquired or paid out is small, the transition notification flag may be set or may be easy to set.

(11) When the fixed RT state is entered during AT mode, the AT mode may be terminated, or the push order notification may not be generated in AT mode, or the push order notification may be less likely to be generated.

(12) When the later-adding flag is set, a transition to the fixed RT state will not occur even if the display remaining number counter HG reaches a predetermined value (10). However, even if the later-adding flag is set, a push order notification, etc. may be provided so that a transition to the fixed RT state will occur uniformly or partially by lottery when the display remaining number counter HG reaches 10.

(13) The presentation at the start of the fixed RT state may be different depending on the number of high RT state games that can be played in the fixed RT state to which the transition is made. The presentation content during the fixed RT state may also be different.

(14) The total replay probability may be different depending on the type of fixed RT state. In this case, from the perspective that the transition to a fixed RT state with a higher replay probability results in less medal loss, the transition to a fixed RT state with a higher replay probability is more advantageous for the player. For example, if this configuration is applied to a configuration in which a transition to a fixed RT state occurs depending on the amount of excess in the advantageous zone, the configuration may be such that the transition to a fixed RT state with a higher replay probability occurs the greater the amount of excess in the advantageous zone.

(15) A configuration may be adopted in which a transition to a fixed RT state occurs after a bonus has ended without going through the normal game state. In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which a transition to another fixed RT state is permitted from the fixed RT state to which a transition occurs after a bonus has ended. For example, the transition from the fixed RT state to the fixed RT state may be used to extend the high RT state after the AT mode has ended. More specifically, if a bonus is won or the bonus has ended near the end of the AT mode, a transition to a later fixed RT state may be permitted in the previous fixed RT state using a push-forward notification, etc., whereas if a bonus is won or the bonus has ended in the early or middle stages of the AT mode, a transition from the previous fixed RT state to a later fixed RT state may be restricted using a push-forward notification, etc.

(16) While the configuration allows transition to a fixed RT state towards the end of the AT mode, it is also possible to configure it so that transition to a fixed RT state is allowed from the beginning. For example, as a type of fixed RT state, a fixed RT state with a specified number of games such as 1500 games, which is the upper limit of the advantageous zone, or 1800 games or 1200 games, which are close to the upper limit, may be set, and when a transition role that allows transition to the fixed RT state is won, a push order notification or the like may be made to cause a transition regardless of the number of games remaining in the AT mode.

(17) The push order notification is used to allow or restrict transition to a fixed RT state when a transition replay is won, but it may also be configured so that a transition to a fixed RT state always occurs when a transition replay is won.

(18) The order in which stop switches 42-44 are operated when a transition replay is won determines whether or not a transition to the fixed RT state occurs. However, it is sufficient that a transition to the fixed RT state occurs or not depending on the manner in which the stop operation is performed when a transition replay is won. For example, if a specific reel is stopped at a specific timing, a specific stop result occurs, resulting in a transition to the fixed RT state; and if the specific reel is stopped at a timing other than the specific timing, a different stop result occurs, resulting in no transition to the fixed RT state.

(19) Although the configuration is such that an increase in medals cannot be expected when the fixed RT state is played in normal mode rather than AT mode, it is also possible to configure it so that an increase in medals can be expected. Even in this case, it is sufficient that the number of medals that can be expected when playing in normal mode is less than the number of medals that can be expected when playing in AT mode in the fixed RT state. Also, although the configuration is such that a decrease in medals is unlikely when playing in normal mode in the fixed RT state, it is also possible to configure it so that a decrease in medals can occur. Even in this case, it is sufficient that the number of medals that is decreased when playing in normal mode in the fixed RT state is less than the number of medals that is decreased when playing in normal mode in the low RT state.

(20) In a configuration in which the amount exceeding the upper limit of the advantageous zone is guaranteed by normal mode and a high RT state, an example has been shown in which the amount exceeding the upper limit is guaranteed by using the specified number of games in the fixed RT state and the fall rate of the infinite RT state. However, a configuration in which these fixed RT states and infinite RT states are mixed (a configuration in which transition to either state is possible) may also be used. Furthermore, a configuration in which the player can choose between a fixed RT state and an infinite RT state may be used. In this case, a configuration in which the player can choose between a fixed RT state and an infinite RT state that provide equal guarantees is preferable. For example, a configuration in which the player can choose between a fixed RT state with a specified number of 50 games and an infinite RT state with a fall rate of 1 in 50 may be used. Furthermore, these configurations may not only be applied to configurations in which the amount exceeding the upper limit of the advantageous zone is guaranteed, but may also be applied to configurations in which the high RT state is intentionally extended (for example, the first embodiment).

(21) If the lottery for transitioning to AT mode is won during a fixed RT state, the counting of the number of remaining games in AT mode may be stopped in the low RT state when the fixed RT state ends. In this case, by transitioning to the fixed RT state during AT mode and continuing to count the number of remaining games in the low RT state when the fixed RT state ends, it is possible to ensure the advantage of consecutive wins in AT mode using the fixed RT state, and to reduce the penalty if a transition to the fixed RT state occurs during AT mode due to an operational error, etc.

(22) In a configuration that allows a transition to a fixed RT state when an excess of the advantageous zone occurs, the selection rate of the type of fixed RT state (number of games) to which a transition is allowed may vary depending on the setting value. In this way, there is room to predict the setting value from the type of fixed RT state, and this prediction can be used as a guarantee for the excess.

(23) Even in a configuration in which the fixed RT state is used to match the end game of the AT mode with the end game of the high RT state, a configuration may be adopted in which a transition to the fixed RT state is more likely to occur towards the end of the AT mode. That is, for example, the second RT state may be a low-probability state in which a transition replay is less likely to be won, and the third RT state may be a high-probability state in which a transition replay is more likely to be won, and a configuration may be adopted in which a transition from the second RT state to the third RT state is permitted when the end of the AT mode is approached (for example, when there are 20 games remaining) (a push order notification corresponding to the fourth and fifth replay wins is generated when the second promotion replay is won). In particular, since the specified number of games for the fixed RT state in order to match the end game of the AT mode with the end game of the high RT state tends to be short, by doing so, it is possible to prevent disadvantages caused by an unintentional transition to the fixed RT state.

(24) In a configuration that uses a fixed RT state to match the end game of the AT mode with the end game of the high RT state, the shorter the specified number of games for the fixed RT state, the more preferable it is, since transitioning to the fixed RT state negates the existence of a subsequent bonus notification. However, the shorter the specified number of games, the more likely it is that an event will occur in which a transition to the fixed RT state cannot occur if a transition replay is not won. In this case, it is advisable to increase the probability of winning a transition replay.

(25) In a configuration in which the fixed RT state is used to match the end game of the AT mode with the end game of the high RT state, if there is no transition role to a fixed RT state with a specified number that is the same as the number of games remaining in the AT mode, the configuration may be such that the transition is to a fixed RT state with a specified number that is close to the number of games remaining.

(26) In the fixed RT state, the probability of winning an additional bonus in AT mode is configured to be higher than in the infinite RT state, but the configuration may also be such that the number of additional bonus games upon winning is more likely to be greater in the fixed RT state, thereby improving the bonus bonus performance. In this case, the probability of winning an additional bonus in AT mode may be the same or equivalent.

(27) By increasing the probability of winning an additional bonus in AT mode in the fixed RT state, a balance is ensured with the negation of the existence of a subsequent bonus notification by transitioning to the fixed RT state. However, it is sufficient if the fixed RT state is a state that is preferable to the player. For example, transitioning to the fixed RT state may be configured to make rare images easier to see than before, or transitioning to the fixed RT state may be configured to make it easier to determine and predict the setting values than before.

(28) In a configuration in which a fixed RT state is set depending on the execution status of a specific effect during AT mode, music and display effects played during AT mode have been described as examples, but the specific effect is not limited to music and display effects, and may also be the movement of a special device or vibration effects using a speaker. Furthermore, the specified period for the execution period of a specific effect may differ depending on the type of specific effect, or multiple specified periods of different lengths may be set for one specific effect.

(29) The specified period of a specific effect is not limited to the period from the beginning to the end of the specific effect, but may be comprised of multiple specified periods separated by delimiters. More specifically, a specific effect may be comprised of multiple specified periods, such as a first specified period, a second specified period, a third specified period, etc., from the start of the specific effect. It is preferable that the delimiters between the first and second specified periods, and between the second and third specified periods, are clearly defined as processing delimiters, such as by a difference in volume of a specified value or more, or by the timing of a frame update in a display effect, and more preferably, by delimiters that are discernible to the player.

(30) In a configuration that provides a high-probability state in which a transition to a fixed RT state is likely to occur (a state in which the probability of winning a transition replay is high, for example, the third RT state in the modified example of the first embodiment) and a low-probability state in which a transition to a fixed RT state is unlikely to occur (a state in which the probability of winning a transition replay is low, for example, the second RT state in the modified example of the first embodiment), the high-probability state may be configured in which a transition to a fixed RT state is likely to occur, but a transition to a low-probability state or a low RT state is likely to occur. More specifically, if the high-probability state is the third RT state, then in the lottery table for the third RT state, increasing the probability of winning a BAR replay increases the probability of transition to the second RT state, and increasing the probability of winning a fall replay increases the probability of transition to a low RT state. Increasing the probability of transitioning to a low probability state, as in the former, increases the dominance of the high probability state during AT mode, and increasing the probability of transitioning to a low RT state, as in the latter, makes it possible to differentiate not only the ease of transitioning to a fixed RT state but also the ease of ending the infinite RT state (probability of the transition period) between when AT mode ends in a high probability state and when AT mode ends in a low probability state.

(31) In the configuration in which the remaining time is determined from the predetermined period of a specific effect and the number of games that can be played in the remaining time is calculated, the length of the time required to play one game is calculated as a fixed period (5 seconds), but the length of the time required to play one game is not limited to the above. For example, the average value of the time required to play one game from the games played up to that point may be calculated and used to calculate the number of games that can be played in the remaining time. In this way, it is possible to end the high RT state at a convenient time for a specific effect, for both players who progress quickly and players who progress slowly. Furthermore, the length of time required to play one game may be set depending on the type of specific effect being played, the number of specific effect executions up to that point, and the number of AT mode games that have been executed up to that point. If the type of special effect is unusual, if the number of times that the special effect has been executed up to that point is small, or if the number of games executed in AT mode is small, it is thought that players will continue to play while savoring (and enjoying, savoring) the special effect that is being executed even at the end of the AT mode, and in that case, it is thought that the length of time required to execute one game may be long.

(32) In the infinite RT state in the high RT state, when a second re-play win is achieved as a fall re-play, the system transitions to the first RT state as a low RT state. During AT mode, a push order notification that will not result in a second re-play win is issued, thereby avoiding transition to the first RT state. However, in situations where the conditions for transitioning to the first RT state are not met, such as when there are games remaining in AT mode, the system may be configured not to transition to the first RT state even if a second re-play win is achieved. Also, in the fixed RT state in the high RT state, a fall re-play does not result in a second re-play win, but the system may be configured so that the fixed RT state does not end even if a second re-play win is achieved, even if a second re-play win is achieved, even if a second re-play win is possible.

Furthermore, in the above embodiments and their variations, as well as other embodiments, the inventions described in the fixed RT state may be replaced and applied to the infinite RT state, and the inventions described in the infinite RT state may be replaced and applied to the fixed RT state. In this case, if the specified number of games in the fixed RT state and the denominator of the winning probability of a fall replay in the infinite RT state are the same or similar, the RT state will be one in which an equal number of games can be played. Furthermore, the fixed RT state and the infinite RT state may be mixed.

(33) The advantageous zone may be defined as follows: A zone in which a push order notification corresponding to a win related to the maximum payout number occurs at least once. More specifically, a zone in which a push order notification resulting in the payout of nine medals occurs at least once in a push order bell in which nine, three, or zero medals may be paid out depending on the stopping order. Furthermore, if a transition to an advantageous zone occurs but the game ends in CZ mode only, the configuration may also include cases in which a push order notification corresponding to a win related to the maximum payout number does not occur. In other words, a transition to AT mode may cause a push order notification corresponding to a win related to the maximum payout number to occur at least once, and the game may end in CZ mode without a push order notification corresponding to a win related to the maximum payout number occurring.

(34) To prevent differences in the probability or advantage of the transition lottery to AT mode, etc., or the additional lottery, depending on the setting value, these lotteries are configured to be conducted based on lottery results with no particular setting differences. However, even if the lottery is conducted based on lottery results with setting differences, the benefits upon winning (benefits, probability of winning the transition lottery, etc., and number of additional games) may be adjusted to prevent setting differences. For example, a specific role may be set with a 1 in 100 probability of winning in setting 1 and a 1 in 10 probability of winning in setting 6, and the probability of winning the additional lottery in AT mode when the specific role is won may be set to 1 in 20 in setting 1 and 1 in 20 in setting 6. In this way, the total probability of winning the additional lottery will be 1 in 200 regardless of the setting value, eliminating setting differences.

(35) In order to prevent differences in the probability or degree of advantage of the lottery for transition to AT mode, etc. or the lottery for additional bonuses depending on the setting value, these lotteries are conducted based on lottery results with no particular setting differences. However, these lotteries may also be conducted based on lottery results with setting differences. In this case, the setting value will cause differences in the probability or degree of advantage of the lottery for transition to AT mode, etc. or the lottery for additional bonuses, and setting values that cause changes in the rate and pattern of increase in gaming media can also cause differences in the performance of AT mode, etc.

(36) While the above description has primarily focused on games where the number of bets is three, the above invention may also be applied to one-bet games where the number of bets is one or two-bet games where the number of bets is two. For example, depending on whether the fixed RT state or the infinite RT state is in, a configuration may be possible in which a one-bet game or a two-bet game can be consumed (played), but which cannot be consumed (played) with other bet numbers.

(37) The number of games that are forced to end in the advantageous zone is not limited to the above number (1,500) and may be more or less than that.

(38) The condition for forcibly terminating the advantageous zone may not only be the consumption of the maximum number of games (1,500), but also, or instead, a maximum number of medals that can be paid out (3,000).

(39) The condition for forcibly terminating a favorable zone may not only be the consumption of the maximum number of games (1500), but also, or instead, a maximum net increase in the number of medals (for example, 2400). The net increase in the number of medals is the number of medals paid out minus the number of bets, and the favorable zone may be forcibly terminated when this net increase in the number of medals reaches the upper limit of the favorable zone. In this case, for each game in the favorable zone, it is advisable to determine whether the number of games played has reached the upper limit of games or whether the net increase in the number of medals has reached the upper limit of net increase in medals, and to forcibly terminate the favorable zone when either limit is reached.

(40) The bonus lottery table and bonus game number lottery table are not limited to those described above, and the winning probability and the range and average number of bonus games when a win occurs can also be set arbitrarily. For example, the bonus game number may be a number of games that exceeds the upper limit of the advantageous zone (e.g., 2,000 games).

(41) While the pseudo-bonus VB mode can only be entered during AT mode, it may also be possible to enter it from normal mode. In this case, if the lottery for entering VB mode is won, the winning game is set as the starting game, and the display of the interval indicator can begin before operation of the game following the starting game is permitted. Also, in this case, if the first BB or second BB is won simultaneously with VB mode, the game in which the first BB or second BB is won can be set as the starting game.

(42) Examples of specific roles that trigger the lottery for moving to a favorable zone or the lottery for additional bonuses have been described above, including small roles that result in the payout of medals, such as strong cherries, weak cherries, strong watermelons, and weak watermelons; specific replays that share the same winning pattern as strong cherries; and roles that overlap these small roles or specific replays with bonuses. However, the results that trigger the above lottery are not limited to these results. For example, a single role of a specified bonus or a normal replay may also be used to trigger the lottery for moving to a favorable zone. Furthermore, a lottery for moving to a favorable zone may also be based on the number of games played or the cumulative number of points awarded separately based on each result. In any case, it is sufficient that the trigger for the lottery for moving to a favorable zone does not result in a difference in the winning probability or occurrence frequency depending on the set value.

(43) Regarding the advantageous zone, the winning probability of the transition lottery and the benefits upon winning (transition mode, number of additional games, etc.) are configured to be the same regardless of the set value, but the winning probability, etc. may be configured to differ depending on the set value. In this case, depending on the type of result that triggers the transition lottery, etc., there may be a configuration in which the probability and benefits upon winning differ depending on the set value, and there may be a configuration in which the probability and benefits upon winning do not differ depending on the set value.

(44) While the number of games continued during a favorable zone is managed by the favorable zone game count AG, etc., it is also possible to configure the number of sets as a set, for example, until a predetermined number of games have been played (for example, 50 games) or until a predetermined termination condition is met (for example, until three consecutive replay wins have been achieved), and manage the number of sets accordingly. Specifically, the AT mode is configured to have a predetermined number of games (50 games) as one set, and the number of sets is determined by lottery when the AT mode starts or when the AT mode transition lottery is held. The AT mode then ends when the determined number of sets has been played. In this case, if a specific condition is met during the AT mode, such as when a specific role is won, a lottery to add more sets to the AT mode can be held, and if the lottery is won, the number of sets can be added according to the winning details.

(45) When the push order bell or push order replay is won, the winning combination and the bonus awarded differ depending on the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and the degree of advantage to the player differs depending on whether or not the stopping order is notified. However, any combination that differs in the degree of advantage to the player may be used as long as notification regarding the stopping operation is made.

For example, on the left reel 32L as a specified reel, the first symbol (e.g., the "black BAR" symbol) and the second symbol (e.g., the "red 7" symbol) are placed in a location where they cannot be aimed at simultaneously (at positions more than five symbols apart). The winning patterns for the first and second results are set so that a first winning result is achieved when the first symbol on the left reel 32L, a predetermined symbol on the middle reel 32M (for example, a "first replay" symbol or a "second replay" symbol), and a predetermined symbol on the right reel 32R (for example, a "first replay" symbol or a "second replay" symbol) stop on an active line, and a second winning result is achieved when the second symbol on the left reel 32L, a predetermined symbol on the middle reel 32M (for example, a "first replay" symbol or a "second replay" symbol), and a predetermined symbol on the right reel 32R (for example, a "first replay" symbol or a "second replay" symbol) stop on an active line. In this case, if the first result is won and the first symbol is targeted, the first result prize can be won; however, if the second symbol is targeted instead of the first symbol, the first result prize cannot be won and the corresponding bonus cannot be awarded. Similarly, if the second result is won and the second symbol is targeted, the second result prize can be won; however, if the first symbol is targeted instead of the second symbol, the second result prize cannot be won and the corresponding bonus cannot be awarded. Furthermore, a specific combination is provided that results in either the first or second result being won, and when the specific combination is won, it is possible to notify the player whether the first or second result has been won (whether the first or second symbol should be targeted when the left reel 32L is stopped). Even with this configuration, the notification allows the player to win the winning result (either the first or second result), and the presence or absence of this notification changes the player's advantage. The advantageous zone may include a situation that includes at least one of the following modes: a mode in which such notifications are more likely to be issued, a mode in which the probability of transitioning to a mode in which such notifications are more likely to be issued, or a mode in which the transition lottery has been won but the player has not yet transitioned to one of these modes; or, the advantageous zone may include a situation that includes at least one of the above modes, including the above modes and modes based on the push order combination.

In other words, the stop operation to change the stop outcome even for the same winning combination is not limited to the stop order, but can be any stop operation pattern including the stop operation timing, and the notification to perform such a stop operation pattern is not limited to a push order notification, but can be any pattern notification related to the operation pattern.

Furthermore, multiple winning roles are set when a predetermined index value IV is won, and the winning role varies depending on the stop operation mode, such as the stop order and stop operation timing. However, the following may also be done. That is, when a specific index value IV is won, a specific role is won, and the stop operation mode corresponding to the specific role is then determined by lottery. If the player's stop operation mode matches the lottery results for that stop operation mode, a win for the specific role is achieved. If the player's stop operation mode does not match the lottery results for that stop operation mode, a win for the specific role is not achieved, or a win for a role other than the specific role is achieved. In this way, the lottery for the game result and the lottery for the stop operation mode may be performed separately (two-stage lottery).

(46) The configuration may also be such that push order notifications are made in CZ mode and premonition mode. More specifically, when a transition to a specific game state occurs as an advantageous zone, including AT mode, CZ mode, premonition mode, etc., the advantageous zone may not end until the push order notification is made at least a predetermined number of times (once).

(47) The ball payout rate is configured to change depending on each setting value, with setting 1 having the lowest ball payout rate and setting 6 having the highest ball payout rate. However, any configuration may be used as long as the rate of increase or decrease or the manner in which balls (game media) payout increase or decrease varies depending on the setting value. For example, the ball payout rates of some setting values may be the same, such as setting 1 and setting 2 being the same, while the ball payout rates of other setting values may be different. Furthermore, settings 1, 3, and 5 may be configured to have a high rate of increase or decrease in ball payout, while settings 2, 4, and 6 may have a low rate of increase or decrease in ball payout. Furthermore, settings 1 and 5 may be configured to increase ball payout by a predetermined amount in a short time and decrease by a predetermined amount over a long time, settings 2, 3, and 4 may take longer than settings 1 and 5 to increase by the predetermined amount and take less time than settings 1 and 5 to decrease by the predetermined amount, and setting 6 may have almost no increase or decrease in ball payout. In these cases, the ball payout rate of each setting value may be the same.

(48) While a slot machine has been described that has three reels and corresponding stop switches arranged in parallel, it is not limited to this configuration and may, for example, be a slot machine that has five reels and corresponding stop switches arranged in parallel. From the perspective of preventing erroneous operation when stopping the reels, it is sufficient to have at least two reels and corresponding stop switches. Also, while a slot machine has been described that has one active line when the number of bets is three, it is not limited to this configuration and may, for example, have five active lines.

(49) While a specific example has been given of a slot machine 10, the present invention may also be applied to a gaming machine that combines a slot machine and a pachinko machine. That is, instead of the medal insertion and medal payout functions of a slot machine, the gaming machine may have ball insertion and ball payout functions like a pachinko machine (a so-called ball-using reel gaming machine). If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, the amusement hall can handle only balls as gaming value, thereby eliminating problems seen in current amusement halls where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed, such as the burden on facilities and restrictions on the location of gaming machines due to the separate handling of medals and balls as gaming value.

For example, in pachinko machines or ball-operated reel gaming machines, the configuration may have multiple settings that change the payout rate, etc., and the above-mentioned inventions may be applied to suggest or teach these settings. In this case, in pachinko machines that have high-probability and low-probability states where the probability of winning a jackpot is high and low, the advantageous zone in the slot machine 10 may be applied as the high-probability state, and in pachinko machines that have high-ball entry states and low-ball entry states where the rate of balls entering a predetermined entry section is high and low, the advantageous zone in the slot machine 10 may be applied as the high-ball entry state, and the above-mentioned inventions may be applied.

<Inventions extracted from the above embodiments>
The following describes characteristic configurations extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, while indicating, as necessary, their effects, etc. Note that, for ease of understanding, the corresponding configurations in the above-described embodiments are indicated in parentheses as appropriate, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations indicated in parentheses.

The inventions described in the following feature groups address the following background art: "Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as types of gaming machines. These gaming machines are known to have a configuration in which an internal lottery is held when predetermined lottery conditions are met, and a bonus is awarded to the player depending on the result of the internal lottery. Specifically, with slot machines, when a start lever is operated while medals are bet as gaming media, an internal lottery is held and the reels begin to spin. If a stop switch is operated while the reels are spinning, the reels stop. If the reels stop corresponding to the result of the internal lottery, a bonus is awarded according to the result (see, for example, JP 2008-295707 A). The inventions address the following problem: "The gaming machines exemplified above need to be designed to enhance the gaming experience, and there is still room for improvement in this regard."

<Features Group A>
Feature A1. A plurality of rotating bodies (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of pictures are applied in the circumferential direction,
Display units (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allow some of the patterns on each rotating body to be visible;
a start operation means (start lever 41) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that, when operated, stop the rotation of each of the rotating bodies;
a drive control means (a function of executing reel control processing by the main control device 101) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to grant a special benefit to a player based on the operation of the start operation means;
a bonus awarding means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) that can award a bonus corresponding to a predetermined result when a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an active position set at a position where the pattern is visible via the display unit, when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising:
A re-game state (high RT state) in which the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be a predetermined re-game result is higher than the normal game state (normal game state, first RT state, normal RT state, low RT state),
When a predetermined termination condition (fall re-play winning, second re-play winning) is established, the first re-play state (second RT state, third RT state, infinite RT state) that can transition to the normal game state,
A second re-game state (a fixed RT state such as a fourth RT state) in which the game state transitions to the normal game state when a predetermined number of games have been executed, or in which the predetermined termination condition is set to be less likely to be met than in the first re-game state;
is set,
In the first replay state, a mode notification means (a function of executing a push order role process by the main control device 101) capable of executing mode notification for a plurality of stop modes including the operation mode of the stop operation means that makes it possible to prevent the establishment of the predetermined end condition (avoid winning the second replay), by a predetermined notification means;
Equipped with
a low notification state (for example, a normal mode) and a high notification state (for example, an AT mode) are set so that the frequency of execution of the mode notification by the mode notification means is relatively high and low;
A grasping means capable of grasping the number of remaining games in the first re-game state in the high notification state (a function of executing a process of grasping the number of AT mode continuations such as step S3202 in the fixed RT process by the main control device 101);
An allowance means (a function that executes a process of setting a transition notification flag by the main control device 101 and a process of notifying the press order of an 11th replay win, etc., when a transition replay is won) that allows a transition to the second replay state in a specific situation where the number of remaining games grasped by the grasp means is equal to or less than the specific number, or equal to or less than the denominator in the probability of the predetermined termination condition being met in the second replay state;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, a lottery is conducted by the lottery means and the orbiting body begins to rotate, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body stops while rotating, and if the stop result corresponds to the lottery result, a bonus is awarded by the bonus awarding means.In this so-called slot machine, a first re-play state is set in which the machine can transition to the normal game state when a predetermined termination condition is met, and a second re-play state is set in which the machine transitions to the normal game state when a specific number of games are played, or in which the predetermined termination condition is set to be less likely to be met than in the first re-play state.A mode notification including an operation mode that makes it possible to prevent the predetermined termination condition from being met in the first re-play state may be made by a predetermined notification means, and the continuation of the first re-play state is managed based on the presence or absence of such mode notification. Furthermore, if the number of remaining games in the first re-play state falls below a specific number, which is the number of times the second re-play state will continue, or if a specific situation occurs in which the number of remaining games in the first re-play state is equal to or less than the denominator in the probability of a predetermined termination condition being met in the second re-play state, transition from the first re-play state to the second re-play state is permitted. This makes it possible to essentially extend the first re-play state, which has a higher probability of resulting in a re-play, by the length of the second re-play state. This makes it possible to create new gameplay features that utilize the first re-play state and the second re-play state.

Note that "a specific situation in which the number of remaining games grasped by the grasping means is equal to or less than the denominator in the probability of the predetermined termination condition being met in the second re-play state" can be expressed more specifically as "a specific situation in which the value obtained by dividing 1 by the number of remaining games grasped by the grasping means is equal to or greater than the probability of the predetermined termination condition being met in the second re-play state." Such modification of expression can also be applied to other feature groups and other features.

Feature A2. A gaming machine as described in Feature A1, characterized in that it is equipped with a means for restricting the permission means from allowing transition to the second replay state in normal circumstances where, in the first replay state, the number of remaining games grasped by the grasping means is less than the specific number or is greater than the denominator in the probability of the predetermined termination condition being met in the second replay state (a function for executing processing to notify the player of the push order for winning the first replay when a transition replay is won by the main control unit 101).

The above configuration prevents transition to the second replay state before the number of remaining games falls below a specific number, or when the probability of a specified termination condition being met in the second replay state is greater than the denominator. This prevents the player from suffering a disadvantage due to an event such as the replay state ending without playing all the games available in the first replay state.

Feature A3: A condition determination means (a function for determining whether the result of the game lottery by the main control device 101 is a transition replay win) is provided to determine whether a predetermined specific condition is met in the specific situation,
The gaming machine described in feature A1 or feature A2, wherein the allowing means allows transition to the second re-play state when the condition determining means determines that the specific condition has been met.

With the above configuration, the replay state is not uniformly extended; rather, if a specific condition is met, the replay state can be extended, and if the specific condition is not met, the state will not be extended. This creates a gameplay experience that encourages players to look forward to the specific condition being met after a specific situation has occurred, and increases the excitement of specific situations.

Feature A4. A gaming machine as described in Feature A3, wherein the probability of the specific condition being met is equal to or greater than the probability of 1 divided by the specific number, or equal to or greater than the probability of the predetermined termination condition being met in the second replay state.

In accordance with the above configuration, in the configuration of feature A3, once the number of remaining games falls below a specific number, or once a specific situation occurs in which the number of remaining games is equal to or less than the denominator in the probability of a predetermined termination condition being met in the second replay state, the specific condition is generally considered to be met, allowing the player to enjoy playing in that specific situation. By doing this, it is possible to set the number of games to continue in the first replay state to a number greater than the number of games at which a status notification can be made, greatly increasing anticipation for transitioning to the first replay state.

The above configuration can also be expressed as "the denominator of the probability of the specific condition being met is equal to or less than the specific number, or the denominator of the probability of the predetermined termination condition being met in the second replay state is equal to or less than the denominator."

Feature A5. The lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined transition result (11th re-game, 12th re-game), and the transition picture combination corresponding to the transition result (the result corresponding to the 11th re-game winning or the 12th re-game winning) stops at the valid position, thereby transitioning to the second re-game state,
The gaming machine according to Feature A3 or Feature A4, wherein the specific condition is that the lottery result by the lottery means is a winning transition result.

With the above configuration, whether a specific condition is met is determined by a lottery conducted based on the operation of the start operating means. Therefore, the player's operation is involved in whether the specific condition is met, and unlike processes that proceed solely on the gaming machine side, the player is more likely to get the impression that the specific condition was met through their own operation. This puts more effort into operating the start operating means in specific situations, greatly enhancing the playability of those situations.

Feature A6. The predetermined end condition is established when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined end result (second re-game), and the end symbol combination corresponding to the end result (the result corresponding to the second re-game winning) stops at the valid position, so that the first re-game state or the second re-game state can be transitioned to the normal game state.
A gaming machine as described in Feature A5, characterized in that when the lottery result by the lottery means is a duplicate result of the end result and the transition result, the stop operation means is operated in an end operation mode, thereby making it possible to stop the end pattern combination at the valid position, and the stop operation means is operated in a transition operation mode different from the end operation mode, thereby making it possible to stop the transition pattern combination at the valid position.

With the above configuration, when a duplicate result win occurs, the first replay state can end or the game can transition to the second replay state, depending on the operation mode of the stop operation means for that game. In this way, by overlapping two extreme results, one that is pleasing to the player and one that is not, the player's anticipation for a duplicate result win can be aroused, while also attracting attention to the operation mode in the event of a duplicate result win.

Feature A7. The lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined continuation result (first re-game), and the first re-game state continues when a picture combination for continuation corresponding to the continuation result stops at the active position.
The transition result is a result that can be won in addition to the continuation result,
A gaming machine according to Feature A5 or Feature A6, characterized in that when the lottery result by the lottery means is a duplicate result of the continuation result and the transition result, the stop operation means is operated in a continuation operation mode, thereby making it possible to stop the continuation pattern combination at the valid position, and the stop operation means is operated in a transition operation mode different from the continuation operation mode, thereby making it possible to stop the transition pattern combination at the valid position.

With the above configuration, when a duplicate result win occurs, the first replay state can either continue or the game can transition to the second replay state, depending on the operation mode of the stop operation means for that game. In this way, by overlapping two extreme results, one that is pleasing to the player and one that is not, it is possible to build anticipation for a duplicate result win and to appropriately increase attention to the operation mode in the event of a duplicate result win.

In particular, when this configuration is applied to feature A6, the end result, continuation result, and transition result overlap, and depending on the operation mode when this overlap result is won, the first replay state will either end, continue, or transition to the second replay state, thereby more appropriately increasing the attention it will attract when the overlap result is won.

Feature A8. When the lottery result by the lottery means is the transition result, the stop operation means is operated in a transition operation mode, so that the transition pattern combination can be stopped at the valid position,
A gaming machine described in any one of features A5 to A7, characterized in that the mode notification means is capable of executing a specific mode notification as a mode notification regarding the operation mode for the transition by the specified notification means when the lottery result by the lottery means in the specific situation is the transition result.

With the above configuration, by following the status notification from the status notification means, it is possible to transition to the second re-play state under certain circumstances and extend the re-play state. This not only increases the attention paid to the status notification, but also makes it possible to determine whether or not to extend the re-play state through a relatively simple configuration, such as whether or not to issue a notification.

Feature A9. The lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined continuation result (first re-game), and the first re-game state continues when a picture combination for continuation corresponding to the continuation result stops at the active position.
The transition result is a result that can be won in addition to the continuation result,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a result of overlapping the continuation result and the transition result, the stop operation means is operated in an operation mode for continuation, thereby making it possible to stop the continuation pattern combination at the valid position, and the stop operation means is operated in an operation mode for transition which is different from the operation mode for continuation, thereby making it possible to stop the transition pattern combination at the valid position,
A gaming machine described in any one of features A5 to A8, characterized in that the mode notification means is equipped with a special means (a function of executing processing in the display control device 81 to perform the presentation of Figure 87 (a)) that can execute, by the specified notification means, a specific mode notification including a mode notification regarding the operation mode for continuation and a mode notification regarding the operation mode for transition when the lottery result by the lottery means is a duplicate result of the continuation result and the transition result.

With the above configuration, if the continuation result and the transition result overlap, a specific mode notification including a mode notification regarding the operation mode for continuation and a mode notification regarding the operation mode for transition may be executed by a predetermined notification means, leaving it up to the player to choose whether to continue the first re-play state or transition to the second re-play state. This creates new gameplay features, allowing the player to decide whether to continue or transition based on the timing of the overlap result win (the number of remaining games for which a mode notification may be issued) and the number of games in the second re-play state.

Feature A10. A gaming machine as described in Feature A9, wherein, after the notification by the special means has been made, if the mode notification is executable and a result including at least the transition result is won, the specific mode notification can be executed.

With the above configuration, even if a player selects a winning continuation result based on a notification based on a duplicate result, if the transition result is subsequently won, the player can transition to the second replay state. However, depending on the number of remaining games, there may be situations in which a winning transition result is unlikely. Based on this configuration, allowing the player to choose one of the options as in feature A9 makes the gameplay more interesting by allowing the player to decide when to transition to the second replay state.

Feature A11. A gaming machine described in any one of Features A1 to A10, wherein the mode notification means is capable of executing the mode notification even in the second re-play state, and when transitioning from the first re-play state to the second re-play state, the number of remaining games monitored by the monitoring means is carried over.

With the above configuration, transitioning to the second re-play state does not mean that mode notification will no longer be performed, nor does transitioning to the second re-play state mean that the number of games for which mode notification can be performed will increase by the same amount as the re-play state is extended, allowing players to enjoy the pure benefit of extending the re-play state.

Feature A12. A gaming machine described in any one of Features A1 to A11, characterized in that, in the second re-play state, if the mode notification means does not execute the mode notification, an increase in gaming media cannot be expected.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which the second re-play state is used to extend the re-play state, it is possible to prevent the degree of advantage from being increased too much, and in this way, the significance of transitioning to the second re-play state rather than extending the first re-play state is guaranteed.
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined end result (second re-game), the predetermined end condition is established, and when the end pattern combination (the result corresponding to the second re-game winning) corresponding to the end result stops at the valid position, the first re-game state or the second re-game state can be transitioned to the normal game state.
Feature A13: A remaining number notification execution means (a function of executing notification based on the display remaining number counter HG by the display control device 81) capable of executing a remaining number notification corresponding to the remaining number of games at which the status notification means can execute the status notification;
An add-on processing execution means (a function of executing the number of games added processing in the AT mode by the main control device 101) that executes an add-on processing in a state in which the mode notification means is able to execute the mode notification;
An add-on notification means (a function for executing a process for displaying an add-on notification by the display control device 81) that notifies the user of the add-on process based on the fact that the add-on process has been performed by the add-on process execution means;
An update means (a function of executing a process for displaying an additional notification by the display control device 81) that updates the remaining number notification by the remaining number notification execution means based on the additional notification by the additional notification means;
When the remaining number notification by the remaining number notification execution means is a notification content corresponding to the specific situation, if it is a second specific situation in which the addition process is executed by the addition process execution means and the addition notification by the addition notification means has not been executed, a specific means (a function of executing the processing of steps S3602 to S3603 by the main control device 101) that restricts the permission means from allowing the transition to the second re-play state;
A gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A12, characterized in that it comprises:

With the above configuration, if a so-called "later addition notification" occurs, where the addition process has been executed but the addition notification has not yet been executed, transition to the second re-play state is not permitted even if the remaining number notification corresponds to a specific situation. This prevents an event from occurring in which a transition to the second re-play state occurs even if the actual number of remaining games in the first re-play state is greater than the content of the remaining number notification. If a transition to the second re-play state were to occur in such a situation, the player would transition to the normal play state after playing a specific number of games, which could be detrimental to the player.

Feature A14. When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined transition result (11th re-game, 12th re-game), the configuration allows transition to the second re-game state,
In the specific situation, when the lottery result by the lottery means is the transition result, a means capable of executing a predetermined special notification (a function for executing a process for generating a push order notification when the main control device 101 wins a transition replay);
In the second specific situation, when the result of the lottery by the lottery means is the transition result, a means for executing the special notification or a notification that is indistinguishable or difficult for a player to distinguish from the special notification (a function for executing a process for generating a push order notification when a transition replay is won by the main control device 101);
The gaming machine described in feature A13 is characterized by comprising:

In the above configuration, in a configuration in which a transition to the second replay state can occur based on a winning transition result, a special notification is generated when the transition result is a winning result in a specific situation, and a special notification or a similar notification is also generated when the transition result is a winning result in the second specific situation.This prevents the player from realizing that the second specific situation is occurring, i.e., that there is an unexecuted portion of the add-on processing (later-on notification), due to the lack of a special notification, etc.This means that the player can enjoy the benefits of transitioning to the second replay state without eliminating the dramatic effect of the later-on notification that has been carefully prepared.

Feature A15. A gaming machine described in any one of Features A1 to A14, characterized in that it is equipped with a means (a function of executing the processing of steps S5004 to S5020 by the main control device 101) that can transition to the second re-play state in which the number of remaining games is set to the specific number based on the number of remaining games grasped by the grasping means.

With the above configuration, by setting the second re-play state to match the number of remaining games at which a mode notification is made in the first re-play state, it is possible to end the re-play state at that number of remaining games. In other words, if the first re-play state remains, the re-play state can continue even after the number of remaining games at which a mode notification is made reaches zero, until the ending symbol combination stops. However, there is also a need to end the re-play state in line with the number of remaining games at which a mode notification is made, in order to avoid increasing the payout rate too much and to ensure fairness in play. Therefore, by using the above configuration, it is possible to meet these needs and provide gaming machines that meet a variety of needs.

Feature A16. The gaming machine described in Feature A15 is characterized in that it is equipped with means (the bonus lottery table in the third embodiment) that, when a transition to the second re-play state occurs due to the means capable of transitioning to the second re-play state in which the number of remaining games is set to the specific number, can make the player more advantageous after the transition occurs than before the transition.

In gameplay where an additional bonus is added to the state where a mode notification is made, a so-called "later bonus" notification may be made, where the bonus is not announced until the final stage. By providing such a later bonus notification, it is expected that the effect of enjoying the game until the final stage can be expected. In such a configuration, when the game transitions to a replay state where the number of remaining games is reached, as described above, there is a possibility that the player will realize that there is no later bonus notification. Therefore, in the above configuration, by making the state more advantageous than the previous state, separate from the later bonus notification, it can serve as a substitute for the anticipation of the later bonus notification, and it is possible to provide the enjoyment of the game while still achieving the effect of the replay state ending with the number of remaining games.

Feature A17. A gaming machine described in any one of Features A1 to A16, characterized in that it is equipped with means for making the player more disadvantageous after the transition to the second re-play state than before the transition occurs, if the transition occurs in a situation not permitted by the permitting means.

With the above configuration, if the transition to the second re-play state happens to occur without permission from the permission means, an unfavorable event may occur for the player. By doing this, the transition to the second re-play state is made advantageous to the player, while also preventing the player from taking advantage of this advantage and intentionally transitioning to the second re-play state before permission from the permission means.

<Features Group B>
Feature B1. A plurality of rotating bodies (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of pictures are applied in the circumferential direction,
Display units (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allow some of the patterns on each rotating body to be visible;
a start operation means (start lever 41) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that, when operated, stop the rotation of each of the rotating bodies;
a drive control means (a function of executing reel control processing by the main control device 101) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to grant a special benefit to a player based on the operation of the start operation means;
a bonus awarding means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) that can award a bonus corresponding to a predetermined result when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an active position set at a position where the patterns are visible via the display unit;
A gaming machine comprising:
The lottery results drawn by the lottery means include a first result that can be won when each of the stop operation means is operated in a first stop operation mode, and a second result that can be won when each of the stop operation means is operated in a second stop operation mode different from the first stop operation mode,
The device is provided with a mode notification means (a function of executing a push order role process by the main control device 101) that can execute mode notification (push order notification) regarding operation modes including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode on a predetermined notification means (the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 on the instruction monitor 68) based on the lottery result by the lottery means,
A high-advantage state (advantageous zone) and a low-advantage state (normal zone) are provided in which the degree of advantage to the player is relatively high and low,
The mode notification means is configured to easily execute the mode notification in the highly advantageous state,
Furthermore, a plurality of replay states are provided in which the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be a replay result is higher than in the normal game state, and the number of executable games is different;
Increasing means (a function of executing a process of adding the number of games in the AT mode by the main control device 101) that can execute an increasing process to increase the remaining number of executable times of the highly advantageous state based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition;
an upper limit termination means (a function of executing a second interval display process by the main control device 101) for terminating the highly advantageous state based on the fact that the number of games executed in the highly advantageous state has reached a predetermined upper limit, regardless of the number of times the highly advantageous state can be executed;
A remaining number grasping means (a function of executing a process to grasp the value of the excess counter by the main control device 101) for grasping the number of times that can be executed when the high advantageous state is ended by the upper limit ending means;
A selection means for selecting one of the plurality of replay states based on the executable number of times grasped by the remaining number grasping means (a function for executing fixed RT processing by the main control device 101 in the second embodiment);
A permission means for allowing the transition to the replay state selected by the selection means (a function for executing the push order role processing by the main control device 101 in the second embodiment);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

In the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, a lottery is conducted by the lottery means and the orbiting body begins to rotate; when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body stops, and if the stop result corresponds to the lottery result, a bonus is awarded by the bonus awarding means. In this so-called slot machine, the possible winning results may vary depending on the stop operation mode of the orbiting body. In a highly advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, the frequency of bonus notifications regarding such stop operation modes increases, so the degree of advantage between a highly advantageous state and a low advantageous state can be determined depending on whether or not bonus notifications are issued.

In this type of gameplay, an increase process may be performed to increase the remaining number of times a highly advantageous state can be played, building anticipation for the specific conditions that will trigger the increase process to be met. On the other hand, a highly advantageous state may end when the number of games played reaches a predetermined upper limit, regardless of the remaining number of games that can be played, thereby ensuring the soundness of the game without increasing the advantage of the highly advantageous state too much. However, setting an upper limit in this way could give the impression that the number of games that can be played has been exploited if a situation arises in which the number of games that can be played exceeds the upper limit, which could discourage the player from playing.

In the above configuration, when the upper limit is reached and the highly advantageous state ends, a replay state is selected based on the remaining number of possible plays, and a transition to the selected replay state is permitted. Because the probability of a replay result is higher in the replay state than in the normal play state, it is possible to play with less gaming media loss than in the normal play state. In other words, the configuration is such that an undesirable event for the player, such as the loss of a number of games exceeding the upper limit in the highly advantageous state, is followed up by an event that is favorable to the player, such as setting the replay state, thereby reducing the possibility of the player losing their desire to play as described above.

Feature B2. A gaming machine as described in Feature B1, wherein the selection means is capable of selecting, from among the multiple replay states, a replay state that allows a number of games to be played that is close to the number of games that can be played.

The above configuration enhances the significance of ensuring that the replay state prevents the number of games exceeding the upper limit from disappearing. In particular, depending on the mode of the increase process, the number of remaining executable counts when the upper limit is exceeded may increase infinitely. If an attempt is made to transition to a replay state that corresponds to exactly that number of executable counts, the number of replay states that must be prepared will also increase in line with the increase in the number of executable counts that exceed the upper limit. In contrast, the above configuration makes it possible to reduce the number of replay states that must be prepared, making it possible to reduce the limited memory capacity of the gaming machine.

Feature B3. A gaming machine as described in Feature B1 or Feature B2, wherein the allowing means allows transition to the replay state selected by the selecting means before the highly advantageous state ends.

With the above configuration, the transition to the selected replay state does not occur after the high-advantage state ends, but occurs before the end. This allows players to play seamlessly between the high-advantage state and the selected replay state.

Feature B4. A gaming machine as described in Feature B3, wherein the status notification can be executed up to the upper limit of the highly advantageous state, even if the game transitions to the replay state selected by the selection means before the highly advantageous state ends.

The above configuration prevents the inconvenience of losing the benefits of the highly advantageous state of status notification by transitioning to the replay state selected by the selection means. This allows players to maximize the benefits of transitioning to the replay state before reaching the upper limit.

Feature B5. A gaming machine described in any one of Features B1 to B4, wherein the probability that the result of the lottery by the lottery means will be the replay result is the same or approximately the same for the predetermined replay state to which the game can be transitioned upon attaining the highly advantageous state and the replay state selected by the selection means.

The above configuration prevents the advantage of the replay state to which the player is transitioned in accordance with the excess from being too high, while also preventing the loss of the excess. In other words, if the replay state selected by the selection means has a higher probability of resulting in a replay than the specified replay state, the advantage of the replay state to which the player is transitioned in accordance with the excess will be too high. If a transition to the replay state selected by the selection means occurs midway through a highly advantageous state even though there is no excess, the advantage during the highly advantageous state will increase dramatically. On the other hand, if the replay state selected by the selection means has a lower probability of resulting in a replay than the specified replay state, the significance of transitioning to the replay state in accordance with the excess becomes less, and it is difficult to prevent the loss of the excess. Therefore, the above configuration makes it possible to achieve both of these benefits without causing the disadvantages of both.

Feature B6: A means for executing an initialization process of information related to the status notification based on the termination of the high advantageous state by the upper limit termination means (a function for executing a second section display process by the main control device 101),
A gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B4, characterized in that the replay state selected by the selection means can be continued even when the initialization process is performed.

With the above configuration, when the high-advantage state is ended by the upper limit ending means, it is made clear that the replay state to which the player is transitioned will not end even if the initialization process is performed, and may continue thereafter. This makes it clearer that the effect of setting the replay state based on the amount exceeding the upper limit is achieved.

Feature B7. As the replay state,
A first re-game state (infinite RT state) that can be ended when a predetermined termination condition (second re-game winning) is met;
A second re-game state (fixed RT state) that ends when a predetermined number of games are played;
and
A plurality of second re-play states are set, each having a different number of executable games;
A gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B6, wherein the selection means is capable of selecting one re-play state from the second re-play state.

The above configuration has a first replay state that ends when a predetermined termination condition is met, and a second replay state that ends based on the number of games played, and allows transition to the second replay state when the highly advantageous state ends due to reaching its upper limit. This makes it less likely that a transition to a replay state will end due to the establishment of a termination condition, and more effectively ensures the significance of providing a follow-up when the highly advantageous state ends due to reaching its upper limit.

Note that a "predetermined termination condition" is, for example, "the result of the lottery drawn by the lottery means is a predetermined termination result" or "the termination symbol combination stops."

In addition, the above configuration shows a configuration in which both the "second replay state" and the "first replay state" are provided and then a transition to the "second replay state" is made, but a configuration in which only the "second replay state" is provided and then a transition to the "second replay state" may also be made.

Feature B8. As the replay state,
It has a first re-game state (infinite RT state) that can be ended when a predetermined ending condition is met,
In the first re-game state, a plurality of first re-game states are set, each having a different probability of the predetermined termination condition being satisfied,
A gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B7, wherein the selection means is capable of selecting one re-play state from the plurality of first re-play states.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration having a first replay state that ends when a predetermined ending condition is met, the probability of the predetermined ending condition being met varies for the first replay state. For example, transitioning to a first replay state that is less likely to be met can result in a configuration that increases the follow-up when a highly advantageous state ends at its upper limit, while transitioning to a first replay state that is more likely to be met can result in a configuration that decreases the follow-up. Furthermore, with this configuration, it is possible to provide a sense of suspense as to when the replay state to which the player has transitioned will end, thereby improving gameplay.

Feature B9. The configuration is such that, when the result of the lottery by the lottery means is a predetermined end result, the predetermined end condition can be met,
The gaming machine according to feature B8, wherein the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be the end result differs in the plurality of first re-play states.

The above configuration makes it possible to set multiple first replay states with different probabilities of the end condition being met using a relatively simple configuration.

Feature B10. The end result is included in the replay result,
A gaming machine according to feature B9, characterized in that in the plurality of first replay states, the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be the replay result is the same or approximately the same.

With the above configuration, the probability of a replay result in multiple first replay states is the same, so it is possible to highlight that the difference between these multiple first replay states is the probability of the ending symbol combination stopping. In other words, if the probability of a replay result differs as well, there will be a large difference in the degree of advantage, such as the way gaming media is depleted depending on which first replay state is transitioned to. However, if the configuration differs only in the probability of the specified ending condition being met, the significance of guaranteeing the excess amount will be made clearer.

Feature B11. The plurality of replay states are each transitioned to when a corresponding transitional symbol combination stops at the active position,
A gaming machine described in any one of features B1 to B10, characterized in that when the result of the lottery by the lottery means is a predetermined transition result, a first transition pattern combination that enables a transition to a first re-play state among the multiple re-play states can be stopped at the valid position, and a second transition pattern combination that enables a transition to a second re-play state different from the first re-play state can be stopped at the valid position.

With the above configuration, in a configuration in which a player transitions to one of multiple replay states, the games that can be transitioned to are not different for each state, and a single game can transition to multiple replay states. This reduces the likelihood of problems such as being unable to transition to the desired replay state due to a delay in the occurrence of a game (lottery result) that allows transition to the replay state selected by the selection means, or a discrepancy between the number of games that can be played in the replay state selected by the selection means and the number of times that can be played that exceeds the upper limit due to the number of games played while waiting for the game that allows transition. This makes it possible to more reliably transition to the replay state selected by the selection means, and makes it possible to make the replay state selected by the selection means more consistent with the purpose of transitioning to a replay state.

Feature B12. The game results to be notified by the mode notifying means include a payout result in which the benefit to be awarded by the benefit awarding means is set as a predetermined number of game media, and a replay result in which a replay is awarded,
By entering the highly advantageous state, it is possible to transition to a predetermined re-play state among the re-play states,
A gaming machine described in any one of features B1 to B11, characterized in that the selection means selects a re-play state different from the specified re-play state to which the highly advantageous state can be entered.

With the above configuration, when a highly advantageous state is reached, a status notification is issued when a payout or replay result is reached, making it possible to anticipate an increase in gaming media due to a winning payout result while minimizing the loss of gaming media due to a winning replay result. In this configuration, by setting an upper limit for the highly advantageous state, it becomes possible to take into account the excess amount and allow for transition to a replay state different from the one to which the player has already transitioned. In this way, if the replay state due to a highly advantageous state and the replay state due to that excess amount are differentiated, then when terminating the replay state as usual in the event that there is no excess amount, it is sufficient to prevent transition to the replay state for the excess amount, eliminating the need for a complex configuration such as forcibly terminating the replay state midway.

Feature B13. A plurality of rotating bodies (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of symbols are attached in the circumferential direction,
Display units (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allow some of the patterns on each rotating body to be visible;
a start operation means (start lever 41) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that, when operated, stop the rotation of each of the rotating bodies;
a drive control means (a function of executing reel control processing by the main control device 101) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to grant a special benefit to a player based on the operation of the start operation means;
a bonus awarding means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) that can award a bonus corresponding to a predetermined result when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an active position set at a position where the patterns are visible via the display unit;
A gaming machine comprising:
The lottery results drawn by the lottery means include a first result that can be won when each of the stop operation means is operated in a first stop operation mode, and a second result that can be won when each of the stop operation means is operated in a second stop operation mode different from the first stop operation mode,
The device is provided with a mode notification means (a function of executing a push order role process by the main control device 101) that can execute mode notification (push order notification) regarding operation modes including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode on a predetermined notification means (the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 on the instruction monitor 68) based on the lottery result by the lottery means,
A high-advantage state (advantageous zone) and a low-advantage state (normal zone) are provided in which the degree of advantage to the player is relatively high and low,
The mode notification means is configured to easily execute the mode notification in the highly advantageous state,
Furthermore, a plurality of replay states are provided in which the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be a replay result is higher than in the normal game state, and the number of executable games is different;
Increasing means (a function of executing the process of adding the number of games in the AT mode by the main control device 101) that can execute an increasing process to increase the remaining advantage as the advantage that the player can receive in the highly advantageous state based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition;
An upper limit termination means (a function of executing a second section display process by the main control device 101) that terminates the highly advantageous state regardless of the remaining advantageous degree based on the fact that a predetermined upper limit for execution has been reached in the highly advantageous state;
A remaining number grasping means (a function of executing a process to grasp the value of the excess counter by the main control device 101) for grasping the remaining advantageous degree when the high advantageous state is ended by the upper limit ending means;
A selection means for selecting one of the plurality of replay states based on the remaining advantageous degree grasped by the remaining number grasping means (a function for executing fixed RT processing by the main control device 101 in the second embodiment);
A permission means for allowing the transition to the replay state selected by the selection means (a function for executing the push order role processing by the main control device 101 in the second embodiment);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

In the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, a lottery is conducted by the lottery means and the orbiting body begins to rotate; when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body stops while rotating; and if the resulting number corresponds to the lottery result, a bonus is awarded by the bonus awarding means. In this so-called slot machine, the possible winning results may vary depending on the stop operation mode of the orbiting body. In highly advantageous states that are advantageous to the player, the frequency of mode notifications regarding such stop operation modes increases, so the degree of advantage between highly advantageous and low advantageous states can be determined depending on whether mode notifications are issued.

In this type of gameplay, an increase process may be performed in which the remaining advantage, which is the advantage a player can receive when in a highly advantageous state, is increased, building anticipation for the specific conditions that will trigger the increase process to be met. On the other hand, the highly advantageous state may end regardless of the remaining advantage once the execution limit is reached, ensuring the soundness of the game by not increasing the advantage of the highly advantageous state too much. However, if an upper limit is set in this way, if a situation arises in which the remaining advantage exceeds the limit, it could give the player the impression that the advantage has been exploited, which could discourage the player from playing.

In the above configuration, when the upper limit is reached and the high-advantage state ends, a re-play state is selected based on the remaining advantage, and a transition to the selected re-play state is permitted. Because the probability of a re-play result is higher in the re-play state than in the normal play state, it is possible to play with less loss of gaming media than in the normal play state. In other words, the configuration is such that an undesirable event for the player, such as the loss of an advantage exceeding the upper limit in the high-advantage state, is followed up by an event that is favorable to the player, such as setting the re-play state, thereby reducing the possibility of the player losing their desire to play as described above.

<Feature Group C>
Feature C1. A plurality of rotating bodies (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of pictures are applied in the circumferential direction,
Display units (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allow some of the patterns on each rotating body to be visible;
a start operation means (start lever 41) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that, when operated, stop the rotation of each of the rotating bodies;
a drive control means (a function of executing reel control processing by the main control device 101) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to grant a special benefit to a player based on the operation of the start operation means;
a bonus awarding means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) that can award a bonus corresponding to a predetermined result when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an active position set at a position where the patterns are visible via the display unit;
A gaming machine comprising:
A re-game state (high RT state) in which the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be a predetermined re-game result is higher than the normal game state (normal game state, first RT state, normal RT state, low RT state),
When a predetermined termination condition (fall re-play winning, second re-play winning) is established, the first re-play state (second RT state, third RT state, infinite RT state) that can transition to the normal game state,
A second re-game state (a fixed RT state such as a fourth RT state) in which the game state transitions to the normal game state when a predetermined number of games have been executed, or in which the predetermined termination condition is set to be less likely to be met than in the first re-game state;
is set,
In the first re-game state, a mode notification means (a function of executing a push order role process by the main control device 101) is provided which can execute mode notification for a plurality of stop modes including an operation mode of the stop operation means which makes it possible to prevent the establishment of the predetermined end condition (avoid winning a second re-game),
a low notification state (for example, a normal mode) and a high notification state (for example, an AT mode) are set so that the frequency of execution of the mode notification by the mode notification execution means is relatively high and low;
When a predetermined specific condition is met, the high notification state is ended and the low notification state is entered,
A gaming machine characterized in that transition to the second re-play state is permitted in a specific situation (return section) from the end of the high notification state until the stopping of the ending pattern combination.

In this configuration, a slot machine in which, when the start operation means is operated, a lottery is conducted by the lottery means and the rotation of the rotating body begins; when the stop operation means is operated, the rotating body stops; and if the resulting number corresponds to the lottery result, a bonus is awarded by the bonus awarding means. The slot machine has two states: a first replay state, in which a transition to a normal game state can occur when a predetermined termination condition is met; and a second replay state, in which a transition to the normal game state occurs when a certain number of games are played, or in which the predetermined termination condition is set to be less likely to occur than in the first replay state. A mode notification, including an operation mode that prevents the predetermined termination condition from being met in the first replay state, may be issued by the predetermined notification means, and the continuation of the first replay state is managed based on the presence or absence of the mode notification. Mode notifications include a high notification state and a low notification state. In the first replay state, transition to the second replay state is permitted under certain circumstances after the high notification state ends and before the predetermined termination condition is met. Therefore, when the game transitions to the second replay state in this specific situation, the high notification state ends, but the replay state is extended. This makes it possible to create new gameplay features by utilizing the first replay state and the second replay state.

Feature C2. A configuration in which a transition to the second re-game state occurs when a predetermined second transition symbol combination stops at the activated position,
The mode notification by the mode notification means includes a second mode notification regarding an operation mode that allows the second transition symbol combination to be stopped,
A gaming machine described in feature C1, characterized in that in the high notification state, the execution of the second mode notification by the mode notification means is allowed, while in the specific situation, the execution of the second mode notification by the mode notification means is restricted.

With the above configuration, a second mode notification is issued during the high notification state, indicating that the symbol combination for the second transition can be stopped. Therefore, if a player wishes to transition to the second replay state, they need only follow the notification. This allows the player to choose whether to continue the first replay state or transition to the second replay state. Alternatively, by transitioning to the second replay state before the high notification state ends, the replay state can be extended. On the other hand, because the execution of the second mode notification is restricted in certain situations until the high notification state ends and a predetermined termination condition is met, transitioning to the second replay state requires the player to use their intuition to select an operation mode that allows the symbol combination for the second transition to be stopped. This prevents the advantage provided by the mode notification from being too high, and if the player successfully transitions to the second replay state in certain situations, the player can feel as if they have won through their own intuition or operation, greatly improving gameplay.

Feature C3. The second re-game state is configured to transition when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined second transition result, and a picture combination for the second transition corresponding to the second transition result stops at the activated position,
A gaming machine according to feature C1 or feature C2, characterized in that a plurality of states are set as gaming states, each having different probabilities that the lottery result by the lottery means will be the second transition result.

According to the above configuration, in a game in which the second transition result is won, when the symbol combination for the second transition stops, the game transitions to the second replay state. Therefore, since there are multiple states with different probabilities of winning the second transition result, it is possible to realize states in which it is easy or difficult to transition to the second replay state without relying on the frequency or presence/absence of the notification that allows the symbol combination for the second transition to be stopped. In this way, by simply using these states to realize situations in which it is desirable or undesirable to transition to the second replay state, it is possible to realize gameplay as designed with a simpler configuration. For example, if it is desired to transition to the second replay state in a specific situation, the high notification state can be ended in a state in which it is easy to win the second transition result. Furthermore, by transitioning to the first replay state without transitioning to the high notification state, it is possible to reduce situations in which a transition to the second replay state occurs in an unintended manner by, for example, making it difficult to win the second transition result.

Feature C4. As a re-game state, there is a high probability state (for example, the third RT state in the modified example of the first embodiment) and a low probability state (for example, the second RT state in the modified example of the first embodiment) in which the probability of winning the second transition result is relatively high or low,
A gaming machine described in feature C3, characterized in that it is equipped with a specific means (a function of executing processing to transition to a transition mode in a modified example of the first embodiment) that changes the gaming state to the high probability state before the specific condition is met in the high notification state.

With the above configuration, when a specific condition is met and the high notification state ends, it becomes more likely that the state will be in a high probability state. This makes it easier to win the second transition result in a specific situation before the high notification state ends and the specified termination condition is met, making it easier to transition to the second re-play state in that specific situation.

Feature C5. The high probability state is entered when a predetermined symbol combination for a high probability transition stops at the activated position.
The mode notification by the mode notification means includes a high probability mode notification regarding an operation mode that can stop the symbol combination for the high probability transition,
The gaming machine described in feature C4 is characterized in that the identification means allows the mode notification means to execute the high probability mode notification in the high notification state, while restricting the mode notification means from executing the high probability mode notification in the specific situation, thereby changing the gaming state to the high probability state before the termination condition is met in the high notification state.

With the above configuration, a high-probability mode notification is issued in the high-probability mode, allowing a symbol combination for a high-probability transition to be stopped. Therefore, if a player wishes to transition to the high-probability mode, they need only follow the notification. On the other hand, execution of the high-probability mode notification is restricted in certain situations until the high-probability mode ends and a predetermined termination condition is met. In other words, to transition to the second replay state in a low-probability mode (not a high-probability mode), the player must be lucky enough to stop a symbol combination for a high-probability transition, transition to the high-probability mode, and then win the second replay result. Alternatively, the player must be lucky enough to win the second replay result in the low-probability mode, and then be lucky enough to stop the symbol combination for the second replay. In this way, the hurdle for transitioning to the second replay state in the low-probability mode is higher. This makes it easier to achieve the gameplay as designed and prevents transitions to the second replay state from occurring in situations unintended by the designer.

Feature C6. A gaming machine as described in Feature C5, wherein the mode notification execution means includes means for enabling the high probability mode notification to be executed in a game subsequent to a specific game, which is a predetermined number of games prior to the game in which the specific condition is met (a function for executing the processing of step S4105 by the main control device 101).

With the above configuration, a high probability mode notification can occur in a game after a specific game that is a predetermined number of games before the high notification state termination condition is met, and by operating in accordance with that notification, it is possible to transition to the high probability state. In this way, by transitioning to the high probability state just before the high notification state ends, it is possible to subsequently transition to the second replay state, continuing the replay state even after the high notification state ends, or to transition to the second replay state after the high notification state ends and continue the replay state before the predetermined termination condition is met. In other words, by transitioning to the high probability state immediately after the high notification state begins and then transitioning to the second replay state, it is possible to prevent the high notification state from being implemented under the normal play state when the second replay state ends.

Feature C7. The gaming machine described in Feature C6, wherein the predetermined number is equal to or less than the specific number or equal to or less than the denominator of the predetermined termination condition in the second replay state.

With the above configuration, even if a game transitions to the second replay state immediately after transitioning to the high probability state, the replay state is likely to continue longer than in a game that ends in the high notification state. This makes it possible to optimally utilize the effect of feature C6.

In order to more effectively utilize the effects of the above configuration, it is preferable that "the predetermined number is a number smaller than the specific number, or is less than the denominator of the predetermined termination condition in the second re-play state."

Feature C8. The game state has a high probability state (for example, the second RT state in the modified example of the first embodiment) and a low probability state (for example, the third RT state in the modified example of the first embodiment) in which the probability of winning the second transition result is relatively high and low,
The high notification state is likely to be executed in the first re-game state as the low probability state,
A gaming machine described in any one of features C1 to C7, characterized in that the transition to the low probability state occurs via the high probability state.

With the above configuration, the first replay state in a high notification state becomes a low-probability state that transitions via a high-probability state, thereby limiting the events that allow transition to the second replay state just before or after the high notification state ends. More specifically, for example, if the configuration is such that transition occurs from the normal game state via a high-probability state to a low-probability state, and transition to the normal game state occurs when a predetermined termination condition is met in the low-probability state, transition to the normal game state becomes possible. In order to transition to the second replay state just before or after the high notification state ends, it is necessary to transition to the normal game state once during the high notification state. In other words, by deliberately transitioning to the normal game state when a predetermined termination condition is met during the high notification state, a period of high-probability state is created, increasing the probability of transitioning to the second replay state. Therefore, the operations and routes for transitioning to the second replay state become more complex, increasing the difficulty of the game and motivating players to take on the challenge.

Feature C9. The lottery results by the lottery means include advantageous results (first BB, second BB) that enable a transition to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player,
The lottery result by the lottery means is the advantageous result, and a transition to the advantageous state occurs when an advantageous pattern combination corresponding to the advantageous result stops at the activated position,
The information about the advantageous result being a win is reserved until the advantageous symbol combination stops at the active position,
A gaming machine as described in feature C8, characterized in that after the advantageous state ends, the machine transitions to the low probability state via at least the high probability state.

According to the above configuration, if a so-called bonus state, which is an advantageous state, occurs during a high notification state, the game will transition through a high probability state before returning to the first replay state, which is a low probability state. In this case, if the bonus state ends just before the end of the high notification state, it is possible to transition to the second replay state rather than transitioning to a low probability state from the high probability state. In other words, using this configuration, a situation in which the state just before or after the end of the high notification state becomes a high probability state and transition to the second replay state is likely to occur through the bonus state can be created. A bonus state generally offers the possibility of winning a large amount of gaming media, regardless of the notification type, by increasing the probability of winning a small prize. Therefore, if a bonus state occurs during a high notification state, it can be said that the benefits of the high notification state are eroded accordingly. While it is possible to stop the deduction of the number of games continued during the high notification state during a bonus state during a high notification state, there are also configurations that forcibly end the high notification state based on the maximum number of games in the high notification state, including the bonus state. Even with this configuration, a bonus state during a high notification state is undesirable. Therefore, as in the above configuration, by transitioning to a bonus state during a high notification state, the replay state can be extended by transitioning to a second replay state, which can compensate for the partial erosion of the benefits of the high notification state due to the bonus state.

Feature C10. The game state has a high probability state (the third RT state in the modified example of the first embodiment) and a low probability state (the second RT state in the modified example of the first embodiment) in which the probability of winning the second transition result is relatively high and low,
The predetermined end condition is established when the result of the lottery by the lottery means is a predetermined end result, and when the stop operation means is operated in an operation mode that enables the predetermined end pattern combination to be stopped in the end result, the end pattern combination can be stopped at the valid position, and the game state is transitioned to the normal game state when the end pattern combination is stopped,
Furthermore, when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined high probability result, and the stop operation means is operated in an operation mode that enables a high probability pattern combination to be stopped, the high probability pattern combination can be stopped at the valid position, and the high probability pattern combination is stopped, thereby transitioning to the high probability state;
A gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C9, characterized in that a duplicate result including the end result and the high probability result is set as the lottery result by the lottery means.

With the above configuration, in a game where a symbol combination for ending the game can be stopped, depending on the operation mode, a symbol combination for high probability can be stopped. In other words, in a game where the first replay state can end, in particular, it becomes possible to transition to a high probability state. In this way, by setting up a game in which extreme events, such as events that are pleasant and unpleasant for the player, can occur, the playability of the game is greatly improved and the player can be made to operate the stop operation means in the game more carefully.

Feature C11. The predetermined end condition is established when the result of the lottery by the lottery means is a predetermined end result, and when the stop operation means is operated in an operation mode that enables the predetermined end symbol combination to be stopped in the end result, the end symbol combination can be stopped at the valid position, and the game transitions to the normal game state when the end symbol combination is stopped;
Furthermore, when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined second transition result, if the stop operation means is operated in an operation mode that enables the stop of a picture combination for the second transition, the picture combination for the second transition can be stopped at the valid position, and the stopping of the picture combination for the second transition causes a transition to the second re-game state,
A gaming machine described in any one of features C1 to C10, characterized in that a duplicate result including the end result and the second transition result is set as the lottery result by the lottery means.

With the above configuration, in a game in which the ending symbol combination can be stopped, the second transition symbol combination can be stopped depending on the operation mode. In other words, in a game in which the first replay state can end, in particular, it becomes possible to transition to the second replay state. In this way, by setting up a game in which extreme events, such as events that are both pleasant and unpleasant for the player, can occur, the playability of the game is greatly improved and the player can be made to operate the stop operation means in the game more carefully.

<Feature Group D>
Feature D1. A plurality of rotating bodies (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of pictures are applied in the circumferential direction,
Display units (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allow some of the patterns on each rotating body to be visible;
a start operation means (start lever 41) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that, when operated, stop the rotation of each of the rotating bodies;
a drive control means (a function of executing reel control processing by the main control device 101) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to grant a special benefit to a player based on the operation of the start operation means;
a bonus awarding means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) that can award a bonus corresponding to a predetermined result when a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an active position set at a position where the pattern is visible via the display unit, when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising:
A re-game state (high RT state) in which the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be a predetermined re-game result is higher than the normal game state (normal game state, first RT state, normal RT state, low RT state),
When a predetermined termination condition (fall re-play winning, second re-play winning) is established, the first re-play state (second RT state, third RT state, infinite RT state) that can transition to the normal game state,
A second re-game state (a fixed RT state such as a fourth RT state) in which the game state transitions to the normal game state when a predetermined number of games are executed;
is set,
The lottery results drawn by the lottery means include a first result that can be won when each of the stop operation means is operated in a first stop operation mode, and a second result that can be won when each of the stop operation means is operated in a second stop operation mode different from the first stop operation mode,
The device is provided with a mode notification means (a function of executing a push order role process by the main control device 101) that can execute mode notification (push order notification) regarding operation modes including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode on a predetermined notification means (the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 on the instruction monitor 68) based on the lottery result by the lottery means,
The notification state of the mode notification means is provided with a low notification state (e.g., normal mode) and a high notification state (e.g., AT mode) in which the frequency of execution of the mode notification by the mode notification means is relatively high and low,
A grasping means for grasping the remaining number of games in which the high notification state can be executed (a function for executing the process of step S5003 by the main control device 101);
A gaming machine characterized by having a determination means (a function of executing the processing of steps S5004 to S5020 by the main control unit 101) that transitions to the second re-play state when the high notification state is being executed in the first re-play state, with the number of games determined by the determination means being the specified number.

In this so-called slot machine, when the start operation means is operated, a lottery is conducted by the lottery means and the orbiting body begins to rotate. When the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body stops, and if the resulting number corresponds to the lottery result, a bonus is awarded by the bonus awarding means. The slot machine has two states: a first replay state, which can transition to the normal game state when a predetermined termination condition is met, and a second replay state, which transitions to the normal game state when a specific number of games are played. In either state, the probability of a replay result is increased, allowing the player to play while minimizing the loss of gaming media. Furthermore, winning results may differ depending on the operation mode of the stop operation means, and a mode notification regarding the operation mode may be made by a predetermined notification means. Therefore, the replay state and mode notification not only minimize the loss of gaming media, but also realize gameplay that allows the player to expect an increase in gaming media.

In such gameplay, the first replay state can be compared with the second replay state, since the number of available games can be extended or shortened in the first replay state, and assuming that the length of the high notification state may be extended (i.e., added on), the first replay state can be said to be a better match for the high notification state. On the other hand, since the first replay state continues until a predetermined termination condition is met, if one were to attempt to terminate the replay state at the same time as the high notification state ends, the second replay state, in which the number of available games does not change, could be said to be preferable. Therefore, while this gaming machine is basically configured to execute the high notification state in the first replay state, it is also configured to transition to the second replay state depending on the number of games remaining in the high notification state. Therefore, while the expandability of the first replay state prevents a decline in the playability of the high notification state, the second replay state can prevent the replay state from continuing indefinitely after the high notification state ends.

Feature D2. When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined transition result, a second transition pattern combination corresponding to the transition result stops at the active position, thereby transitioning to the second re-game state;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the transition result, a specific symbol combination (a stop result for winning a first re-game) different from the symbol combination for the second transition stops at the valid position, thereby maintaining the first re-game state.
The gaming machine described in feature D1 is characterized in that the determination means is capable of stopping the specific pattern combination when the number of remaining games determined by the determination means is different from the specific number in the second re-play state.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which a transition to the second replay state occurs based on the lottery results of each game, if the number of games in the second replay state does not match the number of games remaining in the high notification state, the transition to the second replay state is postponed and the first replay state continues. In this way, it is possible to avoid transitioning to a second replay state that differs from the number of games remaining in the high notification state.

Feature D3. When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined transition result, a second transition pattern combination corresponding to the transition result stops at the active position, thereby transitioning to the second re-game state;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the transition result, a specific symbol combination (a stop result for winning a first re-game) different from the symbol combination for the second transition stops at the valid position, thereby maintaining the first re-game state.
The gaming machine described in feature D1 or feature D2 is characterized in that the identification means is capable of stopping the specific pattern combination when the number of remaining games identified by the identification means is greater than the specific number in the second re-play state.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which the transition to the second replay state occurs based on the lottery results of each game, if the number of games in the second replay state is fewer than the number of games remaining in the high notification state, the transition to the second replay state is postponed and the first replay state continues. This makes it possible to avoid an event in which the replay state ends before the high notification state ends.

Feature D4. A plurality of second re-game states having different specific numbers are set as the second re-game state, and when a second transition pattern combination corresponding to each second re-game state stops at the active position, a transition to the second re-game state corresponding to the stopped pattern combination is made;
A gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D3, wherein the specifying means is capable of selecting a second re-play state to transition to depending on the result of the determination means.

With the above configuration, the type of second replay state is selected depending on the number of games remaining in the high notification state. Therefore, even if, for example, the game result makes it impossible to transition to the second replay state, it is possible to more appropriately synchronize the end of the high notification state and the end of the replay state.

Feature D5. A highly advantageous state (advantageous zone) and a low advantageous state (normal zone) are provided in which the degree of advantage for the player is relatively high or low,
The high notification state is included in the high advantageous state,
an upper limit termination means (a function of executing a second interval display process by the main control device 101) for terminating the high notification state when the number of games played in the high advantageous state reaches a predetermined upper limit (1500), regardless of the number of games remaining;
A gaming machine described in any one of features D1 to D4, characterized in that the specification means is capable of transitioning to the second re-play state in which the number of games up to the upper limit number is the specified number.

By setting an upper limit on the number of highly advantageous states, it is possible to prevent the payout rate from rising sharply. With the above configuration, the replay state is terminated according to that upper limit, making it possible to create a gaming machine that can better ensure the significance of setting that upper limit.

Feature D6: Equipped with an add-on processing execution means (a function of executing the number of games added in the AT mode by the main control device 101) that can execute the add-on processing in the high notification state based on the establishment of a predetermined add-on condition,
A gaming machine described in any one of features D1 to D5, characterized in that the additional condition is more likely to be met in the second re-play state than in the first re-play state.

In a configuration where bonuses can be generated during a high notification state, a so-called "later bonus notification" may be set, such as a bonus notification being issued just before the high notification state ends. Playing with the assumption that a later bonus notification may be set has the advantage of allowing players to enjoy the high notification state to the end. On the other hand, if a configuration is used in which a transition to the second replay state is made depending on the number of games remaining in the high notification state, as in feature D1 above, there is a potential disadvantage in that the transition to the second replay state clearly indicates that there is no later bonus notification in the high notification state, i.e., that the high notification state will end in a few more games. Therefore, by making it easier for bonus conditions to be met in the second replay state, as in the above configuration, the transition to the second replay state allows players to enjoy the fun of holding on to their last chance to generate bonuses in the second replay state, even while understanding that there is no later bonus notification when the game transitions to the second replay state. This allows for an optimal increase in attention to the game.

Feature D7. A gaming machine as described in Feature D6, characterized in that it is equipped with a means for notifying a player of the transition to the second replay state when the transition occurs and for notifying the number of games that can be played in the second replay state (a function in the third embodiment, in the display control device 81, for executing processing to display identification information for notifying the result of the additional play and a character corresponding to the fixed number of RT games on the auxiliary display unit 65).

The above configuration allows players to clearly understand that they have transitioned to the second replay state, where the bonus conditions are more likely to be met, and the number of games that will be played. Players who do not want the high notification state to end may wish to avoid transitioning to the second replay state as much as possible, but as mentioned above, because the second replay state is a state where the bonus conditions are more likely to be met, there is also the idea that they would like to transition to the second replay state as soon as possible, i.e., with as many games as possible. The above configuration respects the latter idea more, and by providing the above notification, an intensely thrilling gameplay experience is realized, where players wonder at the final stage of the high notification state whether the high notification state will end or continue.

Feature D8. A gaming machine as described in Feature D6 or Feature D7, characterized in that it is equipped with means capable of executing a notification corresponding to the addition processing when the addition condition is met in the second re-play state, transition to the normal play state, and then transition to the first re-play state (a function of executing processing to resume the AT mode for the number of games corresponding to the latent counter by the main control device 101).

The above configuration assumes a configuration that utilizes a second replay state that transitions to the normal game state after a specific number of games are played. If the conditions for adding to the high notification state are met during the second replay state, the game is first transitioned to the normal game state, and then a notification corresponding to the addition process is issued based on the transition to the first replay state. This eliminates the unnatural feeling of being notified of an addition even though the end is imminent. In other words, it is possible to avoid the unnatural feeling of the replay state ending immediately after an addition has been notified.

<Feature Group E>
Feature E1. The game state has a first advantageous state (high RT state) that is advantageous to the player, and a second advantageous state (AT mode) that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
At least in a specific situation that is the second advantageous state (AT mode, ART state with a high RT), a specific effect (for example, music during AT mode) is set to be executed for a predetermined period of time,
A grasping means (a function of executing the processing of steps S5201 to S5202 by the display control device 81) capable of grasping the remaining period of the specific performance based on the establishment of a predetermined grasping condition in the specific situation;
A setting means (a function of executing the processing of step S5205 by the display control device 81) for setting the period for which the first advantageous state is to be established in accordance with the remaining period grasped by the grasping means;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

With the above configuration, in a specific situation with at least two advantageous states, the duration of the first advantageous state is set according to the remaining duration of the specific effect. This prevents the specific effect occurring in a specific situation from ending prematurely when the specific situation ends. In this case, extending the second advantageous state could result in inconvenience, such as the degree of advantage becoming too high. It is also possible to simply continue the specific effect after the specific situation ends, but this would result in a simple effect that is completely unrelated to the degree of advantage continuing, which could actually be disappointing. Therefore, a first advantageous state that is advantageous to the player but less advantageous than the second advantageous state is set and adjusted to match the remaining duration of the specific effect. This allows the player to fully enjoy the specific effect without increasing the degree of advantage too much or disappointing the player.

Feature E2. A gaming machine as described in Feature E1, characterized in that after the second advantageous state in the specific situation ends, the specific effect can be continued in the first advantageous state set by the setting means.

With the above configuration, in a specific situation where there are at least two advantageous states, a period in which the first advantageous state is set is set according to the remaining period of the specific effect, and during that period, the specific effect continues even after the second advantageous period has ended. This makes it possible to more effectively achieve the effect of feature E1.

Feature E3. In the specific situation, the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state may overlap;
A gaming machine described in feature E1 or feature E2, characterized in that the setting means is capable of setting the end of the first advantageous state according to the remaining period grasped by the grasping means.

With the above configuration, the end of the first advantageous state is set according to the remaining duration of the specific effect, so after the second advantageous state ends, the timing at which the first advantageous state ends and the specific effect end will coincide. This makes it possible to create the ultimate finale in a specific situation, where the specific effect ends at the same time as the advantageous state ends.

Feature E4: A plurality of periods of different lengths are set as the predetermined period of the specific effect,
The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E3, wherein the determining means determines the predetermined period when the determining condition is met.

The above configuration allows for the diversification of specific effects and ensures the significance of the grasping means grasping each time the grasping conditions are met. In other words, if the specified period were uniform, it would be possible to set the end timing of the specified period and the end timing of the specific situation (second advantageous state) to coincide in advance, such as at the start of the specified period, some time in advance. However, if there are multiple types of periods, the configuration for setting them to coincide in advance would become complicated, or they might not even be able to coincide at all. In this regard, if the configuration is such that the conditions are grasped each time, as described above, it is possible to diversify the specific effects while still achieving the effect of allowing the specific effects to be enjoyed until the end.

Feature E5. The first advantageous state is viable for a predetermined number of games;
A gaming machine described in any one of features E1 to E4, characterized in that the setting means calculates the number of games required in the remaining period from the remaining period grasped by the grasping means, and is capable of setting the first advantageous state so that the specific number becomes the calculated number of games.

The above configuration utilizes a first advantageous state that can be executed for a specific number of games to set the first advantageous state for the number of games corresponding to the remaining time, clarifying the specific configuration for setting the first advantageous state according to the remaining time of a specific effect.

Feature E6. The specific effect includes an effect in which a predetermined number of games are played during the predetermined period,
A gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E5, wherein the grasping means is capable of grasping the predetermined number of remaining games as the remaining period of the predetermined period.

With the above configuration, if a specific effect is executed over a predetermined number of games, it is easy to determine the number of games remaining, and it is also easy to set a second advantageous state according to the number of games remaining. This makes it possible to achieve the effect of feature E1 with a simple configuration, and makes it easier to end the specific situation while better associating the specific effect with the advantageous state.

Feature E7: An upper limit termination means (a function of executing a second interval display process by the main control device 101) is provided that terminates the first advantageous state when the number of games that can be played in the specific situation reaches a predetermined upper limit (1,500),
A gaming machine described in any one of features E1 to E6, characterized in that the specific effect is an effect that starts in a game before the upper limit number is reached when the first advantageous state is ended by the upper limit ending means.

In the above configuration, in a configuration in which an upper limit for a specific situation is set, the specific effect becomes, so to speak, an ending effect. Although the end of such an ending effect is set as the game in which the upper limit is reached, its start is a game before the upper limit is reached. However, the number of games from the start of the specific situation is not determined at the start, but is an effect that begins based on a starting condition that is established ex post. As a result, there may be situations in which it is difficult to end the first advantageous state in time with the end of the ending effect. Therefore, by applying the configuration of feature E1 to such a gaming machine, it is possible to end the advantageous state in time with the ending effect, making it possible to more effectively function as an ending effect.

Feature E8. An end effect execution means (a function of executing an AT mode end effect by the display control device 81) capable of executing an end effect of the specific situation when the specific situation ends;
When the period of the first advantageous state is set by the setting means, a means for executing the end effect by the end effect execution means in response to the end of the first advantageous state (a function for executing the processing of step S5303 by the display control device 81);
A gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E5, characterized in that it is provided with:

With the above configuration, if the first advantageous state is set to coincide with the end of a special effect, the end effect is also postponed. This provides players who want to understand the details of the special situation (such as the number of gaming media obtained) from the end effect with the benefit of enjoying the special effect to the end, and also gives the impression that the special situation has been extended.

Feature E9. A plurality of rotating bodies (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of symbols are attached in the circumferential direction,
Display units (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allow some of the patterns on each rotating body to be visible;
a start operation means (start lever 41) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that, when operated, stop the rotation of each of the rotating bodies;
a drive control means (a function of executing reel control processing by the main control device 101) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to grant a special benefit to a player based on the operation of the start operation means;
a bonus awarding means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) that can award a bonus corresponding to a predetermined result when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an active position set at a position where the patterns are visible via the display unit;
A gaming machine comprising:
The lottery results drawn by the lottery means include a first result that can be won when each of the stop operation means is operated in a first stop operation mode, and a second result that can be won when each of the stop operation means is operated in a second stop operation mode different from the first stop operation mode,
The device is provided with a mode notification means (a function of executing a push order role process by the main control device 101) that can execute mode notification (push order notification) regarding operation modes including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode on a predetermined notification means (the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 on the instruction monitor 68) based on the lottery result by the lottery means,
The notification state of the mode notification means is provided with a low notification state (e.g., normal mode) and a high notification state (e.g., AT mode) in which the frequency of execution of the mode notification by the mode notification means is relatively high and low,
Furthermore, a replay state is provided in which the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be a replay result is higher than in the normal game state;
The first advantageous state is the re-play state,
A gaming machine described in any one of features E1 to E6, wherein the second advantageous state is the high notification state.

In the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, a lottery is drawn by the lottery means and the orbiting body begins to rotate, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body stops while rotating, and if the stop result corresponds to the lottery result, a bonus is awarded by the bonus awarding means.In this so-called slot machine, the replay state, in which the probability of a replay result is higher than in the normal play state, is the first advantageous state, and the high notification state, in which the frequency of mode notifications related to the stop operation mode is increased, is the second advantageous state.By applying the configuration of feature E1 above to a slot machine with this type of playability, the replay state can be set without extending the high notification state for specific effects executed in specific situations, including the high notification state, thereby increasing the effect of allowing the specific effects to be enjoyed to the end, and the effects of specific situations, including the high notification state, can be optimally demonstrated without increasing the advantage of the high notification state too much.

Feature E10. As the replay state,
A first replay state (a second RT state, a third RT state, an infinite RT state) that can transition to the normal gaming state when a predetermined termination condition is met;
A second re-game state (a fixed RT state such as a fourth RT state) in which the game state transitions to the normal game state when a predetermined number of games are executed;
is set,
The gaming machine described in feature E9 is characterized in that the setting means is capable of setting the second re-play state to the specific number corresponding to the remaining period.

The above configuration has a first replay state that can transition to the normal game state when a predetermined termination condition is met, and a second replay state that transitions to the normal game state when a certain number of games are played. The second replay state is used to associate the state with the remaining period of the specific effect. If the first replay state were used, even though it had been set to correspond to the remaining period of the specific effect, the termination condition may not be met, which could result in the replay state and the specific effect not being associated.

Note that, to each of the configurations of Feature Group A through Feature Group E described above, the technical ideas shown in the configurations of other Feature Groups A through E can be applied individually, or the respective technical ideas can be applied in combination. When applying the respective technical ideas in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

Below is the basic configuration of a gaming machine to which the above-mentioned features can be applied.

Pachinko gaming machine: A gaming machine that has an operating means operated by the player, a gaming ball launching means that launches gaming balls based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage that guides the launched gaming balls to a specified gaming area, and various gaming components arranged within the gaming area, and that awards a bonus to the player when the gaming ball passes through a specified passage section of each of the gaming components.

Slot machines and other reel-type gaming machines: A gaming machine equipped with a variable display means that displays a fluctuating series of symbols consisting of multiple symbols and then displays the series of symbols as it stops. The symbol fluctuations are initiated by operating a start operating means, and the symbol fluctuations are stopped by operating a stop operating means or after a predetermined time has passed. A special gaming state (bonus game, etc.) advantageous to the player is generated on the condition that the final stopped symbol at the time of the fluctuations is a specific symbol.

Ball-operated belt-type gaming machine: A gaming machine equipped with a variable display means that displays a fluctuating pattern sequence consisting of multiple symbols and then displays the symbol sequence as a final stop; the pattern change begins when a start operating means is operated, and the pattern change is stopped when a stop operating means is operated or after a predetermined time has passed; a special gaming state (bonus game, etc.) advantageous to the player is generated on the condition that the final stopped symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol; further equipped with a ball receiving device that performs a loading process to take gaming balls from the ball receiving device, and a payout device that pays out gaming balls to the ball receiving device; and configured so that operation of the start operating means is valid when gaming balls are inserted by the loading device.

10... slot machine as gaming machine, 32... reels as rotating body, 41... start lever as start operation means, 42-44... stop switches as stop operation means, 64... speaker constituting auxiliary performance section, 65... auxiliary display section constituting auxiliary performance section, 68... indication monitor, N8... eighth display segment as interval indicator, 81... display control device as sub-control board, 101... main control device as main control board, 102... CPU constituting various control means such as lottery means and main control means.

Claims (1)

A plurality of rotating bodies on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
A display unit that allows some of the patterns on each of the rotating bodies to be visible;
a start operation means for starting rotation of each of the rotating bodies when operated;
a stop operation means for stopping the rotation of each of the rotating bodies when operated;
a drive control means for starting rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and for stopping rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
a lottery means for holding a lottery to determine whether or not to award a special benefit to a player based on the operation of the start operation means;
an awarding means for awarding a game value as a benefit corresponding to a predetermined result when the result of the lottery by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising:
a first gaming state and a second gaming state in which the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be a predetermined re-game result is different;
a means for transitioning from the first gaming state to the second gaming state when a predetermined transition condition is established based on a lottery result by the lottery means;
a mode notifying means capable of notifying a mode of operation of the stop operation means ;
Equipped with
A specific state in which the mode notification can be executed is set,
a first termination means capable of terminating the specific state based on the remaining number of the specific state;
a second termination means for terminating the specific state regardless of the number of remaining specific states when a predetermined forced termination condition that may be established depending on the progress of the game is established ;
Equipped with
It is configured so that a game in a predetermined state in which the mode notification is not executed is more advantageous to a player when the game in the predetermined state is executed in the second game state than when the game in the predetermined state in which the mode notification is not executed is executed in the first game state,
A means for grasping the establishment of a specific condition that will result in the establishment of the predetermined forced termination condition in a situation before the predetermined forced termination condition is established;
means for executing a predetermined game in the second game state, which is the predetermined state , after the specific state is ended when the specific condition is established in the specific state and the specific state is ended by the second ending means;
a means for preventing the predetermined game from being executed after the specific state ends when the specific condition is not established in the specific state and the specific state is ended by the first ending means;
means for executing a notification corresponding to the predetermined game being executable before the specific state is terminated by the second termination means;
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the specific state is ended by the second ending means and the specified game is executed after the specific state, a specified presentation in the specified game is performed in connection with a specified presentation in the game in the specific state before the end .